Generative Drafting

Generative Drafting Version 5 Release 16 Page 1
Generative Drafting
User's Guide
Version 5 Release 16
Special Notices
CATIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
Protected by one or more U.S. Patents number 5,615,321; 5,774,111; 5,821,941; 5,844,566; 6,233,351;
6,292,190; 6,360,357; 6,396,522; 6,459,441; 6,499,040; 6,545,680; 6,573,896; 6,597,382; 6,654,011;
6,654,027; 6,717,597; 6,745,100; 6,762,778; 6,828,974; 6,904,392 other patents pending.
DELMIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
ENOVIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.
SMARTEAM® is a registered trademark of SmarTeam Corporation Ltd.
Any of the following terms may be used in this publication. These terms are trademarks of:
Java Sun Microsystems Computer Company
OLE, VBScript for Windows, Visual Basic Microsoft Corporation
IMSpost Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc.
All other company names and product names mentioned are the property of their respective owners.
Certain portions of this product contain elements subject to copyright owned by the following entities:
Copyright © Dassault Systemes
Copyright © Dassault Systemes of America
Copyright © D-Cubed Ltd., 1997-2000
Copyright © ITI 1997-2000
Copyright © Cenit 1997-2000
Copyright © Mental Images Gmbh & Co KG, Berlin/Germany 1986-2000
Copyright © Distrim2 Lda, 2000
Copyright © Institut National de Recherche en Informatique et en Automatique (INRIA
Copyright © Compaq Computer Corporation
Copyright © Boeing Company
Copyright © IONA Technologies PLC
Copyright © Intelligent Manufacturing Software, Inc., 2000
Copyright © SmarTeam Corporation Ltd
Copyright © Xerox Engineering Systems
Copyright © Bitstream Inc.
Copyright © IBM Corp.
Copyright © Silicon Graphics Inc.
Copyright © Installshield Software Corp., 1990-2000
Copyright © Microsoft Corporation
Copyright © Spatial Corp.
Copyright © LightWork Design Limited 1995-2000
Copyright © Mainsoft Corp.
Copyright © NCCS 1997-2000
Copyright © Weber-Moewius, D-Siegen
Copyright © Geometric Software Solutions Company Limited, 2001
Copyright © Cogito Inc.
Copyright © Tech Soft America
Copyright © LMS International 2000, 2001
Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001
CAM-POST ® Version 2001/14.0 © ICAM Technologies Corporation 1984-2001. All rights reserved
The 2D/2.5D Display analysis function, the MSC.Nastran interface and the ANSYS interface are based on LMS
International technologies and have been developed by LMS International
ImpactXoft, IX Functional Modeling, IX Development, IX, IX Design, IXSPeeD, IX Speed Connector, IX Advanced
Rendering, IX Interoperability Package, ImpactXoft Solver are trademarks of ImpactXoft. Copyright ©2001-
2002 ImpactXoft. All rights reserved.
This software contains portions of Lattice Technology, Inc. software. Copyright © 1997-2004 Lattice
Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright © 2005, Dassault Systèmes. All rights reserved.

Generative Drafting
Overview
Conventions
What's New
Getting Started
Defining the Drawing Sheet
Part Drawing
Opening a Part
Creating a Front View
Creating a Projection View
Creating a Section View
Creating a Detail View
Creating a Section Cut
Assembly Drawing
Opening an Assembly
Creating a Frame and a Title Block
Creating Views via the Wizard
Overloading Element Properties
Generating Balloons and a Bill of Material
Creating an Isometric View and Changing its Properties
User Tasks
Drawing Management
Creating a New Drawing
Opening a Drawing
Editing Drawing Links
Updating Drawings Via the Batch Monitor
Sheets
Defining a Sheet
Modifying a Sheet
Managing a Background View
View Creation
Before You Begin
About the View Generation Modes
Creating an Advanced Front View
Creating an Unfolded View
Creating a View from 3D
Creating an Auxiliary View
Creating an Offset Section View / Cut
Creating a Section View / Cut (Planar Surface)
Creating an Aligned Section View / Cut
Creating a Section View / Cut with Profile Defined in 3D
Creating a Detail View / Detail View Profile
Creating a Quick Detail View / Quick Detail View Profile
Creating a Clipping View / Clipping View Profile
Creating an Isometric View
Creating an Exploded View
Creating a Broken View
Creating a Breakout View
View Update Reporting
View Modification
Before you begin
Moving a View
Positioning a View
Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View
Locating Reference/Resulting Views
Isolating Generated Views
Restoring Deleted Generated Elements
Locking a View
Scaling a View
Renaming a View
Modifying a View Projection Plane
Generating a Bill of Material
Generating Balloons on a View
Showing Geometry in Views
Modifying a Callout Geometry
Modifying a Pattern
Duplicating Generative Geometry
Modifying a View's Links
Applying a View's Links to Another View
Generative View Styles
Creating a View using Generative View Styles
Switching a View to Another Generative View Style
Applying the Generative Style of a View to Another View
Applying a Generative View Style to a View
Dimension Generation
Before You Begin
Generating Dimensions in One Shot
Filtering Dimension Generation
Generating Dimensions Semi-Automatically
Analyzing Generated Dimensions
Positioning Dimensions (View per View)
Analyzing Interfering Dimensions
Driving 3D Constraints via Generated Dimensions
Dimension Manipulation
Before You Begin
Creating Dimensions
Creating Half-Dimensions
Creating Explicit Dimensions
Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions
Creating Chamfer Dimensions
Creating Associative Thread Dimensions
Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions
Creating a Hole Dimension Table
Creating a Points Coordinates Table
Creating/Modifying Radius Curvature Dimensions
Creating Overall Curve Dimensions
Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions
Creating Partial Curvilinear Length Dimensions
Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction
Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points
Creating Dimensions between an Element and a View Axis
Modifying the Dimension Type
Re-routing Dimensions
Interrupting Extension Lines
Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position
Modifying the Dimension Line Location
Specifying the Dimension Value Position
Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value
Modifying the Dimensions Overrun/Blanking
Lining up Dimensions (Free Space)
Lining up Dimensions (Reference)
Creating a Datum Feature
Modifying a Datum Feature
Creating a Geometrical Tolerance
Modifying Geometrical Tolerances
Copying Geometrical Tolerances
Creating Driving Dimensions
Dimension Systems
Before You Begin
Creating Chained Dimension Systems
Creating Cumulated Dimension Systems
Creating Stacked Dimension Systems
Modifying a Dimension System
Lining Up Dimension Systems
Technological Feature Dimensions
Before you Begin
Creating Inter-Technological Feature Dimensions
Creating Intra-Technological Feature Dimensions
Annotations
Before You Begin
Creating a Free Text
Creating an Associated Text
Making an Existing Annotation Associative
Creating a Text With a Leader
Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation
Handling Annotation Leaders
Adding Frames or Sub-Frames
Replicating Text and Attribute
Copying Graphic Properties
Creating a Datum Target
Modifying a Datum Target
Creating a Balloon
Creating Associative Balloons on Generated Product Views
Modifying a Balloon
Creating a Roughness Symbol
Creating a Geometry Weld
Creating a Welding Symbol
Modifying Annotation Positioning
Creating/Modifying a Table
Finding and Replacing Text
Performing an Advanced Search
Querying Annotation Links
Adding Attribute Links to Text
Dress-Up Elements
Creating Center Lines (No Reference)
Creating Center Lines (Reference)
Modifying Center Lines or Axis Lines
Creating Threads (No Reference)
Creating Threads (Reference)
Creating Axis Lines
Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines
Creating an Area Fill
Creating Arrows
Properties
Editing Sheet Properties
Editing View Properties
Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties
Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties
Editing Pattern Properties
Editing Annotation Font Properties
Editing Text Properties
Editing Picture Properties
Editing Dimension Text Properties
Editing Dimension Font Properties
Editing Dimension Value Properties
Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties
Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties
Editing Dimension Line Properties
Editing Dimension System Properties
Editing 2D Component Instance Properties
Editing Callout Properties
Images
Inserting Images (Raster or Vector)
Editing Raster Images
Print
Printing a Sheet
Printing using a Clipping Operator
Interoperability
Creating and Modifying Views from a .Model
File Export and Import
Drafting Interoperability
Working with ENOVIA LCA
Managing CATDrawing Documents in ENOVIA LCA
Optimal CATIA PLM Usability for Drafting
Working with ENOVIA VPM
Managing CATDrawing Documents in ENOVIA VPM
Workbench Description
Menu Bar
Generative Drafting Toolbars
Drawing
Views
Generative View Style
CATDrawing Specification Tree Icons
Customizing
Customizing Settings
General
Layout
View
Generation
Geometry
Dimension
Manipulators
Annotation and Dress-Up
Administration
Customizing Toolbars
Administration Tasks
What You Need to Know About Generative View Styles
Administering Generative View Styles and Standards
Before You Begin Setting Generative View Style Parameters
Setting General Generative View Style Parameters
Generate Parameters
View Dress-up parameters
Setting Workbench-Specific Generative View Style Parameters
Automotive BiW Fastening Generative Parameters
Composites Design Parameters
Electrical Harness Flattening Parameters
Generative Shape Design Parameters
SheetMetal Parameters
Equipment & Systems Parameters
Glossary
Index
Overview
Welcome to the Generative Drafting User's Guide. This guide is intended for users who need to become quickly
familiar with the Generative Drafting Version 5 product.
This overview provides the following information:
● Generative Drafting in a Nutshell
● Before Reading this Guide
● Getting the Most Out of this Guide
● Accessing Sample Documents
● Conventions Used in this Guide
Generative Drafting in a Nutshell
Version 5 Generative Drafting is a new generation product that provides users with powerful
functionalities to generate drawings from 3D parts and assembly definitions.
The Generative Drafting User's Guide has been designed to show you how to generate drawings of varying
levels of complexity, as well as apply dimensions, annotations and dress-up elements to these drawing.
Before Reading this Guide

Before reading this guide, you should be familiar with basic Version 5 concepts such as document windows,
standard and view toolbars. Therefore, we recommend that you read the Infrastructure User's Guide that
describes generic capabilities common to all Version 5 products. It also describes the general layout of V5
and the interoperability between workbenches.
You may also like to read the following complementary product guides, for which the appropriate license is
required:
● Interactive Drafting User's Guide: explains how to create drawings of varying levels of complexity.
● Data Exchange Interface User's Guide: describes how to import and export external files in
miscellaneous formats, including DXF/DWG and CGM.
● V4 Integration User's Guide: presents interfaces with standard exchange formats and most of all with
V4 data.
Getting the Most Out of this Guide

To get the most out of this guide, we suggest that you start reading and performing the step-by-step
Getting Started tutorial. This tutorial will show you how to define a drawing sheet and create views from a
3D part.
Once you have finished, you should move on to the Basic Tasks section, which deals with handling
drawings and sheets, creating and modifying views, generating dimensions, etc.
If you are an administrator, the Administration Tasks section is specifically aimed at you. You will see how
to manage and customize generative view styles.
The Workbench Description section, which describes the Generative Drafting workbench, and the
Customizing section, which explains how to customize the Generative Drafting workbench, will also
certainly prove useful.
Accessing Sample Documents

To perform the scenarios, you will be using sample documents contained in the
online\cfysm_C2\samples\\Drafting folder for CATIA and online\\cfysm_D2\\samples\\Drafting for
DELMIA. For more information about this, refer to Accessing Sample Documents in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.
Conventions
Certain conventions are used in CATIA, ENOVIA & DELMIA documentation to help you recognize and understand
important concepts and specifications.
Graphic Conventions
The three categories of graphic conventions used are as follows:
● Graphic conventions structuring the tasks
● Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required
● Graphic conventions used in the table of contents
Graphic Conventions Structuring the Tasks
Graphic conventions structuring the tasks are denoted as follows:
This icon... Identifies...
estimated time to accomplish a task
a target of a task
the prerequisites
the start of the scenario
a tip
a warning
information
basic concepts
methodology
reference information
information regarding settings, customization, etc.
the end of a task

functionalities that are new or enhanced with this release
allows you to switch back to the full-window viewing mode
Graphic Conventions Indicating the Configuration Required
Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required are denoted as follows:
This icon... Indicates functions that are...
specific to the P1 configuration
Graphic Conventions Used in the Table of Contents
Graphic conventions used in the table of contents are denoted as follows:
This icon... Gives access to...
Site Map
Split View Mode
What's New?
Overview
Getting Started
Basic Tasks
User Tasks or Advanced Tasks
Interoperability
Customizing
Reference
Methodology
Frequently Asked Questions
Glossary
Index
Text Conventions
The following text conventions are used:
● The titles of CATIA, ENOVIA and DELMIA documents appear in this manner throughout the text.
● File -> New identifies the commands to be used.
● Enhancements are identified by a blue-colored background on the text.
How to Use the Mouse

The use of the mouse differs according to the type of action you need to perform.
Use this
mouse button... Whenever you read...
● Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

● Click (icons, dialog box buttons, tabs, selection of a location in the document window,
...)
● Double-click
● Shift-click
● Ctrl-click
● Check (check boxes)
● Drag
● Drag and drop (icons onto objects, objects onto objects)
● Drag
● Move
● Right-click (to select contextual menu)

What's New?
New Functionalities
Generation of WorkOnSupport3D in drawing views
You can now project Work On Support 3D in drawings. This enables you to determine the position in 3D
of the projected elements (that is, the associated solid or surfaces).
Enhanced Functionalities
Generation of threads in views pointing MML parts
Thanks to technological results, you can now generate threads in views pointing parts that were created
using the Paste Special As Result with Link command. CPU and memory consumption are decreased
while creating or updating a view containing such threads.
Multi-selection of bodies or parts for Modify Links
When modifying a view's links, you can now multi-select features using the Shift and Ctrl keys.
Getting Started
Before getting into the detailed instructions for using Generative Drafting, the following tutorial aims at
giving you a feel of what you can do with the product. It provides step-by-step scenarios showing you
how to use basic capabilities and key functionalities.
First, you will learn how to define a drawing sheet for use in the subsequent scenarios. Then, the Part
Drawing section explains how to generate various types of views from a part, while the Assembly Drawing
section shows how to generate views from an assembly and illustrates other generative functionalities.
Simply follow the instructions as you go along. Note that you can perform each section of this tutorial
independently, depending on your specific drawing needs.
The main tasks covered in this tutorial are the following:

Part Drawing
Assembly Drawing
All together, this tutorial should take about 20 minutes to complete.
Before discovering this tutorial, you should be familiar with the basic commands common to all
workbenches, which are described in the Infrastructure User's Guide.

This task shows you how to define the drawing sheet that will be used for creating the views described in the next tasks.
1. Select File -> New... from the menu bar, or click the New icon from the Standard toolbar.
The New dialog box is displayed.
2. Select Drawing from the List of Types, and click OK.
3. From the New Drawing dialog box, select the ISO standard, and the A0 ISO format.
We will use the ISO standard for the purpose of this tutorial, as well as all along the guide.
You can add an unlimited number of customized standards using Standard files that you will create and/or, if
needed, modify. Once created, this standard will appear in the New Drawing dialog box. For more details on
standards and particularly generative view styles, see the Standards Administration section in this guide. For more
details on standard, standard parameters and styles, see the Standards Administration section in the Interactive
Drafting User's Guide. Care that any user-defined standard is based on one of the four international standards
(ANSI, ISO, ASME or JIS) as far as basic parameters are concerned.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Generative Drafting workbench, a grid is set by default. For the purpose of this tutorial, you will not use the
grid. To hide it, de-activate the Grid icon from the Tools toolbar (bottom right).
The drawing sheet appears as shown here:
From now on, you will work on the created sheet. You can now either learn how to create part drawings or
assembly drawings.
Note that you can define a new, additional sheet at any time.
Part Drawing
In this first section of the Getting Started tutorial, you will learn how to generate various types of views
from a part, on the drawing sheet you previously defined.
You can also go directly to the second section of the tutorial and learn about assembly drawings.
Opening a Part
At the end of this tutorial, you will be able to print the following sheet:
Opening a Part
This task will show you how to open the 3D part from which you will create views in the Generative Drafting
workbench.
Note that you may create views from both 3D parts and assemblies. Refer to the Assembly Drawing section
of this tutorial for information on how to use assemblies.
1. Select File ->Open... from the menu bar, or click the Open icon from the Standard toolbar.
The File Selection dialog box appears.
2. Select the part to be opened, the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document.
Note that this sample documents is to be found in the C:\Program Files\Dassault

Systemes\Bxxdoc\English\online\cfysa\samples\Drafting folder (where xx in Bxxdoc stands for the
current release number).
3. Click Open. The part is opened and a message appears, informing you that it is read-only. Simply
close it. The part will remain displayed in the window, whatever views you create from it.

This task will show you how to create a front view on the sheet you defined, from the 3D part you opened.
At this step, it will be more convenient if you tile the drawing and the part windows horizontally. To do
this, click Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar.
In the Generative Drafting workbench, the view name, scaling factor and view frame are set by default in
views. Throughout this section of the Getting Started, we decided not to display view names and scaling
factors. To deactivate them, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting, click on the
Layout tab and un-check the View name and Scaling factor options.
You can also specify what geometrical and dress-up elements should be generated on views, such as
axes, center lines, fillets, 3D points, etc. Still in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting,
click on the View tab and choose your options in Geometry generation / Dress-up. For example,
check Generate center lines, and un-check Generate fillet.
If you do not want to have the specification tree displayed, press the F3 key.
1. Click the drawing window to activate it.
2. Click the Front View icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).
3. Now, in the part window, select the desired planar surface of the 3D part.
On the sheet, a blue knob appears, as well as a green frame containing a preview of the view to
be created.
The knob lets you define the location and orientation of the view to be created, using the blue
manipulators: top, bottom, left, right or rotated according to a given snapping, or according to
a specified rotation angle.
4. Click on the drawing sheet or at the center of the blue knob to generate the view.
A progress bar appears temporarily, showing the view creation progress. The front view is
created.

This task will show you how to create projection views on the sheet.
1. Click the Projection View icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).
A preview of the view to be created appears. By default, the projection view is aligned to the
front view.
As you move the cursor, a preview of the view to be created appears, as long as you keep the
cursor positioned at a possible projection view location (at the left, right, top or bottom of the
red frame).
2. Define the projection view position, for example the right view position, using the cursor.
Note that the left view shown here was created and therefore positioned according to ISO
standards and the First Angle Projection method. For more information, refer to Creating
Views via the Wizard.
3. Click to generate the view. A progress bar appears while the view is being created.
4. Click the Projection View icon once again.
5. Use the cursor to define the projection view position, for example the bottom view position, and
click to generate the view. Once again, a progress bar appears during the view creation process.
The views result as shown here.


This task will show you how to create a section view using the front view you previously generated.
Section views make drawings more readable by replacing the hidden elements of parts, including holes,
with filled areas.
To perform this scenario, it is recommended that you tile the drawing and the part windows horizontally.
1. In the drawing window, click the Offset Section View icon from the Views toolbar
(Sections sub-toolbar).
2. Select the holes and points to define the cutting profile on the view. SmartPick assists you when
creating the profile.
Note that selecting a circular edge, a linear edge, an axis line or a center line (for example, a
hole) makes the view callout associative by default to the corresponding 3D feature. If you
select a circle, the callout will go through the circle center. If you select an edge, the callout will
be parallel to the selected edge.
If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use the Undo or
Redo icons.
As you select the second point, the section plane appears and moves dynamically on the 3D
part while you define the profile on the drawing. This section plane will automatically disappear
when you double-click to end the callout definition.
3. Double-click to end the cutting profile creation. A preview is displayed.
4. Define the section view position using the cursor.

Positioning the view also defines the section view direction, as if it were a left or a right
projection view. The direction of the callout blue arrows changes as you change the cursor
position.
Using the cursor, you can then position the section view in order to align it, or to not align it, to
the front view.
● The patterns which are used to represent sections are defined in the standards. For more information,
refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
● You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif). For more information, refer to
Modifying a Pattern.

This task will show you how to create a detail view from the front view you previously generated.
1. Click the Detail View icon from the Views toolbar (Details sub-toolbar).
2. Click where you want to position the callout center.
3. Drag the cursor to define the callout radius, and click when you are satisfied.
A dashed, blue circle appears at the position of the cursor.
4. Move this circle to where you want to position the detail view, and click to generate the view.
A progress bar appears while the view is being created.
5. If you are not satisfied with the position of the detail view, you can drag it to a new position.
Simply drop it to its new position.

As in step 4, the scale is, by default, twice that of the active view. You can modify this scale.
6. To do so, right-click the detail view, select Properties from the contextual menu and then click
the View tab.
7. Enter 4 in the Scale field and click OK.

For the purpose of this exercise, you will now add a dimension to the detail view.
8. To do so, click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
9. Click two elements in the view, as shown here.
The dimension is created. Move your cursor to where you want to position the dimension, and
click to generate the dimension. If you are not satisfied with the position of the dimension,
you can drag and drop it to a new position.

This task will show you how to create a section cut from the detail view you just created.
The scale of the section cut will depend on the scale of the view this section cut is generated from. In this
case, the section cut is generated from a detail view with a scale 4, so the section cut scale will also be 4.
1. Right-click the detail view and select the Activate View option from the contextual menu.
2. Click the Aligned Section Cut icon from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).
3. Select the holes and points to define the cutting profile.
Note that selecting a circular edge, a linear edge, an axis line or a center line (for example, a
hole) makes the cutting profile associative by default to the 3D feature. If you select a circle,
the profile will go through the circle center. If you select an edge, the profile will be parallel to
the selected edge.
Also note that SmartPick assists you when creating the profile. For more information, refer to
Using SmartPick.
If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use the Undo or
Redo icons.
4. Double-click to end the cutting profile creation.
A preview of the view to be created appears. Positioning the section cut either to the right or to
the left defines the section cut direction (as if it were a projection view).
5. Click to generate the section cut. A progress bar appears while the view is being created.
● Once the section cut has been generated, you can modify its position relatively to the detail view:
right-click the section cut and select View Positioning -> Position Independently of Reference
View from the contextual menu.
● Selecting an existing edge within the view lets you define automatically the direction of the cutting
profile. You can also select a reference plane in 3D or a 3D wireframe plane. For more information,
refer to Creating an Offset Section Cut/Section View.
● The patterns which are used to represent the section cut are defined in the standards. For more
information, refer to Pattern Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
For the purpose of this tutorial, you will now add a dimension to the section cut.
6. To add a diameter dimension to the section cut, click the Dimension icon and click one edge
only.
In our example, a larger font size has been applied to the dimension value.
The resulting sheet now appears similar to what is shown here. Note that in this case, we re-
positioned the views.
7. You can now print this sheet. To do so, select File -> Print from the menu bar. Make sure the
print format you set when defining the sheet is the same as the print format of the printer.
You have reached the end of the first section of this tutorial. Now that you have learned about part
drawings, you can go to the second section of this tutorial and learn about assembly drawings.
Assembly Drawing
In this second section of the Getting Started tutorial, you will learn how to generate views from an
assembly, on the drawing sheet you previously defined. Additionally, you will learn how to use other
generative functionalities.
You can also go back to the first section of the tutorial and learn about part drawings.
Opening an Assembly
Creating an Isometric View and Changing its Properties
At the end of this tutorial, you will be able to print the following sheet:
Opening an Assembly
This task will show you how to open the 3D assembly from which you will create views in the Generative
Drafting workbench, as well as perform other operations.
Note that you may create views from both 3D assemblies and parts. Refer to the Part Drawing section of
this tutorial for information on how to use parts.
1. Select File -> Open... from the menu bar, or click the Open icon from the Standard toolbar.
The File Selection dialog box appears.
2. Select the assembly to be opened, the GEAR-REDUCER_GS.CATProduct document.
Note that this sample documents is to be found in the C:\\Program Files\Dassault

Systemes\\Bxxdoc\\English\\online\\cfysm_C2\samples\\Drafting folder (where xx in Bxxdoc
stands for the current release number).
3. Click Open. The assembly is opened and a message appears, informing you that it is read-only.
Simply close it. The assembly will remain displayed in the window, whatever views you create from
it.

This task will show you how to insert a frame and a title block in the background of the sheet you defined.
If you do not want to have the specification tree displayed, press the F3 key.
1. Click the drawing window to activate it.
2. Select Edit -> Background from the menu bar to switch to the background.
3. Click the Frame Creation icon from the Drawing toolbar.
The Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box is displayed:

4. Choose a style from the Style of Titleblock drop-down list. For the purpose of this exercise, choose
Drawing_Titleblock_Sample1. You can notice that a preview of the frame and title block is
displayed in the dialog box.
5. Click the action you want to perform from the list of actions; in this case, click Creation.
6. Click OK. Wait while the frame and title block are being created.
7. Select Edit -> Working Views from the menu bar to switch back to the working views.

This task will show you how to create a number of views on the sheet you defined, from the 3D assembly
you opened.
At this step, it will be more convenient if you tile the drawing and the assembly windows horizontally. To
do this, click Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar.
If you performed the Part Drawing section of the Getting Started, you deactivated the view name and
scaling factor (they are set by default). You now need to reactivate them so that they are displayed in
views. To do this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting, click on the Layout tab
and check the View name and Scaling factor options.
Also, you need to specify what geometrical and dress-up elements should be generated on views. Still in
Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting, click on the View tab. Make sure Generate
center lines is selected (it should be if you performed the Part Drawing section of the Getting Started)
and check Generate axis.
1. Click the View Creation Wizard icon from the Views toolbar (Wizard sub-toolbar).
The View Wizard (1/2): Predefined Configurations dialog box is displayed.

2. Select the Configuration 3 using the 1st angle projection method icon to create a
front, a top and a left view using the ISO standard/first angle projection method.
3. Click Next > to go to the second step of the wizard. The View Wizard (2/2): Arranging the
Configuration dialog box is now displayed with a new set of view buttons.
4. Simply click Finish to validate and exit the dialog box.
For more in-depth information on projection methods and the various possibilities offered by the wizard,
refer to Creating Views via the Wizard in the User Tasks chapter.
5. Now, in the assembly window, select the Slow Speed sub-assembly from the specification tree.
Note that you can also select the whole assembly.

6. Then, click on the desired plane on the 3D assembly to define the reference plane.
On the sheet, a blue knob appears, as well as three green frames containing a preview of the
views to be created.
The knob lets you define the location and orientation of the views to be created, using the blue
manipulators: top, bottom, left, right or rotated according to a given snapping, or according to
a specified rotation angle.
7. Click on the drawing sheet or at the center of the blue knob to generate the views.
A progress bar appears temporarily, showing the view creation progress. The front, top and left
views of the selected sub-assembly are created.
You may need to move the views to position them properly on the drawing. To do this, simply
drag the front view (i.e. the active view with a red frame) with the cursor and drop it when you
are satisfied with the position of the views.


This task will show you how to create a section view using a view you previously generated.
Section views make drawings more readable by replacing the hidden elements of parts, including holes, with filled
areas.
1. Double-click the view from which you want to create the section view, to activate it. In this particular case,
double-click the left view.
2. In the drawing window, click the Offset Section View icon from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-
toolbar).
3. Select the axis line in the left view.
Note that selecting this axis line makes the view callout associative by default to the corresponding 3D
feature.
The first point of the cutting profile is automatically created on the view. The section plane appears and
moves dynamically on the 3D sub-assembly while you define the profile on the drawing.
4. Double-click the last point of the cutting profile to end its creation.
The section plane automatically disappears, and a preview is displayed.
5. Define the section view position using the cursor.
Positioning the view also defines the section view direction, as if it were a left or a right projection view.
The direction of the callout blue arrows changes as you change the cursor position.
● In our example, the various parts use a material to which a specific pattern is associated. In this case, it is the
pattern associated to this material which is used. For more information, refer to View Generation Definition in the
Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
● You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif). For more information, refer to Modifying a
Pattern.

This task will show you how to overload the properties of elements in the section view you created previously.
A number of the properties that you can overload are originally defined as properties of the 3D product component in the
Product Structure workbench.
1. Right-click the section view A-A.
2. In the contextual menu, select Section view A-A object -> Overload properties.
The Characteristics dialog box is displayed.
Select the elements (part instances) that you want to edit, in this case, the slow speed shaft and the two
bearings.
These elements are highlighted as you select them in the drawing, and listed in the dialog box.
3. In the dialog box, select Slow speed shaft as the first element to edit, and click the Edit button.
The Editor dialog box is displayed.

4. Uncheck Cut in section views to specify that the 3D element should not be cut in the section view.
5. Click OK to validate and exit the dialog box.
6. Back in the Characteristics dialog box, select the two bearings elements to edit them simultaneously, and click the
Edit button.
7. In the Editor dialog box, choose another color in the appropriate box of the Graphic Properties area.
8. Click OK to validate and exit the dialog box. In the Characteristics dialog box, you can notice that the listed
characteristics have been updated for each element.

9. Click OK again. A dialog box is displayed while the view is being re-computed.
The selected elements are updated in the view: the slow speed shaft is not cut anymore, and the bearings are
displayed with a different color.
For more in-depth information on overloading properties, refer to Overloading Element Properties in the User Tasks
chapter.

This task will show you how to do the following:
● generate balloons in the active view. Balloons correspond to references defined on the different components of an
assembly.
● insert a Bill of Material into the active view. The Bill of Material provides information on the product element from
which the view was generated.
The left view, in which you will generate the balloons and the Bill of Material, should still be active from the previous task.
If not, double-click it to activate it.
Generating Balloons
Note that the assembly components have previously been numbered in the Product Structure workbench using the
Generate Numbering command.
1. Select the Generate Balloons icon on the Dimension Generation toolbar.
The balloons are automatically generated onto the active view.

For more in-depth information on Bills of Material, refer to Generating a Bill of Material in the User Tasks chapter.
2. Select Insert -> Generation -> Bill of Material.
3. Click on the drawing sheet to specify where the Bill of Material should be inserted. In this particular case, click at
the bottom right of the left view.
The Bill of Material is created.

You can zoom the drawing to take a closer look at the balloons and/or the Bill of Material.
Creating an Isometric View and Changing its

Properties
This task will show you how to do the following:
● create an isometric view.
● change the view properties to switch it to Raster mode, displaying shading with edges. Indeed, by
default (i.e. as specified in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab), all
views are created as exact views.
At this step, if the drawing and the assembly windows are not tiled anymore, it is recommended that you
do so by clicking Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar.
1. Click the Isometric View icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).
2. Now, in the assembly window, click on the desired plane on the 3D assembly to define the
reference plane.
3. A green frame with the preview of the isometric view to be created, as well as blue manipulators,
appear. These manipulators let you redefine the reference plane orientation of the view. For more
information, refer to Before you begin in the User Tasks chapter.
5. Optionally drag the view to position it as wanted on the drawing.
Changing the View Properties

6. Right-click the isometric view and select Properties from the contextual menu.
7. On the View tab, check 3D Colors in the Dress-up area.
8. In the Generation Mode area, select Raster from the View generation mode drop-down list.
9. Click the Options button. The Generation Mode Options dialog box is displayed.
10. Select Shading with edges from the Mode drop-down list.
11. Click Close to exit the dialog box.
12. Back in the Properties dialog box, click OK to validate. A progress bar appears while your
modifications are being taken into account. The view is now in Raster mode, displaying shading
with edges.
The resulting sheet now appears similar to what is shown here. Note that in this case, we re-
positioned the views for better results.
13. You can now print this sheet. To do so, select File -> Print from the menu bar. Make sure the
print format you set when defining the sheet is the same as the print format of the printer.
You have reached the end of the second section of this tutorial and you have learned about assembly
drawings. You may go to the first section of this tutorial and learn about part drawings if you have not
already.
User Tasks
The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify views on a predefined
sheet. You may also add, modify and/or delete dress-up and 2D elements to these views. All this is
performed on a sheet which may include a frame and a title block and will eventually be printed.
Before you begin, we recommend you de-activate the Grid icon from the Tools toolbar.
Drawing Management
Sheets
View Creation
View Modification
Dimension Systems
Annotations
Dress-Up Elements
Properties
Interoperability
Drawing Management
The Generative Drafting workbench lets you manage CATDrawing documents.
Create a new drawing: create a CATDrawing document.

Open a drawing: open a CATDrawing document.
Edit drawing links: edit the links which exist from a CATDrawing document to an existing CATPart document,
CATProduct document, sheet metal part or a .model V4/V5 document.
Update drawings via the batch monitor: update a list of CATDrawing documents using the batch monitor.
Creating a New Drawing

This task will show you how to create a new drawing with pre-defined views generated from a part.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Make sure no drawing is already open.
1. From the menu bar, select Start -> Mechanical Design.
2. Select the Drafting workbench.
The New Drawing Creation dialog box appears with information on views that can possibly be
created, as well as information on the drawing standards.
You can modify the drawing standards. For this, click the Modify button.
The New Drawing Creation dialog box will not appear if you did not previously open a CATPart or a CATProduct
document.
3. Select the views to be automatically created on your drawing from the New Drawing Creation dialog
box, for example the Front, Bottom and Right icon.
4. Click OK. A progress bar appears while the views are being generated from the opened CATPart.
If the color of the part is white and the Inherit 3D Colors option is checked in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, the generated views will result white and therefore not
necessarily properly visualized.
The resulting view position will depend on the CATPart you loaded before starting the Drafting workbench. In
other words, the views will be positioned according to:
● a plane you possibly selected in the part.
● a planar surface you possibly selected in the part.
● xy coordinates, in case you did not open a CATPart beforehand. In this case, you will only be able to define
the drawing standards via the New Drawing dialog box.
Opening a Drawing
This task will show you how to open a CATDrawing document. For more details on opening documents, refer to the
Infrastructure User's Guide.
1. Click the Open icon from the Standard toolbar, or select File -> Open.
2. Select the document to be opened. In this case, open GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing.
The GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document opens as shown below:

Editing Drawing Links

This task will show you how to edit the links which exist from a CATDrawing document to an existing CATPart document. Use the same
methodology for links to a CATProduct, a sheet metal part or a V4/V5 .model document.
There are two possibilities:
● Editing drawing links with the reference document loaded
● Editing drawing links with the reference document not loaded
Editing drawing links with the reference document loaded

Go to Tools -> Options -> General, click on the General tab, and make sure the Load referenced documents option is checked (this
option is set by default). Then, click OK to validate.
When opening a drawing, if the referenced CATPart does not exist, a message will appear, mentioning that the links could not be found or
contain wrong information.
1. Open the GenDrafting_part_links.CATDrawing document.
2. Select Edit -> Links.
The Links dialog box appears with the existing links between the CATDrawing and its related CATPart. In our example, this
corresponds to links applied to the front, top and right views which are found and loaded (currently displayed in our session).
Editing drawing links with the reference document not loaded

Go to Tools -> Options -> General, click on the General tab, and uncheck the Load referenced documents option (this option is set
by default). Then, click OK to validate.
1. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document.

2. Select Edit -> Links.
The Links dialog box appears, showing the existing links between the CATDrawing and its related CATPart. In this example, this
corresponds to links applied to the front, rear, top, bottom, left, right and isometric views, which are found but not loaded
(although currently displayed in our session).
Note that when the reference document is not loaded, a number of commands can no longer be used, such as projection, dress-
up and dimension commands. You can still modify the graphic properties of the elements in the views.
3. You can perform the following operations:
● use the Load button to load parts (and parts only) that are not loaded. The status will change from "Document not loaded"
to "OK".
● use the Replace button to replace the selected link with another one. This button opens the File Selection dialog box to let
you navigate to the desired file. Once the link has been replaced, the new element name is displayed along with its status in
the Links dialog box.
The views whose link has been replaced are considered as being not-up-to date in all cases, no matter what document
you chose for replacement.
● use the Refresh button to update the links related to the document without having to close then re-open the Links panel.
This is especially useful when trying to re-access pointed documents that are not found (for instance, after a network
disconnection): in that case, clicking the Refresh button avoids you to re-select the Edit->Links... command to display an
updated view of the links.
Note that the Synchronize, Activate/Deactivate and Isolate are unavailable when editing a .CATDrawing document's links.
For more details:
● For information on the other capabilities available with the Links dialog box (such as selecting a feature and opening or changing the
corresponding source (CATPart)), refer to Editing Document Links in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
● The Search Order capability allows you to solve links. For more details, see Infrastructure User's Guide.
Updating Drawings Via the Batch Monitor

This task will show you how to update a list of CATDrawing documents. To do this, you will use the batch monitor.
The batch monitor lets you create as many batch configurations as required, and follow the progress of an update.
Updating drawings via the batch monitor will be particularly helpful if you need to update a great number of drawings
(but do not need to visualize them while doing so), or drawings which require large CPU resources.
For more details on using the batch monitor, refer to Using the Batch Monitor in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
1. Run the CATUTIL command, using one of the methods described in the Infrastructure User's Guide. For example,
from a V5 session, choose Tools -> Utility. The batch monitor appears, listing available batches.
At this point, you either need to define the batch parameters that will be used to launch drawing update (this is the
case if this is the first time you are using the batch monitor for drawing update), or you can run the batch directly (this
is the case if you already defined all the necessary data).
Defining the batch parameters

Defining the update batch parameters consists in selecting the files to update, optionally specifying the files for which
you want to force the update, and indicating the directory where the updated files should be saved.
2. From the list of available batches, double-click UpdateBatch (you can also right-click UpdateBatch and select New
parameters file). The UpdateBatch dialog box is displayed.
3. Click the Choose Files button to select the files that you want to update by batch. A selection dialog box is
displayed.
4. Browse to the directory (on your computer or on your network) which contains the files that you want to include,
select these files, and click Open. The selected files are now listed in the UpdateBatch dialog box.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 if you want to include files from another directory.
You can remove files from the list of the files to update. To do so, select the unwanted file and click the Remove Files
button.
6. By default, the files which do not need to be updated will not be. However, you can decide to force the update for
certain files, or for all of them. To do this, double-click on No in the Force Update colum for each file for which you
want to force the update. The value is now set to Yes, which means the update will be forced.
7. Click the [...] button next to the Target field to select the directory in which you want the updated files to be
saved. A dialog box is displayed.
8. Browse to the directory in which you want to save the updated files, select it and click OK. Your update batch
parameters are now defined.
Each time you run the update batch, updated files present in this target directory will be overwritten by the newly
updated files.
9. Click the Save button to specify where you want to save your batch parameters. A dialog box is displayed.
10. Browse to the directory in which you want to save the batch parameters file, specify a file name in the appropriate
field, and click Save. Your parameters are saved in an xml file.
11. You can now either click Run to run the batch immediately or click Cancel to close the UpdateBatch dialog box
and run the batch later. For the purpose of this scenario, click Cancel.
You can now exit the batch monitor. To play the scenario below, however, you will need to re-open the batch monitor.
Running the batch

Once you have defined batch parameters in an xml file, you can run the batch.
2. From the list of available batches, right-click UpdateBatch and select Associate a parameters file.
A selection dialog box is displayed.
3. Browse to the directory in which you previously saved the xml batch parameters file, select this file, and click Open
to validate.
4. Access the Start tab which now displays the name and location of the file you just associated to the batch.
5. Right-click the batch and select Run. The batch execution starts.
6. During or after the batch execution, you can get more information on the process in the Processes tab: the batch
name, the batch identification number, the status (in progress or ended) as well as the start and end time.
When the batch execution is over, you can exit the batch monitor.
Sheets
The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method for managing a sheet.
A sheet contains:
● a working view, which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet.
● a background view, which is dedicated to frames and title blocks.
● interactive or generated views.
Define a Drafting sheet: Define the sheet using commands and dialog boxes.
Modify a Drafting sheet: Modify the sheet orientation using the Page Setup dialog box.
Create a frame and title block: Create a background sheet and insert a frame and a title block into it using
the Frame and Title Block dialog box.
Manage a background view: Add to a sheet the background view (title block plus elements) from another
drawing.
Defining a Sheet
This task will show you how to define the sheet for a new CATDrawing document and, if needed, add
more sheets.
This task is divided into the following sub-sections:
● Defining a new sheet
● Adding a sheet
Defining a new sheet
1. Click the New icon from the Standard toolbar or select File -> New... from the menu bar.
2. Select Drawing, and click OK. The New Drawing dialog box is displayed.
3. From the New Drawing dialog box, select the ISO standard, and the A0 ISO format.
4. Select the Landscape orientation and then click OK.
● The sheet scale is a scaling factor which applies to all views in a given sheet. It does not determine
the position of the views (or any other object) contained in the sheet.
When the grid is displayed, the position of the view in the sheet is not determined by the grid, which
only deals with what is drawn directly in the sheet. To see the real position of a given view in a sheet,
you need to use the ruler. It is the only way to see the real coordinates in a sheet referential.
● The sheet size depends on the standard type. For example, if you choose the ISO standard, the sheet
will automatically be assigned the A0 format. You can choose another format if you want.
● At any time, you can change the standard (which you can update), sheet format, orientation and/or
scale. To do this, select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar.
If you select a new standard, the value in the Apply on field becomes All sheets and the new
standard is applied to all drawing sheets.
Adding a sheet
You can add new sheets at any time. These new sheets will be assigned the same standard, format and
orientation as the sheet first created and defined using the New Drawing dialog (default setting).
6. Click the New Sheet icon from the Drawing toolbar.
The new sheet automatically appears as follows:

● If you now delete Sheet.1, the newly created sheets will keep the same name. In other words, even
if Sheet.1 has been deleted, Sheet.2 will remain named Sheet.2.
● The F3 key lets you show/hide the specification tree.
● Once you have created more than one sheet, you can activate one of the sheets by selecting it from
the Drawing window or from the specification tree.
Modifying a Sheet
This task will show you how to modify the standard, format, orientation and/or scale of a sheet. Doing
this amounts to modifying the options you selected in the New Drawing dialog box when defining the
sheet.
Create a sheet using the ISO standard, the A0 ISO format, and the Landscape orientation.
1. Select File -> Page Setup from the menu bar.
2. From the Page Setup dialog box, select the ANSI standard, and the A ANSI format.
You can update the current standards by clicking the Update button. This copies the most
recent version of the standard file in the drawing, thus reflecting the latest changes an
administrator may have performed in the standard file.
If no new standard file is available, the Update button is disabled.

3. Select the Portrait orientation, and then click OK.
At this step, you can also insert a background view into the sheet you are currently modifying. For more
information, refer to Managing a Background View.
The Page Setup dialog box also let you modify the sheet format and set it to the printer format. For
more information, refer to Printing a Sheet.

This task shows you how to insert a frame and a title block in the background of a sheet.
This operation is performed using a macro. A few macros are provided by default. You can customize frames
and title blocks by either modifying the default macros (to add actions) or creating your own macros (to add
specific formats). For more information on how to do this, refer to Creating a Frame and a Title Block in the
Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document.
1. Select Edit -> Background from the menu bar.
2. Click the Frame Creation icon from the Drawing toolbar.
OR
2. Select the Insert -> Drawing -> Frame and Title Block items from the menu bar.
The Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box is displayed:

3. Choose a macro from the Style of Titleblock drop-down list. For the purpose of this exercise, choose
Drawing_Titleblock_Sample1. A preview of the frame and title block is displayed in the dialog box.
4. Indicate the action you want to perform in the Action list.
● Creation: creates the frame and the title block

● Deletion: deletes the frame and the title block
● Resizing: resizes and updates the frame and the title block (if you change the page format in
File -> Page Setup)
● Update: updates the frame and title block, as well as the fields in the title block (part-related
and sheet-related information)
● CheckedBy: completes the "Checked by" field and automatically update the verification date
● AddRevisionBlock: adds a revision block
Information which is not available in the part will be substituted by "XXX" in the drawing.
5. Click OK in the Insert Frame and Title Block dialog box.
When the Frame Creation icon is activated, you cannot edit the views. Use Edit -> Working Views
when you need to work on views.
When adding sheets, if you want the frame and title block to appear in newly created sheets, go to Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab. Check the Copy background view option and
the First sheet option. This will insert the frame and title block from the sheet you previously created on the
current drawing.
Managing a Background View

This task will show you how to add to a sheet the background view (title block plus elements) from the
sheet of another drawing.
Before you begin, de-activate the Grid icon from the Tools toolbar (bottom right).
1. Select the Tools -> Options command to display the Options dialog box.
2. Click Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab, and check the Copy background view
and Other drawing options.
● If you un-check Copy background view, only the sheet properties will be copied from one sheet to
another.
● If you check the First sheet and the Copy background view options, the background view of the
first sheet will become the reference.
● If you check the Other drawing and the Copy background view options, the background view of
the sheet you will select later will become the reference.
3. Click OK in the Options dialog box.
4. Click the New Sheet icon from the Drawing toolbar. The Insert Elements into a Sheet
dialog box appears.
5. Click the Browse button in the Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box. The File Selection
dialog box appears.
6. Browse to select the drawing which you will use the background view from.
In this particular case, select the GenDrafting_part_frame_titleblock.CATDrawing document.
7. Activate the Show Preview option in order to preview the selected CATDrawing document.
8. Click Open in the File Selection dialog box.
The preview of the frame and title block of the selected CATDrawing is now displayed in the
Insert Elements into a Sheet dialog box.
At any time you can decide that you do not want the preview to appear. For this, de-activate the
Preview On or Off button .
9. Click the Insert button.
The title block now appears on a new sheet named Sheet 2.

Each time you need to insert a new sheet with a given frame and title block, go to Tools -> Options -
> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab, and check the Copy background view option and
the Other drawing option.
View Creation
The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create views on a predefined sheet.
In this chapter, most of the tasks illustrate how to create views from parts. These views can also be
created from assemblies (exploded or not). Views created from assemblies are illustrated only whenever
specific points need to be mentioned.
Before you begin: You should be familiar with important concepts.

About the view generation modes: Learn in detail about each view generation mode.
Create a front view: Use a reference plane on the 3D part to create a front view. If needed, use the
manipulator to assign the right position to the view.
Create an advanced front view: Create advanced front views to configure such elements as the view
name, view scale, etc. Whenever possible, a pertinent projection plane is automatically offered.
Create projection views: Use the green frame to automatically generate the projection views as desired.
Create an unfolded view: Create an unfolded view from a Sheet Metal part.
Create a view from 3D: Generate a view and the associated annotations from the 3D.
Create an auxiliary view: Define a plane that will be used to generate the auxiliary view.
Create an offset section view: Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section view.
Create an offset section cut: Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section cut.
Create a section view (Planar Surface): Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section view.
Create a section cut (Planar Surface): Use a cutting profile to define and position the offset section view.
Create an aligned section view: Use a cutting profile to define and position the aligned section view.
Create an aligned section cut: Use a cutting profile to define and position the aligned section cut.
Create a section view with profile defined in 3D: Create a section view using a 3D profile as cutting plane.
Create a section cut with profile defined in 3D: Create a section cut using a 3D profile as cutting plane.
Create a detail view: Use a callout to create a detail view via a boolean operator from the 3D.
Create a detail view profile: Use a polygon to create a detail view via a boolean operator from the 3D.
Create a quick detail view: Use a callout to create a detail view by computing the view directly from 2D
projection.
Create a quick detail view profile: Use a polygon to create a detail view by computing the view directly
from 2D projection.
Create a clipping view: Create a clipping view with a circle as callout.
Create a clipping view profile: Create a clipping view with a sketched profile as callout.
Create an isometric view: Create an isometric view using a 3D part.
Generate an exploded view: Create an isometric view, and then, projected views from an assembly
previously exploded via Digital Mock-up workbench (DMU Navigator).
Create a broken view: Create a broken view from an active and up to date generative view using two
profiles corresponding to the part to be broken from the view extremities.
Create a breakout view: Remove locally material from a left generated view, in order to visualize the
remaining visible internal part.
Create views via the wizard: Create views using a wizard by defining options in the Pre-Defined
Configurations dialog box.
Create views via the wizard: Automatically create front, bottom and right views using a wizard.
Create views via the wizard: Automatically create front, left and top views using a wizard.
Create views via the wizard: Automatically create all the views using a wizard.
Before You Begin

Before you start creating views, this section provides you with information on the following topics:
● What is the active view?
● Defining the view orientation
● Generated geometry/dress-up settings
● Generated geometry/dress-up properties
● Constraints
● 2D/3D associativity
● 3D elements generated in views
● Dress-up generated in views
● Callout representation
● Warm Start and views
● View generation modes
Note: Views as discussed in this section are created on a pre-defined sheet, and should not be confused with working views and background
views, which are components of the sheet. For more information on these, refer to Sheets.
What is the Active View?

The active view is the view from which other views will be generated. This is also the view in which all the modifications will be performed. For
instance, all the 2D geometry and dress-up elements that will be added to the draft views to be created.
The active view is framed in red. Non-active views are framed in blue.
When you create a view, until you click at the desired view location, the view to be created is framed in green. If you click this view, it
becomes the active view and is framed in red.
The active view is underlined in the Drafting specification tree, and specific icons are used to represent the view type (Front view, Projection
view, Isometric view, etc). Refer to CATDrawing Specification Tree Icons for more information.
Activating a view
1. Double-click the frame of the view you want to activate.
OR
1. Right-click the view you want to activate. The contextual menu appears.
2. Select Activate View.
Axes are taken into account on active views. As a result, the frame of an active view will adapt to the elements included in this view.
Defining the View Orientation

You can redefine the reference plane orientation of a view to be created using the available blue arrows. This is the case when generating a
front view, an isometric view or when generating views using the wizard.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document and start creating a front view.
1. Start creating the view.
2. Click the right or left arrow to visualize the right or left side, respectively.
3. Click the bottom arrow to visualize the bottom side.
4. Click the counterclockwise arrow to rotate the reference plane.
5. Drag the green knob to redefine the rotating angle. The default increment value is 30 degrees.
6. You can modify the increment value using the green knob contextual menu. To do this, right-click on the knob and select the desired option
from the contextual menu.
● Free hand rotation: Rotation is not snapped to a given increment but totally free.
● Incremental hand rotation: This is the default value: the rotation is snapped to a given increment (from 30 to 30 degrees, between zero
and 330).
● Set increment...: The Increment Setting dialog box is displayed. Enter the Increment value you need. For example 5 deg (5 degrees).
● Set current angle to: If you select the Set angle value... option, the Angle Setting dialog box appears.
Enter the current angle (deg) you need. For example, 30.
Remember that there is no associativity between the selected plane/face in the 3D part and the projection plane of the generated views.
Yet, you can modify the view projection plane if you change the 3D part orientation. For more information, refer to the Modifying the View
Projection Plane section.
Generated Geometry/Dress-Up Settings

You can generate a number of geometry or dress-up elements, depending on the options you select in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> View tab.
For example, if you want the colors of a part to be automatically generated onto the views, check the Inherit 3D colors option.
If the color of the part is white and the Inherit 3D colors option is checked, the generated views will be white and you may not be able to
visualize them properly.
● Note that threads are generated on the condition they are defined on 3D holes.
● To project sketches, you need to select the Project 3D wireframe option. However, note that a sketch cannot be projected if it is currently
being edited in the Sketcher workbench. To project sketches, you need to exit the Sketcher workbench before launching the view creation.
Generated Geometry/Dress-Up Properties

You can change the properties of some geometry and dress-up elements after the view has been generated, provided you check the desired
options from the Properties dialog box. To display it, choose Properties from the contextual menu and select the View tab.
● Note that if you modify the graphical properties (color, line type, line thickness, layer, no show) of generated geometry or dress-up
elements, or delete these elements, such modifications are persistent at update, i.e. they are kept when updating the view later on. Also
note that once you have overloaded the original graphical properties of a geometry or a dress-up element, you cannot reset it to its original
properties. On the other hand, you can restore all deleted elements in a view using the Restore Deleted command.
● Note that the persistency of this graphical dress-up/delete:

❍ is only available in exact views. In views other than exact (CGR, Approximate or Raster), an update operation will reset the elements to
their original properties.
❍ creates additional specifications in the drawing, which increases the file size and requires additional computing during the update
process.
● As far as layers are concerned, when you select a layer and modify the graphical properties of some elements, the properties will be applied
only when you update the selected layer.
By default, the view and its elements are created in the layer None, as displayed in the Graphic Properties Toolbar. Yet, if you modify
your view and add elements, they will be created in the active layer, which can be layer 0, 1, 2 or any layer you select in the toolbar.
● Since generated items are deleted and recreated each time the view is updated, when edited, the graphical properties of the item are stored
according to its 3D origin. This way, the right properties are applied to each new item according to its 3D origin.
Thus, once updated, the generated item inherits the graphical properties corresponding to the 3D origin previously stored.
In the following example, two generated items are modified. After performing an update, four items inherits the graphical properties of the 3D
origin.
3D part.
Modified Generated Item. Generated item with the same 3D origin.
3D part.
Modified Generated Item. Generated item with the same 3D origin.

Overloaded graphical properties are not kept for the following generated items:
● Generated shapes (hatching in sections and breakout views)
● Edges corresponding to symbolic visualization of fillets
● Edges representing limits of clipping, detail or broken views (this does not include the callout of detail which is not a generated element)
● Bend limits in unfolded views of sheet metal parts
● Annotations generated from 3D annotations or 3D application elements (structure, piping)
Definition of Generated geometry and dress-up properties
● Front view ● Projection view

● Unfolded view ● Auxiliary view
Views ● View from 3D ● Section view
● Isometric view ● Section cut
● Advanced front view ● Detail view
Parameters
● Hidden lines
● Center lines
● Axis lines Properties defined via
Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Properties generated in the view.
● Threads Drafting -> View.
● Fillets
● 3D colors
● 3D specifications
Properties defined via Properties defined via
3D points
Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
●
● 3D wireframe Drafting -> View. Drafting -> View.
● Generation mode
Constraints
Constraints detected when views are generated from the 3D do not appear on the drawing.
2D/3D Associativity
... On Views
A generative view results from specifications in a 3D document. This specification corresponds either to the whole document or to a feature in
the document. This feature can be:
1. a .model document
2. a part document (the whole document or still one or more bodies)
3. a product document (the whole document or still one or more assemblies)
... And View Positioning
Generative views are positioned according to the center of gravity of the 3D part. If you modify a 3D part in such a way that the center of
gravity of the part changes, then, when updating the view, the position of the view will be re-computed according to the new center of gravity
of the part and will be modified accordingly.
For more information on View Positioning properties, refer to the Generative Views Positioning Mode section in the Interactive Drafting User's
Guide.
... And Update
Any modification applied to the specifications, before the generated view(s) is/are updated, is detected. You can perform an update. You can
update all views or a selection of views:
● The Update icon is active in the Update toolbar when a sheet (or drawing) contains views that need to be updated (this can be all
views in the sheet or some of them only). You can update all views in the active sheet by clicking this icon.
● An update symbol appears in the specification tree for the views that need to be updated. You can update a selection of views by
selecting and right-clicking the view(s) you want to update and choosing Update Selection from the contextual
menu. Only the items you select are updated. Update symbols remain in the specification tree for the items that have not been updated, so
you always know which items are up-to-date and which are not.
● Update symbols also appear in the specification tree to indicate drawings and sheets containing views that need to be updated.
You can update all views in a given sheet (or in a selection of sheets), by selecting and right-clicking the sheet(s) and then choosing
Update Selection. You can also use the same method for a drawing: this will update all sheets (and therefore all views) in the drawing.
● During an update process, a dialog box is displayed to show the progress of the update.
When the update involves several views, a Cancel button is available in this dialog box. This allows you to interrupt the update. The view
that is being processed at the time you click this button will be updated (i.e. the update of the current view will finish), and then the update
will stop. The subsequent views will not be updated.
... After Updating
Use the following commands to update views:
● Click the Update icon to update all views in the active sheet.
● Select and right-click the views you want to update and choose Update Selection from the contextual menu to
update a selection of views.
● Type C:Force Update in the Power Input field to update the drawing in accordance with the 3D. Be careful
when doing this, as you may loose manual modifications applied to the drawing.
During view update, the following operations are performed:
● associative section/auxiliary view profiles are re-computed

● the geometry is re-generated
● any annotation/dimension/dress up element linked to the generated geometry is re-computed
● in the case of elements (one or more) that have been graphically modified or deleted, these modifications/deletions are preserved, on the
condition the view was up-to-date when you deleted or modified it.
● Note that you can restore deleted elements at any time by selecting the Restore Deleted option from the contextual menu and then
updating the view. You can either use the Update icon if you modified the 3D part, or key in C:Force Update if you did not modify the 3D
part.
● If you delete a generated item and subsequently perform an update, all items that have the same 3D origin as the deleted item will not be
generated. Likewise, if you transfer a generated item to No Show and subsequently perform an update, all items that have the same 3D
origin as the item in No Show will be transferred to No Show.
... On Generated Dimensions
Generated dimensions are associative with the 3D part constraints on the condition you checked the Generation dimensions when updating the
sheet option from the Options dialog box (Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Generation tab).
Note that these dimensions will be re-generated in accordance with the other options checked/un-checked in the Options dialog box.
... And Color
When you refresh a generated view you have modified, the colors are re-generated with the geometrical information from the part, and you
might obtain unexpected results.
As an example, if you create this part...
...and then modify an element in the following generated view, such as the color of line "a" as in this example:
...then, when updating the generated view, lines a and b will be red:
The reason is that the view is refreshed with the part information and a and b lines are considered as the intersection of two planes and not as
two different elements of the generative view.
Note that modifications performed on the graphical properties (color, line type, line thickness) of a generated geometrical element (as is the
case in our example above) are associative, i.e. such modifications are kept when updating the view later on. Also note that once you have
overloaded the original properties of an element, you cannot reset it to its original properties.
... And Operations Performed on Parts
Operations performed on parts, and that can be saved with the part itself (such as Show/No Show, Delete, Deactivate, Visualization Filters,
etc.), are taken into account when generating the view.
For example, if you swap a part body to invisible space (No Show), this body will not be represented on the generated view. If you then swap
this part body to visible space (Show), you can update the corresponding views; this time, the body will be represented on the generated view.
... And Part Infrastructure Settings
Settings used for a given part, and that only have an impact on the current session but cannot be saved with the part itself (such as the
Display in Geometry Area category of settings available via Tools > Options > Infrastructure > Part Infrastructure > Display), have
no impact on how or whether the part will be represented on the generated view.
3D Elements Generated in Views

3D elements are handled differently depending on their type and on the type of view you are generating.
Section cuts, section views, and breakout views
All CATPart elements, as well as Exact Solid and Skin elements from .model documents are supported in exact mode.
Projections, quick detail views, clipping views and broken views
Exact mode
● All CATPart elements are supported.

● Exact Solid and Skin elements from .model documents are supported.
CGR and raster mode
● All CATPart elements except wireframe and 3D points are supported.

● All elements from .model documents are supported.
● External MultiCAD components are supported.
Dress-up generated in views

You can automatically create center lines, axis lines and threads according to the criteria described below. (Note that this criteria also apply to
isometric views.)
Center lines
● The view plane must be perpendicular to the rotation face
axis.
● The representation of the rotation face in the view must
exceed 180 degrees.
Axis lines
● The view plane must be parallel to the rotation face axis.
● Rotation faces made out of fillets are not taken into account
when generating axis lines.
Threads (represented from the front and rear)

● The view plane must be perpendicular to the rotation face
axis.
● The face should be a threaded hole or a thread.
● The representation of the rotation face in the view must
exceed 180 degrees.
Threads will be represented from the front AND from the

rear, whether or not the hole is threaded along its whole
depth.
Threads (represented from the side)

● The view plane must be parallel to the rotation face axis.
● The face should be a threaded hole or a thread.
Callout Representation
You can specify that the size of callout elements should not be dependent on the view scale. You have two ways of doing this:
● After callout creation, right-click on the callout, select Properties in the contextual menu and check Size not dependent on view scale on
the Callout tab.
or
● Before callout creation, in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab, check the Size not dependent on view
scale option. This option will apply to newly created callouts, i.e. selecting this option will not have any impact on existing callouts.
Note that this option only applies to drawings created with versions prior to V5 R11 (i.e. versions up to V5 R10).
Warm Start and views

In Tools -> Options -> General -> General tab, you can specify that you want a backup to be automatically performed on your data, which
would allow you to recover your data (partially or entirely) should the application crash.
If you selected the Incremental backup option (which stores all open documents in a temporary directory, and all modifications to the
document are logged in a log file), Generative Drafting views may be restored, if necessary, after a crash. However, you need to be aware of
the following facts:
● When recovering a drawing after a crash, all views which need to be restored in the drawing are automatically updated. For this reason, the
drawing will contain up-to-date views, even though it was not necessarily the case prior to the crash.
● Due to this automatic update operation, any view which was locked prior to the crash and which needs to be restored will be empty after
the restore operation (remember that locking a view means that you cannot update it).
For more information regarding these options, refer to General in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
View generation modes

You can create views using several generation modes:
● Exact
● Raster
● CGR
● Approximate
For a detailed description of each view generation mode (including the advantages and restrictions pertaining to each one), refer to About the
View Generation Modes.
About the View Generation Modes

This section provides a detailed description of each view generation mode (including the advantages and
restrictions pertaining to each one):
● Exact view
● Raster view
● CGR view
● Approximate view
● Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate
The view generation mode can be specified as a setting, through Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting -> Generation tab. In this case, it will be used when creating new views. Refer to Customizing
Settings > View for more information.
Once the view has been created, you can modify its properties through the Properties dialog box: from the
contextual menu of a given view, select Properties, click the View tab and then select the desired options. For
more information, refer to Properties > Editing View Properties.
Exact view
Exact views are generated from the Design mode: they are views for which the geometry is available. The exact
generation mode will be the best option in most cases:
● This is the fastest generation mode.

● All types of views can be generated using this option.
● All functionalities (dress-up, dimensions, annotations, etc.) are available.
However, there are a few cases in which choosing the exact generation mode will not be appropriate:
● In the case of sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data, generating exact views
may consume too much memory.
● Polyhedral elements (such as dittos, surfaces, etc.) from V4 .model documents are not supported.
When generating exact views for assemblies containing clashing bodies, some geometrical elements may
not be generated.
Raster view
Raster views are generated as images. This enables you to quickly generate overall views for large products or
assemblies, regardless of drawing quality. Such views are associative to the 3D geometry and can be updated
when the part or product changes.
Raster views involve a number of restrictions:
● You cannot generate the following types of views using this option: view from 3D, section views, section
cuts, detail views, breakout views, unfolded views.
● Raster views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines, threads).
● Creating dimensions is impossible.
● Generally speaking, all commands requiring the selection of geometry are not available.
● Raster views cannot be edited (you can work around this by isolating the view: double-clicking the image
will then launch an image editor).
As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting this option disables a number of other options on the View and
on the Generation tab (available through Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting) or in the
Properties dialog box (available through Edit -> Properties).
CGR view
CGR views are generated using the CGR format (CATIA Graphical Representation). CGR corresponds to a data
format containing a graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the Visualization
mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode). With CGR, only the
external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not available. The corresponding
.cgr file, if it exists, is inserted from the cache system.
CGR views are not as high in quality as exact views, but they consume much less memory during the
generation. This may be useful when dealing with sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts
of data. However, this generation mode is rather slow.
For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated with the CGR generation mode, see
Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate modes below.
Approximate view
Approximate views are generated using the Approximate mode. Although Approximate views are not as high in
precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption.
Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the Approximate
mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data.
The Approximate mode offers about the same advantages and restrictions than the CGR generation mode (see
above). However, there are some differences:
● Approximate consumes even less memory than CGR.

● Approximate is faster than CGR, but performances largely depend on fine-tuning.
● Approximate provides more approximate results than CGR, but these results largely depend on how you fine-
tune precision.
● Approximate lets you generate section views, section cuts and breakout views. However, note that certain
restrictions apply, which are documented in other parts of this user's guide, when appropriate.
For more information about the advantages and restrictions associated with the Approximate generation mode,
see Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and Approximate modes just below.
Advantages and restrictions common to CGR and

Approximate
Using CGR or Approximate to generate views offers the following advantages:
● Optimize memory consumption when generating and handling projection views for large products or
assemblies.
● Generate views from third-party data (such as MultiCAD), as well as from polyhedral elements (such as
dittos, surfaces, etc.) in V4 .model documents.
However, the CGR or Approximate generation mode involves a number of restrictions:
● You cannot generate the following types of views:

❍ For CGR: section views, section cuts, detail views, detail view profile, breakout views, unfolded views
and views from 3D.
❍ For Approximate: detail views, detail view profile, unfolded views and views from 3D.
● The following types of elements are not associative on CGR or Approximate views:
❍ For CGR: Auxiliary view profiles, annotations, dimensions, etc.
❍ For Approximate: Auxiliary view profiles, annotations, etc.
Dimensions may now be associative, depending on whether you select the Allow the creation of
associative dimension in approximate views option in the Dimensions associativity on 3D dialog box
(see Dimension settings).
● You cannot project 3D elements such as wireframe, points, etc. on CGR or Approximate views.
● CGR or Approximate views cannot contain dress-up elements (axis, center lines, threads).
● Persistency of graphical properties edition (color, line type, line thickness, no show) and Delete operations
performed on generated elements are not available on CGR or Approximate views.
● CGR or Approximate views being only a graphical representation of the geometry, only line segments are
generated in such views. In the case of non-associative dimensions (as is always the case for CGR views,
and may be the case for Approximate views when the Allow the creation of associative dimension in
approximate views option is not selected), the only elements that can be dimensioned are these line
segments.
As a result, you may not be able create certain types of radius or diameter dimensions in such views.
As a consequence of these restrictions, selecting either the CGR or the Approximate option disables a number
of other options on the View and on the Generation tab (available through Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting) or in the Properties dialog box (available through Edit -> Properties).

This task will show you how to create a front view either from a part or from the sub-part of a product.
You will use a reference plane. You will also learn how to create a front view with local axis system,
and how to create a front view from specific sub-bodies/sub-products.
A front view is a projection view obtained by drawing perpendiculars from all points on the edges of the
part to the plane of projection. The plane of projection upon which the front view is projected is called
the frontal plane.
Creating a front view

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet.
1. Click the Front View icon from the Views toolbar.
2. Select one plane of the 3D part or a plane surface, to define the reference plane.
Blue arrows appear.
If you select a plane surface, the reference orientation will be the external normal of the planar
surface.
To define the reference plane, you can also select:

● Two edges: these edges correspond to both axes defining the reference plane according to which
the front view will be generated. The first edge determines the horizontal axis.
● A point and an edge, or three points: you will thus define a plane.
In other words, you will select, in the geometry, one of the followings:
● a plane
● a point and then an edge
● an edge and then a point
● two edges
● two points and then an edge
● three points
Note that you can redefine the projection plane using the arrows at any time before the view
generation.
3. Click inside the sheet to generate the view.
Right-click the frame of the view, select the Properties option from the contextual menu, View tab
and check the required options in the Properties dialog box. By default, the axis and center lines are
generated. You can also view hidden lines, threads, fillets, project 3D points, etc.
● In the case of an assembly view, you can insert Bill of Material information into the active view.
● In a Product Structure context, if you create a front view from a scene of a product, you can
directly select the Scene object in the specification tree. You do not necessarily need to select the
Product and sub-products any more.
Creating a front view with a local axis system

This functionality allows you to take into account a local axis system when creating a view. That way,
the origin of the generated view is the projection of the origin of the local axis system selected in the
view plane.
Open the Axisprojection.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet.
1. Select the drawing to activate it and click the Front View icon from the Views toolbar.
2. In the Part tree, select the local axis system, i.e. Axis System.1.
Remember that you have to select the axis sytem in the specification tree and not in the 3D part.
Otherwise it would be like selecting a line in the 3D part instead of the axis system.
4. Click in the drawing to end the view creation. The part local axis system appears in the view.
When creating views with a local axis system, only the origin of the axis system is taken into account
and respected in the generated view. The orientation is not taken into account.
Create a front view from specific sub-bodies/sub-

products
You can multi-select specific sub-products in a product and/or several sub-bodies in a part to create
front views displaying the selected elements only. These multi-selected 3D elements will be previewed
and then used as reference planes for generating several front views.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document. Double-click Scene1 at the down left of the screen.
2. Select one body or press the Ctrl key and then multi-select the desired elements in the specification
tree.
3. In the 3D, point to the geometry to choose a projection plane. As you go over the geometry with the
cursor, the oriented preview automatically appears on the 3D document.
Be careful: once you multi-select bodies or sub-products, and go further into the procedure, you
cannot select or de-select any more bodies or sub-products.
● As you highlight a 3D element (going over it with the cursor), you can preview and then select the
plane corresponding to this highlighted element.
● As you highlight and select one or more elements defining the final plane, you can preview and
assign a given orientation to this final plane.
● Once you defined the plane, you can preview the front view within the 3D document.
Note that once an element is selected, this element becomes gray colored.
In addition, you can only work in one 3D document. If you try selecting another document, you
automatically leave the Front View command.
4. When the oriented preview corresponds to the projection plane you want, click on the plane to
validate.
The front view is previewed. At this point, you can still modify its orientation:
5. Click on the drawing to generate the view.

Creating a front view using selection sets

You can also use selection sets to select the sub-bodies and/or sub-products from which you want to
generate the front view.
Selection sets let you gain in productivity, particularly in the case of large assemblies, when generating
several views with numerous common features: you can select and store these features once and
reuse the selection set as often as necessary without having to select the features again.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document.
1. Before you start creating views from selection sets, you first need to create one or more selection
sets for this product. For more information, refer to Storing Selections Using Selection in the
Infrastructure User's Guide. For example, create a selection set to store the product screws.

3. Activate the CATProduct document and select Edit -> Selection Sets...
4. In the Selection Sets Selection dialog box that is displayed, select a selection set and click the Select
button. The selection set items are highlighted in the 3D and in the specification tree.
For more information, refer to Selecting Selection Sets in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Once you have selected a selection set, you can use the Ctrl key to select additional sub-bodies or sub-
products.
5. In the 3D, point to the geometry to choose a projection plane. As you go over the geometry with the
cursor, the oriented preview automatically appears on the 3D document.
6. When the oriented preview corresponds to the projection plane you want, click on the plane to
validate.
The front view is previewed. At this point, you can still modify its orientation:
7. Click on the drawing to generate the view.

● You can also use selection sets when creating isometric views and advanced front views.
● Views created from selection sets are not associative with the selection sets themselves: if you
modify a selection set after having created a view from it, the view will not be seen as needing an
update, and if you do update the view, its definition will not change. You have to create the view
over again in order for your modifications to be taken into account.
Creating an Advanced Front View
This task will show you how to create an advanced front view. Creating advanced front views lets you
configure such elements as the view name, view scale, etc. Whenever possible, a pertinent projection
plane is automatically offered.
For more information on front views in general, refer to Creating Front Views.
Open the Pinmounting.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet. Activate the drawing by
selecting the drawing window.
1. Click the Advanced Front View icon. A dialog box appears:
2. Name the view in the associated field:

3. Modify the scale value in 1:2
4. Click OK to validate your settings.
Blue arrows appear, you can still choose a plane and an orientation before view generation.
The DMU Space Analysis workbench lets you create section boxes in 3D. When generating advanced
views from the DMU Space Analysis workbench, you can select this section box to generate a view
displaying only the box content. If you then modify the section box in 3D, the view will be shown as
needing an update in the drawing. If you destroy the section box in 3D, the box definition will remain in
the drawing. For more information on section boxes, refer to Creating Section Boxes in the DMU Space
Analysis User's Guide.
You can use selection sets to generate advanced front views displaying a selection of elements only.
Selection sets let you select the sub-bodies and/or sub-products from which the view will be generated.
Refer to Creating a front view using selection sets for more information.

This task will show you how to create projection views on the sheet, relatively to the front view
previously generated.
Projection views are views conceived to be drawn or projected onto planes known as planes of
projection. A transparent plane or pane of glass representing a plane of projection is located parallel to
the front surfaces of the part.
Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Drawing window, and double-click the Projection View icon from the Views toolbar
(Projections sub-toolbar).
As you move the cursor, a previewed projection view in a green frame appears on the sheet.
2. Define the projection view position by positioning the cursor at the desired view location, for example
the right view position.
3. Click inside the green frame to generate the view.

Note that the right view above was created and therefore positioned according to the first projection
method. Projection methods are described in Creating Views via the Wizard.
4. Define the bottom view position.

6. Click on the Projection view icon to end the projection view creation.
To have information about generated geometry and dress-up properties, refer to Definition of Generated
geometry and dress-up properties section.
Creating an Unfolded View

This task shows how to create an unfolded view from a sheet metal part. An unfolded view is a projected view
that is created from a sheet metal part in order to include in a section certain angled elements. As a result, the
cutting plane may be bent so as to pass through those features.
In other words, you will extract drawings from the SheetMetal Design or the Generative Sheetmetal Design
workbench or the Aerospace SheetMetal Design workbench. For more information, refer to the appropriate
user's guide.
The Unfolded View command is active in the Generative Drafting workbench with a Version 5 SheetMetal
Design, Generative Sheetmetal Design or Aerospace SheetMetal Design license.
Open the GenDrafting_sheet_metal.CATPart document. Tile the windows horizontally to see both your drawing
sheet and your sheet metal part at the same time.
1. From the Drafting workbench, click the Unfolded View icon from the Views toolbar (Projections
sub-toolbar).
2. Select a surface on the part. This will automatically use the sheet metal reference wall plane.
If you prefer to specify which plane should be used, select the plane in the Sheet Metal specification tree.
3. Click on the sheet.
The unfolded view is displayed. It shows the axis lines resulting from bend axes, as well as bend limits.
These axis lines and bend limits are represented as dashed lines.
With sheet metal parts containing holes, the hole axes (center line) are also represented on the view.
The unfolded view looks like this:

4. Select one of the axis lines. Manipulators appear, allowing you to modify this line.
Creating a View from 3D

This task shows how to generate views and the associated annotations from the 3D (Functional Tolerancing and Annotation
workbench).
A view from 3D is extracted from a 3D part, product or process that is assigned 3D tolerance specifications and annotations.
The master document is the 3D part, product or process, which means that everything is handled at the 3D level: view
definition (projection view, section view, section cut), annotation content and graphism. For this reason, it is recommended to
perform modifications directly in 3D.
You can generate the following types of view from 3D:
● projection views, section views, section cuts
● aligned section views, aligned section cuts, offset section views, offset section cuts
With a 2D Layout for 3D Design license, you can now use the view from 3D functionality to create a drawing view from a layout
design view or isometric view. Refer to Creating Drawings and Drawing Views from a Layout in the 2D Layout for 3D Design
User's Guide for specific information.
Creating projection views, section views, section cuts

Open the 3DViews.CATPart document and open a new Drawing sheet. Tile the screen horizontally by selecting Window -> Tile
Horizontally from the menu bar.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab and make sure that Exact view is selected as the
view generation mode in the View Generation area (other view generation modes - CGR, Approximate and Raster - are not
supported).
In addition, make sure that the parent standard used in the CATDrawing document and in the CATPart (annotations) is the
same. Otherwise, both the view and the annotations may not be generated. In our scenario, the parent standard used in the
3DViews.CATPart document is ISO. Therefore, the parent standard used in the CATDrawing document should be ISO.
1. Click the View From 3D icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-
toolbar).
2. Select a view from the 3D, either in the specification tree or on the part. In this case, select Projected View.1 in the
specification tree.
The view to be created is previewed (included annotations) on the sheet. You cannot modify the view orientation, but
you can modify the view position by dragging it using the left mouse button.
3. Click on the sheet to create the new view.
You can notice that one of the extracted annotations (datum B) bears a red cross mark, which indicates that the
leader cannot be extracted linked to the geometry. This is because the 3D annotation leader is linked to 3D geometry
which is not visible in the 2D view (i.e. hidden geometry).
Such a red cross mark will be used for any annotation or dimension with a leader linked to hidden geometry (i.e. 3D
geometry which is not visible in a 2D view). You can either change the properties of the view from 3D (Edit ->
Properties) to display hidden lines, or transfer the marked annotations to a 3D view where the associated geometry
will be visible when extracted.
4. Repeat the first three steps, this time selecting Projection View.2 as the view to be created.
5. Once again, repeat the first two steps, this time selecting Section Cut View.1. The preview is displayed on the sheet.
6. On the sheet, click Projection View.2 to specify that the callout for the section cut should be positioned in that view.
Note that it works the same for section views.
In views from 3D, the axis can only be that of the sheet: the H and V axis of the view must correspond to X and Y
axis of the sheet.
For this reason, the choice of the view in which to add a section cut callout is limited.
In particular, the profile of the section cut must be horizontal on the chosen view.
In the case of extraction views, the first line of the profile (i.e. corresponding to the first compounding view) must be
horizontal.
Creating aligned section views/section cuts and offset section

views/section cuts
Open the 3DViews_AlignedSectionView.CATPart document. Tile the screen horizontally by selecting Window -> Tile
Horizontally from the menu bar. Make sure that the parent standard used in the CATDrawing document and in the CATPart
(annotations) is the same.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab and make sure that Exact view is selected as the
view generation mode in the View Generation area (other view generation modes - CGR, Approximate and Raster - are not
supported).
1. Click the View From 3D icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-
toolbar).
2. Select the aligned section view from the 3D, either in the specification tree or on the part. In this case, select Aligned
Section View.1 in the specification tree.
The view to be created is previewed (included annotations) on the sheet. You cannot modify the view orientation, but
you can modify the view position by dragging it using the right mouse button.
3. Click on the sheet to create the new view.

More About Views from 3D

● Only the elements visualized in the 3D (i.e. in Show mode) at the time of extraction are extracted in the view from 3D. In
other words, any element hidden in the 3D will not appear in the view. If you then show this element in the 3D part, it will
be displayed in the view from 3D after you update it.
● You can move or modify annotations in views from 3D. However, if the part is modified and you subsequently update the
view, any modification applied to the annotations in the drawing will be lost. We advise you perform modifications on the 3D
part directly.
● Extracted annotations are not associative to the geometry.
● How you can know what geometrical elements an annotation is applied to depends on what workbench you are in. In
Functional Tolerancing and Annotation, the 3D Annotation Query Switch On/Switch Off tool highlights such geometrical
elements.In Drafting, leaders are attached to these geometrical elements.
As a consequence of this behavior, when a 3D annotation is extracted in a drawing, the annotation position may change
from the position defined in 3D (because the leader may be moved in order to point to the extracted geometry):
❍ when a leader is not associative in the 3D and does not point to the 3D geometry.
❍ when the extracted geometry pointed by the leader is hidden in the drawing by other extracted geometries.
● 2D annotations can be added to views from 3D.

● In views from 3D, the horizontal axis of the view is parallel to the horizontal axis of the sheet.
● You can create views from 3D from a part (Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench), a product (Product
Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench) or a process (Process Tolerancing and Annotation workbench). It is
currently impossible to extract views from part, product and process at once. However, you can superpose views as a
bypass (using the View Positioning -> Superpose contextual command).
● Views from 3D are not associative to the geometry of the 3D view. So, if you modify the geometry of a 3D view, the
definition of the corresponding 2D view will not be modified at the next update, even if the 3D view is associative to the
geometry.
● The Note Object Attribute (NOA) from a ditto (2D component) is now extracted in views from 3D. However, some
restrictions apply:
❍ If a frame is defined in 3D, this frame is not displayed in the 2D view. To work around this, do not use the 3D annotation
frame when defining the NOA reference; instead, have your administrator define the frame as part of the 2D component
geometry.
❍ Information regarding the documents used to create the ditto (drawing, parts, catalogs) will be lost.
● Hidden texts and URLs on flag notes and Note Object Attributes will be lost during extraction.
● Views from 3D can be rotated. In other words, when you edit the properties of this view (Edit -> Properties), the Angle
field can be edited and customized according to your needs.
● When editing the properties of a view from 3D (Edit -> Properties), a specific tab is available: View from 3D. In this tab,
you can select the Keep layout and dress-up of 2D extracted annotations check box to preserve the layout and dress-
up applied to 2D extracted annotations when updating a view from 3D. In this case:
❍ 2D dress-up modifications are kept when updating design changes from 3D.
❍ Associativity of the annotations or their leader with the 3D geometry is taken into account.
❍ Associativity between annotations is taken into account.
Creating an Auxiliary View

This task will show you how to create an auxiliary view.
Many objects are of such shape that their principal faces cannot always be assumed parallel to the
regular planes of projection. Creating an auxiliary view allows showing the true shapes by assuming a
direction of sight perpendicular to planes that are perpendicular of the curves. This auxiliary view,
together with the top view, completely describes the object.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. Make sure the right view is active (double-click to
activate it).
1. Click the Auxiliary View icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).
2. Sketch the representation of the plane. In this case, click an edge on the right view.
You could also click a point and then an edge.
Both the 3D surface and the sketched plane are associative.
The selected edge becomes a line that you can position where desired using the cursor. This
line/callout will be automatically used as the plane.
3. Click to position the callout.
The reference plane is automatically positioned according to the selected edge.
Positioning the auxiliary view callout amounts to defining the auxiliary view direction.
4. Click to position the auxiliary view.
Before clicking, as you move the cursor within a zone perpendicular to the plane, a preview of
the auxiliary view to be created appears. This view will be automatically positioned accordingly.
This is also true when creating a section view or a section cut.
You can also move the cursor outside the zone perpendicular to the plane and position the view
where you want.
Note that the callout can be inverted or graphically modified.

● You can move the view freely after it has been created, providing you position it independently of its
reference view. For this:
1. Right-click the frame of the view you want to move.
2. Select the View Positioning -> Position Independently of Reference View

from the displayed contextual menu.
3. Drag the view to the desired location.
● You can choose the auxiliary view axis orientation. For this go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> Layout and check the Auxiliary and/or section views orientation
according to profile option.
● To have information about generated geometry and dress-up properties, refer to Definition of
Generated geometry and dress-up properties section.
Creating an Offset Section View / Cut

This task will show you how to create an offset section view/cut using a cutting profile as cutting plane. In sectioning
through irregular objects, it is often desirable to show several features that do not lie in a straight line by offsetting or
bending the cutting plane.
Open the Gun_Body.CATProduct and the GenDrafting_section_view02.CATDrawing documents.
Make sure the front view is active (use double-clicking).
Delete the text assigned to the front view (right-click on the text and select Delete option from the contextual menu).
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Offset Section View icon or the Offset Section Cut icon from the Views
toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).
2. Select the elements required for sketching the cutting profile: points, edges (linear or circular), center lines, axes.
If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use Undo or Redo icons. Note that
SmartPick assists you when creating this profile.
The section plane appears on the 3D part and moves dynamically on the part.
Associativity between the 3D part and the generated section view is created when selecting edges, center lines and axes.
Yet, constraints detected by SmartPick are not created.
Offset section view
Positioning the section view using the cursor amounts to defining the section view direction. The cutting profile is hole
associative.
4. Click to define the section view direction and to position the view on the sheet.
The view name and scale appear on the generated view if you checked the View name and Scaling factor options in the
Options dialog box, available via Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout.
Even when the view is generated, you can edit and modify the section profile. For this double-click this profile and either
invert or replace it.
Offset Section Cut
Positioning the section cut using the cursor amounts to

defining the section cut direction. The cutting profile is hole
associative.
For the purpose of this scenario, select a circular edge and

double-click when you are satisfied with the position of the
rotating profile that automatically appears on the 3D view.
5. Click to define the section cut direction and to position the
view on the sheet.
The view name and scale appear on the generated view as you checked the View name and Scaling factor options in the
Options dialog box.
● The frame of the active view adapts to the length of the cutting profile.
● You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view.
● You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the dialog
box.
About Patterns
The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern
Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties
from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or
modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.
Patterns will not be applied to offset sections which are tangent to 3D faces.
For information about generated geometry and dress-up properties, refer to Definition of Generated geometry and dress-up
properties section.
About the Cut in section views capability
In an assembly, you can define that given parts will or will not be sectioned when generated into section views. (This
capability is not available for section cuts.)
In the Assembly Design workbench, select one part, then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from and
either activate or de-activate the Cut in section views option. You can also do this when overloading element properties in
a view generated from a CATProduct.
If you choose to not cut elements in section views (i.e. if you uncheck the Cut in section views option), note that if the
cutting profile intersects an uncut part, then this part will not be cut and will be entirely projected.
About section views or section cuts generated using the Approximate generation mode
You can now generate section views or section cuts using the Approximate generation mode. For more information on the
approximate generation mode, refer to Customizing Settings: View.
When generating section views or section cuts using the Approximate generation mode, or when switching a section
view/cut from exact mode to approximate mode (i.e. via Edit > Properties), be aware of the following information:
Patterns
In the case of parts which use a material to which a specific pattern is associated, section views/cuts in Approximate mode
do not inherit the material properties from the 3D, and therefore do not use the pattern associated to this material.
Pattern properties are not persistent: for instance, after switching an exact view to the approximate mode, and vice versa,
the pattern may change.
The Cut in section views capability
If you choose to not cut elements in section views (i.e. if you uncheck the Cut in section views option), note that this
capability does not work for section views generated using the Approximate generation mode: selected elements will be cut
nonetheless. Likewise, if you switch an exact view to the approximate mode, the elements for which you unselected the Cut
in section views option will be cut in the view nonetheless.
Creating a Section View / Cut (Planar Surface)

This task will show you how to create a section view / section cut using a planar surface or a wireframe
plane in the 3D.
A section view / section cut is a view that allows sectioning through irregular objects, and thereby allows
showing several features that do not lie in a straight line by offsetting or bending the cutting plane.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart and the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing documents.
Make sure the front view is active on the drawing (double-click to activate it).
Tile your windows vertically to see both your part and the related drawing.
1. Click the Drawing
window, and click
the Offset Section
View icon or
the Offset Section
Cut icon
from the Views
toolbar (Sections
sub-toolbar).
2. Select a planar
surface on the 3D
part. This planar
surface need to
be perpendicular
to the projection
plane of the
active view.
The section plane
appears on the 3D
part and moves
dynamically on
the part.
The cutting profile
is automatically
displayed on the
front view as well
as a preview of
the view to be
generated.
3. Click to generate
the view.
About Patterns
The patterns which are used to represent the section are defined in the standards. For more information,
You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and
selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you
may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more
information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.
In an assembly, you can define that given parts will or will not be sectioned when generated into section
views. (This capability is not available for section cuts.)
In the Assembly Design workbench, select one part, then the Edit -> Properties command from the
menu bar from and either activate or de-activate the Cut in section views option. You can also do this
when overloading element properties in a view generated from a CATProduct.
If you choose to not cut elements in section views (i.e. if you uncheck the Cut in section views
option), note that if the cutting profile intersects an uncut part, then this part will not be cut and will be
entirely projected.
About section views or section cuts generated using the Approximate

generation mode
You can now generate section views or section cuts using the Approximate generation mode. For more
information on the approximate generation mode, refer to Customizing Settings: View.
When generating section views or section cuts using the Approximate generation mode, or when
switching a section view/cut from exact mode to approximate mode (i.e. via Edit > Properties), be
aware of the following information:
Patterns
In the case of parts which use a material to which a specific pattern is associated, section views/cuts in
Approximate mode do not inherit the material properties from the 3D, and therefore do not use the
pattern associated to this material.
Pattern properties are not persistent: for instance, after switching an exact view to the approximate
mode, and vice versa, the pattern may change.
option), note that this capability does not work for section views generated using the Approximate
generation mode: selected elements will be cut nonetheless. Likewise, if you switch an exact view to the
approximate mode, the elements for which you unselected the Cut in section views option will be cut
in the view nonetheless.
About planar
faces belonging to
the section profile
When a planar face

belongs to the section
profile, you may get
unexpected results (i.e.
the section edge may or
may not be displayed,
and the section may or
may not be represented
by a pattern). Indeed, as
the cutting profile can be
considered as being
either inside or outside
the part, the result
largely depends on
computing tolerances.
Consequently, when
defining the section
profile, we advise that
you avoid getting into
such a geometrical
configuration.
The example here shows

what kind of results you
may get for a given
section:
Creating an Aligned Section View / Cut

This task will show you how to create an aligned section view and/or aligned section cut using a cutting
profile as cutting plane.
An aligned section view / cut is a view created from a cutting profile defined from non parallel planes. In
order to include in a section certain angled elements, the cutting plane may be bent so as to pass
through those features. The plane and feature are then imagined to be revolved into the original plane.
Open the GenDrafting_aligned_view02.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Aligned Section Cut
If desired, you can also click the Aligned Section View icon
from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).
2. Select the elements required for sketching the cutting profile: points, edges (linear or circular), center
lines, the axis.
If you are not satisfied with the profile you create, you can, at any time, use Undo or Redo
icons. Note that SmartPick assists you when creating this profile.
The section plane also appears on the 3D part and moves dynamically on the part.
Positioning the section view amounts to defining the section cut direction. The cutting profile is hole
associative.
4. Click to generate the view.
About Patterns
selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which
you may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For
more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.
Patterns will not be applied to aligned sections which are tangent to 3D faces.
entirely projected.

generation mode
Patterns
Creating a Section View / Cut with Profile

Defined in 3D
In this task, you will learn how to create a section view or a section cut using a 3D profile as cutting
plane.
Section views / section cuts are usually created using a cutting profile as the cutting plane; such a
profile is typically driven using concentricity or parallelism constraints. Defining a profile in 3D to create
a section view / section cut enables you to make the profile associative with the geometry, and therefore
to drive this profile using dimensional constraints, for example.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart and the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing documents.

1. In the Part window, click the Sketch icon and select the xy plane as the reference plane. You are
now in the Sketcher workbench.
2. Click the Profile icon and sketch the

profile you will use as cutting plane. For the
purpose of this exercise, make sure you sketch
your profile using orthogonal lines.
3. You can now create dimensional constraints

between your profile and other elements. Click
the Constraint icon .
4. Now, click a vertical line and the edge of the

part to create a dimensional constraint between
them.
5. Exit the Sketcher workbench.
6. In the Drawing window, click the Update icon to update the view.
7. Click the Offset Section View icon from the Views toolbar (Sections sub-toolbar).
Depending on the type of profile you sketched and on the type of section (offset or aligned) you want,
you can select another icon on the Sections sub-toolbar. If the 3D profile is not valid for generating the
appropriate view, you will not be able to select it. In this case, you will need to select another icon.
8. Select the profile on the 3D part.
The cutting profile is automatically displayed on

the front view as well as a preview of the view to
be generated. Positioning the section view
amounts to defining the section view or the
section cut direction.
9. Click to generate the view.
● You can modify the section view / section cut by editing the 3D profile. After doing so, don't forget to
update the drawing.
● When editing a 3D profile, make sure that you modify it in accordance with the type of section
(offset or aligned) you created: if an edited profile is invalid when you update a drawing, the
associated section view / section cut will not be displayed (an error symbol will appear instead).
● If you delete the 3D profile and then update the drawing, the section view / section cut will not be
deleted. The profile will no longer be associated with the geometry. You can subsequently edit the
profile directly in the drawing by double-clicking it.
About Patterns
selecting Properties from the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you
may either select a new pattern or modify some graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more
information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.
Patterns will not be applied to aligned sections which are tangent to 3D faces.
entirely projected.

generation mode
Patterns

Creating a Detail View / Detail View Profile

This task will show you how to create from the 3D a detail view using either a circle as callout or a
sketched profile. Note that the procedure varies slightly depending on the method you choose.
A detail view is a partial generated view that shows only what is necessary in the clear description of
the object. Note that the Detail view command uses a Boolean operator from the 3D whereas the Quick
Detail view command computes the view directly from the 2D projection. The representation is
therefore different.
Open the GenDrafting_isometric_view.CATDrawing document.
To create a detail view (this is the method illustrated here):
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Detail View icon
from the Views toolbar (Details sub-toolbar).
2. Click the callout center.
3. Drag to select the callout radius and click a point to

terminate the selection.
OR
To create a detail view using a sketched profile:
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Detail View Profile icon from the Views toolbar (Details
sub-toolbar).
2. Create the points required for sketching a polygon used as profile.
3. Double click to end the cutting profile creation.
● SmartPick assist you when sketching the profile.

● You do not necessarily need to close the profile: the profile will automatically be closed.
The dress-up elements generated from the 3D are identified and represented in the generated detail
view whereas it is not when generating quick detail views.
4. Click to generate the detail view.
The default scale is 2 (twice the scale of the active view). You can modify this scale.
5. Right-click the detail view and select the Properties option from the contextual menu, View tab.
Enter the desired Parameters Scale, for example 3 and then click OK in this Properties dialog box.
● You can also modify the detail view boundary (Properties dialog box).
● You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype
and select the desired option from the dialog box.
● In the isometric view, you can move the detail text ("A" in this example) after detail view creation.
● If you create a detail view from a section view and subsequently modify the cutting profile in the
section view, in such a way that the detail view is no longer accurate, the detail view cannot be
updated so as to take into account the changes in the cutting profile.
● If you create a broken view from a view which contains a detail view callout, the detail view callout
will not be broken in the broken view. In other words, the circular shape of the callout will not be
modified, even if the callout overlaps the break profile. As for the detail view, it will not modified by
the break operation.
To have information about generated geometry and dress-up

properties, refer to Definition of Generated geometry and dress-
up properties section.
Creating a Quick Detail View / Quick Detail View

Profile
This task will show you how to quickly create a detail view using either a circle as callout or a sketched
profile. In this particular case, we create a quick detail view using a sketched profile as we create this
detail view from an oblong part. Note that for creating a detail view using a circle, the dialog is exactly
the same.
A detail view is a partial generated view that shows only what is necessary in the clear description of
the object. Note that the Quick Detail view command computes the view directly from the 2D projection
whereas the Detail view command uses a Boolean operator from the 3D. The representation is therefore
different. As a result, if the view which defines the quick detail view profile is modified, then the quick
detail view will be updated at the same time as the defining view.
Open the GenDrafting_isometric_view.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Drawing window and click the Quick Detail
View Profile icon from the Views toolbar (Details

sub-toolbar).
If you create a detail view using a sketched profile,
you will click the Quick Detail View icon .
2. Select the points required for sketching a polygon.
3. Double click to end the cutting profile creation.
Note that you do not necessarily need to close the profile. If so, the profile will automatically be closed.
4. Click to generate the quick detail view.
Unlike a detail view , the boundary is entirely

closed. You can modify this detail view boundary
(Properties dialog box).
● The default scale is 2 (twice the scale of the active view). You can modify this scale. For this, right-
click the detail view and select the Properties option from the contextual menu, View tab. Enter
the desired Parameters Scale and then click OK in this Properties dialog box.
● You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype
and select the desired option from the dialog box.
For information on generated geometry and dress-up properties, refer to Definition of Generated
geometry and dress-up properties section.
Creating a Clipping View / Clipping View Profile

This task will show you how to create a clipping view using a circle as callout. You can also use a roughly
sketched profile.
A clipping view is a partial view that shows only what is necessary in the clear description of the object.
This operation is applied directly onto the active view.
Open the GenDrafting_clipping_view.CATDrawing document.
Make sure that Put in no show dimension on non-visible geometry is selected in Tools -> Options -
> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View to specify that the dimensions which are attached to non-
visible geometry in clipping views should be put in no show mode automatically.
1. Click Clipping View in the Views toolbar (Clippings sub-toolbar).
To create a clipping view using a sketched profile, click Clipping View Profile .
2. Select the center of the circle.
If you are creating a clipping view using a sketched profile, select the required points for sketching
a polygon.
3. To end the clipping profile creation, release the mouse.
If you are creating a clipping view using a sketched profile, double-click.
The clipping view and the associated profile result as shown here:
Note the existence of dimensions that are associated to a geometrical element which is not visible
in the clipping view: these dimensions are placed in the no-show space. (When applicable, this is
also the case of annotations that are associated to such a dimension, and of annotations that are
no longer linked to the clipping view.) For more information, refer to View > Clipping View in the
Customizing chapter.
4. Click Swap visible space in the View toolbar.
You can now visualize the dimensions (and annotations, when applicable) that no longer appear on
the clipping view.
Dimensions are displayed in clipping views using the colors defined in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis display mode area. For
more information, refer to Analysis display mode.
5. If needed, you can show these dimensions again on the clipping view. To do so, click Hide/Show
in the View toolbar.

You can also select Unclip from the contextual menu. However, selecting this option will not
show the dimensions on the unclipped view.
6. Select the dimension you want to show on the clipping view.
7. Click Swap visible space again. The selected dimension now appears on the clipping view
again.
● Once a clipping has been applied on a view, it is impossible to create detail views, breakout views and
broken views from this view.
● Once a clipping has been applied on a section, detail or auxiliary view, modifying the section, detail or
auxiliary view profile may lead to an update error if this modification places all of the generated
geometry outside the clipping profile.
● The color used for dimensions depends on whether the dimension is interactive (that is, created
manually) or generated automatically:
❍ interactive dimensions are displayed using the color defined for dimensions on non-visible
geometry (light blue by default).
❍ generated dimensions are displayed using the color defined for dimensions generated from 3D
constraints (light green by default).

This task will show you how to create an isometric view from a 3D part.
The Isometric View command enables you to create a 2D view with any orientation, this orientation
being the same as the one in the 3D viewer. Among other results, and depending on how the 3D viewer
is oriented when you create the view, you can obtain a regular X-Y-Z isometric view.
Isometric means "equal measure". To produce an isometric projection, it is necessary to place the object
so that its principal edges make equal angles with the plane of projection and are therefore
foreshortened equally. Note that an isometric view created from a product can be re-used for generating
an exploded view.
Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATPart document. Start creating a new drawing (and this case, create
an empty sheet). Tile your windows vertically to visualize the 3D part and the sheet at the same time.
In a Product Structure context, if you create a front view from a scene of

a product, you can directly select the Scene object in the specification
tree. You do not necessarily need to select the Product and sub-products.
Scenes of products created with versions prior to V5R14 will be displayed as shown above.
For any scene of products created in V5R14, the specification tree is updated as follows:
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Isometric View icon from the Views toolbar
(Projections sub-toolbar).
2. Define the 3D viewer orientation according to the result you want to obtain in the view. For this,
you can either manipulate the viewer directly, or use the View > Named Views command in 3D
to define your orientation precisely.
Prior to defining your orientation, it may be useful to use different canonical points of view by defining
the corresponding local axis systems in 3D. For more information, refer to Axis System in the Part
Design User's Guide.
3. Click the 3D part.
A green frame with the preview of the isometric view to be created, as well as blue
manipulators, appear. You can re-define the reference plane orientation of the view to be
created using these manipulators: to the bottom, the left, the right, the top, or rotated using
a given snapping or according to an edited rotation angle. For more information, refer to
Before you begin.
4. Click on the sheet to generate the view.
You can use selection sets to generate isometric views displaying a selection of elements only. Selection
sets let you select the sub-bodies and/or sub-products from which the view will be generated. Refer to
Creating a front view using selection sets for more information.
Creating an Exploded View

This task will show you how to create an isometric view, and then, projected views from an assembly previously exploded via
Digital Mock-up workbench (DMU Navigator).
Open Gun_Body.CATProduct.
1. Go to the Digital Mock-up workbench (DMU Navigator) and define the Scene with the adequate orientation and with
the instances properly positioned.
Scenes of products created with versions prior to V5R14 will be displayed as shown above.
For any scene of products created in V5R14, the specification tree is updated as follows:
2. Explode the view as shown here:

3. Go to the Drafting workbench and click the Isometric View icon from the Views toolbar (Projections sub-toolbar).
4. Select the scene (Scene 1) either in the specification tree or in the geometry area, and then select a plane on the
product.
5. Click in the drawing to position the resulting exploded view.

Non exploded product: Exploded product:
You can insert Bill of Material information into the active view.
Remember that you must select the scene before creating a view, otherwise you will create a view of the whole assembly.
Creating a Broken View

This task will show you how create a broken view from an active and up-to-date generated view. You
will define two profiles corresponding to the part to be broken from the view extremities.
A broken view is a view that allows shortening an elongated object.
Open the GenDrafting_part_Broken_View.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Broken View icon from the Views toolbar.
2. Click a first point corresponding to the first extremity of the

first profile.
A green dotted profile appears which allows you to position the
profile either vertically or horizontally.
3. Click a second point corresponding to the profile second

extremity. In this example, click a point so that the profile
appears horizontally.
OR
3. Drag the cursor over the green horizontal profile that

appears as you create a first point and, if needed, click to
locate the second point on this first profile.
4. If needed, translate the profile.

Red zones appear. These red zones correspond to the zones
out of which the view cannot be broken.
Note that the orientation of the second profile is the same as
the orientation of the first profile.
5. Click a point for defining the position of the second green

profile that appears.
6. Click on the sheet.

The broken view appears.
● You can create new breaks in a broken view, but in the same direction and providing the two breaks
do not overlap.
● You can remove created breaks via the contextual menu: right-click the callout and select Callout
(Broken View).1 object-> Unbreak in the contextual menu.
● It is impossible to create breakout views, offset section views, detail views and clipping views from a
broken view.
More on Broken Views

Propagating a broken specification
To propagate the broken specification during the creation of a projection or auxiliary view, go to Tools -
> Options -> Mechanical-> Drafting from the menu bar (Layout tab) and activate the Propagation
of broken and breakout specifications option.
Propagating a specification means generating a view (B) from another view (A) on which you previously
performed an operation, and obtaining a view (B) which includes this operation.
For example, (i) you create a broken view (view A) and activate the Propagation of broken and
breakout specifications option, you then (ii) generate a projection view (view B). As a result, the
projected view (view B) will appear with the broken area.
You can only perform a propagation from a broken view if the projection direction is perpendicular to
the direction of the broken view.
About line types
You can assign a line type to the view to be generated. For this, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and
select the desired option from the dialog box.
Creating a Breakout View

This task will show you how to create a breakout view. In other words, you will remove locally material from a generated view
in order to visualize the remaining visible internal part.
A breakout view is one not in direct projection from the view containing the cutting profile. In other words, it is not positioned
in agreement with the standard arrangement of views. A breakout view is often a partial section.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document. For the purpose of this scenario, you will create the breakout on the left
view: therefore, make sure the left view is active by double-clicking it.
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the Breakout View icon from the Views toolbar (Break View sub-toolbar).
2. Click the first point of the breakout profile.
3. Click as many points as desired for creating the profile.
4. If needed, double-click to end the profile creation and close this profile automatically.
OR
4. Click on the profile first point to close and end the profile creation.
The 3D Viewer window appears, displaying the 3D part corresponding to the generated view. A green arrow indicates
in which direction the breakout will be created.
This window lets you position the 3D part according to a view you go over (on the drawing), provided the Animate
option is checked.
This window also lets you visualize a view plane and use it to define the depth of the breakout. You can move this
plane using one of these methods:
● directly in the 3D Viewer window, drag the plane to the desired location. This method does not let you define the
depth of the breakout precisely. The breakout will not be associative with any element.
● in the drawing, place the cursor over an axis, a center line or an edge (circular or linear) of a perpendicular view.
The plane will be moved accordingly. This method lets you break the view through a hole or a face, for example.
The breakout will be associative with the selected element.
● in the drawing, select the edge which corresponds to the face that you will use as a reference element to define
the depth of the breakout, and enter the depth in the appropriate 3D Viewer field. This method lets you define
the depth of the breakout precisely. The breakout will be associative with the selected reference element and with
the depth value.
5. Check the Animate option to visualize the 3D part in accordance with the position of the cursor on a generated view.
6. In the CATDrawing document, place the cursor over the front view (which is perpendicular to the left view).
7. In the CATDrawing document, place the cursor over the center line that will be used as an extremity plane, as shown
below.
OR
7. In the 3D Viewer window, click the Reference element field to select it. Then, in the CATDrawing document, select the
edge which corresponds to the face that will be used as a reference element, and enter the breakout depth in the
Depth (in mm) field (you can also define the depth by moving the red plane with the mouse).
8. Then, click OK in the 3D Viewer window. The breakout view is created.

More on Breakout Views

● Once created, the breakout view profile cannot be modified.
● You cannot apply a breakout and a break to the same view.
You can create breakout views on:

● projection views,
● auxiliary views,
● section views
● a view that already contains breakouts.
You cannot create breakout views on:

● section cuts,
● detail/ clipping views,
● broken views.
Removing a breakout
To remove a breakout, choose either of the following methods:
● Once the breakout view is created, right-click the view, and select the Remove Breakout option.
All the breakouts will be removed.
● Or right-click on the edge of a resulting breakout and select Generated item object, then Remove breakout. Only this
breakout will be removed.
Propagating a breakout specification manually
Right-click the view, select the Apply Breakout To option and click another view you want to apply the breakout to.
Propagating a breakout specification automatically
Propagating a specification means generating a view (B) from another view (A) on which you previously performed an
operation and including this operation in the generated view (B).
To generate views (projection, auxiliary, section, section cut and detail) from a breakout view, go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting from the menu bar, click on the Layout tab, and activate the Propagation of broken and
breakout specification option.
For example, (i) you create a breakout view (view A) and activate the Propagation of broken and breakout specification
option, you then (ii) generate a projection view (view B). As a result, the projected view (view B) will display this breakout
area.
You can add a clipping or a breakout view but you cannot create a broken view.
About line types
You can choose the line type you want to assign to the breakout view. To do this, go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> View tab, click the Configure button next to View Linetype and select the desired option from the
dialog box.
If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note that this linetype is just a graphical dress-up of the
view. This means that if one line is relimited on the breakout line, then it will be relimited on the
theoretical line as shown here, and not on the visualized zigzag line.
About patterns
The patterns which are used to represent the breakout are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern
Definition in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
You may modify the pattern (hatching, dotting, coloring or motif) by right-clicking the pattern and selecting Properties from
the contextual menu. This will display the Properties dialog box in which you may either select a new pattern or modify some
graphical attributes of the existing pattern. For more information, refer to Modifying a Pattern.
About patterns in breakouts from isometric views
In versions prior to V5 R13, when creating breakouts on isometric views, in the case of overlapping faces, the pattern area
used to go over the projected faces and edges. From R13 onwards, the pattern area is now limited to the face sectioned on the
part, as shown below.
Previous behavior New behavior
In an assembly, you can define that given parts will or will not be sectioned when generated into section views or breakout
views.
In the Assembly Design workbench, select one part, then the Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar from and either
activate or de-activate the Cut in section views option. You can also do this when overloading element properties in a view
generated from a CATProduct.
About breakout views generated using the Approximate generation mode
You can now generate breakout views using the Approximate generation mode. For more information on the approximate
generation mode, refer to Customizing Settings: View.
When generating breakout views using the Approximate generation mode, or when switching a breakout view from exact mode
to approximate mode (i.e. via Edit > Properties), be aware of the following information:
Breakout direction
The breakout propagation direction must be perpendicular to the view plane. In other words, the breakout profile must be
parallel to view plane.
Patterns
In the case of parts which use a material to which a specific pattern is associated, breakout views in Approximate mode do not
inherit the material properties from the 3D, and therefore do not use the pattern associated to this material.
Pattern properties are not persistent: for instance, after switching an exact view to the approximate mode, and vice versa, the
pattern may change.
If you choose to not cut elements in section views or breakout views (i.e. if you uncheck the Cut in section views option):
note that this capability does not work for breakout views generated using the Approximate generation mode: selected
elements will be cut nonetheless. Likewise, if you switch an exact view to the approximate mode, the elements for which you
unselected the Cut in section views option will be cut in the view nonetheless.

This task will show you how to create views using a wizard. These views are views that are generated
automatically once the CATDrawing document is opened. These views can then be modified as if they had
been manually created one after the other.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document.
Start creating a new drawing (and this case, create an empty sheet).
Before you begin, make sure you select the projection mode you need. If you want to change the method
you use as you pre-define your configurations, what you need to do is:
1. Right-click Sheet.1 in the specification tree.

2. Select the Properties option from the displayed contextual menu.
The Properties dialog box appears with Projection Method options.
3. Check the First angle standard option.
● First angle standard: Orthographic representation comprising the arrangement, around the
principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views of that object. With reference to the
principal view, the other views are arranged as follows:
- the view from above is placed underneath
- the view from below is placed above
- the view from the left is placed on the right
- the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as convenient.
(Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)
● Third angle standard: Orthographic representation comprising the arrangement, around the
- the view from above is placed above
- the view from below is placed underneath
- the view from the left is placed on the left
(Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)
1. Click the Drawing window, and click the View Creation

Wizard icon from the Views toolbar (Wizard sub-toolbar).
2. Select the desired view configuration from the View Wizard (1/2) : Predefined Configurations
dialog box.
In this case, ISO standard / First angle projection method is used and the following configurations are
available:
● front, bottom and left
● front, bottom and right
● front, top and left
● front, top and right
● projection and isometric

● projection, rear and isometric
If you use the ANSI standard (Third angle projection method), in the dialog box the configuration symbol
displayed , as well as the configuration options will be different. To have the projection views linked
to the main view click the option.
You can can define the Minimum distance between each view. For this, enter the desired value in the
modifiable field available in the View Wizard dialog box.
A preview is available:
● The main view corresponds to the view which any other view will be linked to. This main view can be
either a front or an isometric view. It is framed in the green color. This is the view that will become
the active view when you will generate the desired views.
Any other view (front and/or isometric view) that can possibly become the main view is framed in the
black color.
To make a view become the main view, right-click this view and select the Set as main view option
● At any time, you can delete one view you inserted.

For this, right-click the desired view and select the Delete option from the contextual menu.
● Once you generate the views, if you move the main view, all the child views will move accordingly.
You can right-click one view and select the View Positioning->Position Independently of
Reference View option from the contextual menu, if you need to move one child view independently
from the reference view.
3. Click the Next > button from the View Wizard (1/2) : Predefined Configurations dialog box.
The View Wizard (2/2) : Arranging the Configuration dialog box is now displayed with a new set of
view buttons:
● front view
● rear view
● top view
● bottom view
● left view
● right view
● isometric view
● clear preview
4. Click the Isometric View button .

5. Position the isometric view onto the Preview window by dragging and clicking it as desired.
6. Click the FINISH button from the View Wizard (2/2) : Arranging the Configuration dialog box.
7. Select the CATPart document.

8. Click on the desired 3D part plane to be used as reference plane.
If the plane can be computed, the Oriented Preview of the 3D part appears as you move the cursor
over the 3D part (planes).
The views now appear on the CATDrawing document: they are previewed in green frames and can be re-
oriented thanks to the blue arrows that appear.
9. Go over the view frames with your cursor to have these views visualized.
10. Use the blue arrows to have the views re-oriented as desired and then go over the views with the
cursor, if you need to check the preview of the other views.
For more details, refer to Before You Begin.

You can also modify the increment value using the green knob contextual menu. For this, right-click on
the knob and select the desired option from the contextual menu. For more details, refer to Before You
Begin.
11. Once you are satisfied, click on the sheet to create the views.
The front view is actually the main view and the isometric view is added to the predefined configuration.
The ISO and ANSI standards are independent from the angle projection method.

This task will show you how you can solve the problems encountered during view generation and view update thanks to a
view update report.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER_GS.CATProduct and the GEAR-REDUCER_RasterView.CATDrawing documents.
1. Click on the Update icon to update the view.

The View Update Report dialog box of the impacted views is displayed.
2. Close the dialog box.
3. Right-click on the Front View where a red cross is displayed and select Front View Object->Update Report.
The View Update Report dialog box of the impacted views is displayed.
The View Update Report dialog box displays:

● all the errors encountered when the view is generated,
● the names of the impacted views and sheets
● a solution to solve the problem following the update of the view.
The View Update Report is displayed, among other things, when a boolean operation fails.
View Modification
The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to modify previously created views.
Before you begin: Learn how to edit the properties of multi-selected views.
Move a view: Drag a view to a new location.
Position a view: Position Generative or Interactive views either by aligning them, superposing them and setting
relative view position.
Position a view independently of its reference view: Position a view independently of its reference view.
Locate reference/resulting views: Navigate easily between reference/resulting views in the case of section
views, section cuts, auxiliary views or detail views.
Isolate generated views: Remove associativity between an existing CATPart (or CATProduct or CATModel) and
the corresponding generated views.
Restore deleted generated elements: Restore generated elements that have been deleted from a view.
Lock a view: Use the contextual menu (Properties option) to lock a view.
Scale a view: Modify the scale of a view.
Rename a view: Give a new name to an existing view.
Modify a view projection plane: Modify the projection plane of any generated view.
Add a generative bill of material: Insert Bill of Material information into the active view.
Generating balloons on a view: Generate balloons on the active view.
Show geometry in views: Visualize geometrical elements in all viewpoints as well as in a 3D viewer
corresponding to the views analyzed.
Modify a callout graphism: Modify the graphical attributes of one or more callout used when generating
auxiliary, section or detail views.
Modify a callout geometry: Modify the geometrical properties of a callout used when creating detail views,
section views and section cuts.
Overloading element properties: Overload the properties of generated elements in a view.
Modify a pattern: Modify the pattern of a view and apply a material to this pattern.
Duplicating generative geometry: Duplicate a generative view sub-element in order to modify a generated view
sub-part independently from the part linked to the drawing.
Modify a view's links: Modify the list elements pointed by a view.
Apply a view's links to another view: Apply the links of a view to another one.
Before you begin
Editing Multi-Selected Views (Properties)

You can modify the properties of a group of views of different kinds (interactive, generative or detail
views), either on a single sheet or on different sheets. These modifications will be applied to the
properties values common to the selected views.
In other words, when you will edit the properties values of different views, only the properties values of
the views with the same parameters will be modifiable.
Still, mixed properties values will be modifiable. Mixed properties values meaning values which are not
common to the selected views.
You can select the views from different sheets.
Open the GenDrafting_part_Move_View02.CATDrawing document.

1. Multi-select views from the specification tree. In this particular case, select all the views.
Remember that you can use the Shift or the Ctrl key.
2. Select Edit -> Properties command from the menu bar.
The Properties dialog box appears: de-activate the options as shown here: View Frame option
unlocked.
The views result as shown here:

3. Multi-select views from the specification tree. In this particular case, select the top, bottom, left and
right views. Activate the Properties options as shown here: activate the options as shown here: Hidden
Lines option unlocked.
The views result as shown here:

● If the view name is not common, no View name and no Name Editor With Formula appear by
default.
● If the view scale is not common, no Scale appears by default.
● In the case of a mixed values, the modifiable fields appear white and empty.
● If one view is locked and mixed properties values will also be locked.
If you modify one view (view A) and then select another view (view B), click the Apply switch button if
you do not want to loose the modifications first applied on the view A.
Moving a View
This task will show you how to move one or more views by dragging them.
Moving One View

You can move one view by selecting or more views (implicitly) by dragging the parent view.
Open the GenDrafting_part_Move_View.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the frame of the view to be moved.
2. Drag the clicked view to the new location.

3. Release the mouse button when you want to position

the view.
The view is re-positioned.
Moving More Than One View Explicitly

You can move more than one view explicitly (generative and interactive views). These views can be:
● child views that are linked to a single parent view (and constrained to this parent view)
● child views that are linked to different parent views (be careful: constrained views remain so by
default ; not constrained views move in accordance with the position of the cursor)
Open the GenDrafting_part_Move_View02.CATDrawing document.

1. Multi-select the views to be moved.
2. Drag the selected views to the new location.
3. Release the mouse button when you want to position the views.
There are different cases:
● You multi-select views that are independent (not linked to a parent view):
When you move the views with the cursor, all these views are translated into the same direction.
● You multi-select views that are linked to different parent views which are not selected:
When you move the views with the cursor, all these views are translated into a direction that
depends on the constraints between the parent and the child views. In other words, two child views
may be moved into two new locations which are not synchronized (for example, one according to x,
the other according to y).
● You multi-select views that are linked to different parent views which are also selected:
When you move the views with the cursor, all these views are translated into a direction that
depends on the constraints between the parent and the child views. As a result, all the child views
(with an active link), be they selected or not,are translated into the same direction as the parent
views.
Positioning a View
The purpose of this task is to position Generative or Interactive views: you will learn how to align
views, superpose views and set relative view position.
Aligning Views Using Elements

You will learn how to align a view with another one using geometrical elements (lines, circles or points).
Open the GenDrafting_part_Align_Views.CATDrawing document. Go to Tools -> Option ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General tab and in the View axis area, unselect Display in the
current view.
1. Right-click the view that you want to re-position, the unfolded view for example. A contextual menu
is displayed.
2. Select View Positioning -> Align Views Using Elements.
3. On this view, select the first geometrical element that you want to align.
4. On the other view, select the second geometrical element that you want to align.
The first view is moved, and both views are aligned according to the elements you selected.
5. Click in the drawing, outside the views, to validate the alignment.
When aligning views, remember that:

● if you select a circle as one of the elements to align, this circle will be aligned according to its
center.
● if you select lines as the two elements to align, these lines must be parallel.
If you want to align two views which are not directly linked to each other (i.e. which are not a parent
view and its child view), you will first need to position a view independently of its reference view. For
example, if view A (a front view) is the reference for view B (a projection view), and if view B is the
reference for view C (a section view), then to align view A and view C, you first need to position view C
independently of view B. Refer to Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View for more
information.
Superposing Views
You will learn how to superpose a view with another one according to their origins.
Open the GenDrafting_Superpose_Views.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the view that you want to superpose, the front view with dress-up, for example. A
contextual menu is displayed.
2. Select View Positioning -> Superpose.
3. Click the view on which you want to superpose the first view. The first view is moved and
superposed to the second one.
4. Click in the drawing, outside the views, to validate the superposition.

If you want to superpose two views which are not directly linked to each other (i.e. which are not a
parent view and its child view), you will first need to position a view independently of its reference
view. For example, if view A (a front view) is the reference for view B (a projection view), and if view B
is the reference for view C (a section view), then to superpose view A and view C, you first need to
position either view B independently of view A, or view C independently of view B. Refer to Positioning a
View Independently of its Reference View for more information.
Setting Relative View Position

You will learn how to re-position a view relatively to various elements (a line/callout, a point or the
frame of a view).
Open the GenDrafting_part_positioningview.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the view frame that you want to re-position, the isometric view for example. A contextual
menu is displayed.
2. Select View Positioning -> Set Relative Position.
A direction positioning line appears that is related to the isometric view. This isometric view can be
positioned as desired and relatively to the front view.
Note that the isometric view is assigned anchor points.
3. Select the direction positioning line end black square point.
Once you have clicked the end square point, this point becomes a blinking red end point and remains so
until you select a point or a view frame.
You can also click the direction positioning line. In this case, the positioning line becomes a blinking line
and remains so until you select a line (callout line).
Press the Ctrl key to move the positioning line according to a direction that is parallel to the positioning
line.
4. Click the edge according to which you want the isometric view to be aligned.
5. Click one anchor point, for example, the bottom right one. The view anchor point is aligned
according to the green point and thereby to the direction positioning line.
6. As you move the cursor over the direction positioning line, the position and length coordinates of the
line appear.
Note that you may also select the front view frame and align the isometric view to the front view
according to the barycenter.
7. Using the green point, you can rotate the isometric view around the front view.
8. Using the direction positioning line, translate the isometric view along the direction line and locate it
at the desired distance.
If you happen to modify the length of the direction positioning line, this new length will be kept
whatever positioning modifications you may apply to the isometric view.
Note that if you had previously positioned this isometric view according to a point, not only the line
length but also the line angle will be kept.
9. Click in the free space to validate and leave the relative positioning mode.
As you use relative positioning, do not try to move the view outside of the anchor point frame. If you
do so, you will leave the relative positioning mode.
You can also align a view relatively to one of the edges that are within this view. To do this, first select
the direction positioning line, and then select an edge on the view to be aligned. As a result, the
manipulators automatically align according to this selected edge.
Positioning a View Independently of its

Reference View
At creation, views are by default positioned according to the parent (reference) view. This task will
show you how to position a right projection view independently of its parent front view.
This functionality was called Do not align view up until V5 R10.
1. Right-click the frame of the view that you want to position

independently of its reference view. A contextual menu is displayed.
2. Select View Positioning -> Position Independently of Reference

View.
3. Drag the view to the required location.

● The Position Independently of Reference View command can be performed on one particular
view at a time (you cannot multi-select views in this case).
● If you want to reposition independently-positioned views according to their reference view, repeat
the scenario described above, this time selecting the Position According to Reference View
command from the displayed contextual menu.
Locating Reference/Resulting Views

This task shows how to navigate easily between reference/resulting views in the case of section
views, section cuts, auxiliary views or detail views:
● You can locate the reference (i.e. parent) view of a resulting view.
● You can locate the resulting (i.e. child) view of a reference view.
Open the GenDrafting_view_navigation.CATDrawing document.
Locating a Reference View

1. Right-click the detail view.
2. In the contextual menu, select Locate Reference View. The application window is
reframed on the view where the detail view callout is defined.

Locating a Resulting View

1. Right-click the detail view callout.
2. In the contextual menu, select Locate Resulting View. The application window is
reframed on the detail view.

Isolating Generated Views

This task will show you how isolate either a selection of generated views (one or more), or all views in
the drawing.
Isolating a view amounts to:
● suppressing associativity between an existing CATPart (or CATProduct or CATModel) and the
corresponding generated view,
● transforming a generated view into an interactive view.
Isolating a selection of views

1. Select the views you want to isolate (for example, the Top view, Bottom view, Left view and Right
view), and right-click them.
2. From the contextual menu, select Selected objects -> Isolate.
In this particular case, we selected several views but if you select only one view, the left view for
example, then you need to select Left view object -> Isolate from the contextual menu.
The selected views are now isolated. If you perform one or more modifications on the CATPart, you will
not be able to update the isolated views.
Isolating all views in the drawing

1. From the specification tree, right-click the drawing object (GenDrafting_part in this case).
2. From the contextual menu, select Drawing object -> Isolate.

All views in the drawing are now isolated. If you perform one or more modifications on the CATPart, you
will not be able to update the drawing.
● A view that has been isolated cannot be de-isolated.

● Center lines in isolated views are no longer associated to geometry, but just to a point.
● Axis lines in isolated views are no longer associated to geometry, but just to 2 points.
● Dimensions in isolated views are no longer associated to geometry.
Restoring Deleted Generated Elements

In this task, you will learn how to restore generated elements that have been deleted from a view.
Open the GenDrafting_Restore_Deleted.CATDrawing document.
The view in this drawing was generated from a 3D part, GenDrafting_Restore_Deleted.CATPart. You do not
need to open the part.
1. In the Drawing window, select the circle shown on the view and
press the Del key. The circle is now deleted from the view.
For the purpose of this exercise, you will now immediately restore
the circle you deleted, but you could perform other operations
before doing this (like save and close the drawing, or add
annotations, for example).
2. Select the view and right-click the view frame.
3. In the contextual menu, choose Object Front View -> Restore Deleted.
Remember that this is applicable only in exact views. If the view you are working in is not an exact one,
the elements you deleted will be displayed again when updating the view.
4. You now have two possibilities:

● If you did not modify the part between the moment you deleted
the circle and now (which is the case in this exercise): in the
Power Input Field on the status bar, type the following
command: c:force update.
This updates the drawing in accordance with the 3D part, and
restores the deleted item on the view.
● If you modified the part between the moment you deleted the
circle and now: click the Update icon . This updates the
drawing with the latest changes on the part, and restores the
deleted item on the view.
Locking a View
This task will show you how to lock views. This may be useful if you need to modify a part without
modifying the generated views. For example, when you need to modify a constraint in the 3D but not
the generated views.
Locking a view means you are not allowed to:

● create views from a locked view
● create either annotations or dimensions on this locked view
● update, delete or cut the locked view.
The move command is still available when views are locked.
Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the view to be modified (either the

view frame or the view itself).
2. Select the Properties option from the contextual

menu.
The Properties dialog box appears:
3. Select the View tab and select the Lock View

check box.
The other fields appear in gray indicating that you

can no longer edit them.
Use the OK, or Apply+Close buttons in the

Properties dialog box to close the dialog box and
lock the view.
4. The view is locked. This is indicated in the

specification tree:
Scaling a View
This task will show you how to modify the scale of a view.
Open the GenDrafting_detailview_scale.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the frame of the view to be modified. In this case, right-click the detail view.
3. Enter the new Scale value in the Properties dialog box. For example, 3.
4. Click OK.
The detail view is updated. Note that only the generative elements (axes included) are scaled, neither
the view name nor the dimension.
Renaming a View
This task will show you how to rename an existing view.
Open the GenDrafting_part_Rename_View.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the frame of the view to be modified.
3. Enter the new View Name in the Properties dialog box. For example, B as identifier (Ident).
4. Click OK.
● You can also access the Properties dialog box selecting the Edit->Properties commands.
● Note that the callout in the mother view also is now assigned a new identifier (B-B).
Modifying a View Projection Plane

This task will show you how to modify the projection plane of generated views.
1. Create a front view of the part.
2. Create a right, left, bottom and top projection view.
3. Then create an auxiliary view of the top view.
4. Create a detail view on the front view.
5. In the specification tree, right click and select Front view object-> Modify Projection plane.
The front view and all the projection views are highlighted, showing that the modification will
impact all the views.

6. Select an edge of the part as your new reference plane.
The front view with the new reference plane is previewed in the drawing.
7. Click on the drawing sheet to create the front view according to the reference plane you selected.
The front view is updated and, in the specification tree, each projection view appears as needing
an update.
❍ The update is made in two steps: first the front view, then the views linked to the front
view, that is, the projection views and the detail view.
❍ You will note that the detail view callout has become red because there is an
inconsistency between the referring view and the detail view.
8. Right-click on each projection view and select Update selection in the contextual menu to update
the view according to the new reference plane.
Or right click on Drawing1 and select Update selection in the contextual menu.
The right, left, bottom, top and auxiliary views are updated, as well as the detail view. The detail
view callout turns black again since there is no inconsistency left.

The Modify Projection Plane option cannot be applied to the following views:
● top, bottom, right, left, auxiliary, detail,
● locked,
● isolated,
● interactive
You cannot propagate the modification of a projection plane on a section or auxiliary view created from
the Auxiliary view icon.
You have to recreate them in order to take into account the new reference plane.
You can modify the projection plane of views that do not have a referring view such as:
● isometric views,
● views from 3D.
1. Create an isometric view of the part.
2. Modify the part position.
3. In the Specification tree, right click and select Isometric view object-> Modify Projection
plane.
4. Click on the part.
The isometric view with the new reference plane is previewed in the drawing.
The isometric view is modified in the drawing.
5. Open the 3DViews.CATPart document. Tile the screen horizontally by selecting Window -> Tile
6. Create a new drawing in ISO standard.
7. Create a view from 3D on the FrontView.1
You can notice that one of the extracted annotations (datum B) bears a red cross mark, which
indicates that the leader cannot be extracted linked to the geometry. This is because the 3D
annotation leader is linked to 3D geometry which is not visible in the 2D view (i.e. hidden
geometry).
8. In the drawing specification tree, select Front View.1 object->Modify Projection plane.
A message asking you if you want to synchronize the view projection plane is displayed.
9. Click on OK.
The behavior of dress-up elements and callouts remain the same even when modifying a projection plane.
For more information on dress-up elements, refer to the Dress-Up Elements section and the Modifying a
Callout Geometry section.

This task will show you how to insert and modify Bill of Material information into the active view.
Choose a task:
● generating a bill of material.
● modifying a bill of material.
The Bill of Material, or parts list, corresponds to information on the product from which the views were generated. It
consists of an itemized list of the parts of a structure shown on a drawing or on an assembly. It can also include a
recapitulation of the total number of parts used in a product.

● The Bill of Material can be inserted in the active view if this view has a link with a product.
● If the active view has no link with a product, a message will appear, letting you know whether you can insert the Bill of
Material.
● Whether the active view has a link with a product or not, you can go into an open product and click on this product
before clicking on the CATDrawing in which you want to insert the Bill of Material. Note that you can perform this as
often as you need.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document and the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.
1. Select Insert -> Generation -> Bill of Material.
The method described here applies if you are in the working view. From the background (Edit ->
Background), click Insert Bill of Material from the Drawing toolbar and select the source product
from the specification tree in the 3D window.
2. Click in the drawing to indicate where you want to position the Bill of Material.
For example, click at the bottom right-hand corner of the isometric view.
❍ If no product is opened, or if several products are opened, you first need to select the source product.
❍ Before positioning the Bill of Material, you can pre-define the anchor point position: this will determine the
position of the Bill of Material in relation to the anchor point. For this, use the Text Properties toolbar
and select either one of the top or one of the bottom anchor points.
❍ When positioning the Bill of Material, you can select a line, in a title block for example. In this case, the Bill
of Material will be inserted according to the position and orientation of this element, and without including
a recapitulation table.
The Bill of Material is generated.
The Bill of Material will not be rerouted if you replace its source product (the product from which it was
generated). In this case, you need to generate a new Bill of Material.
Modifying a Bill of Material

You will learn how to:
● modify the contents
● modify the contents visualization
● update a Bill of Material after part modification.
Modifying the contents

To modify the contents of the Bill of Material and display given properties, go to the Product Structure workbench, and
select Analyze->Bill of Material ->Listing Report from the menu bar.
Modifying the contents visualization

To modify the way you visualize the contents, modify the file called CATAsmBOM.CATRsc.
It allows you to modify the columns size:

● Note that the number of characters authorized in a line can be set precisely for fonts with a fixed-size case only. In the
case of fonts with a variable-size case, it is not possible to know exactly how many characters will fit on a line (because
the size of the text depends on the characters entered). In this case, the specified number corresponds to the minimum
number of characters that you can enter on a line.
● Bill Of Material cells are associated to the Product Structure Attributes.
Updating a Bill of Material after Part Modification

Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document. Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document. Add a bill of material.
You obtain the following Bill of Material:
1. Replace the Part Number "pm6-7b-1e shunt to body washer" by "New Name" (for this edit Part Properties in the Part
contextual menu, and change the Part Number in Product tab).
2. Update the drawing. The Bill of Material has changed, "pm6-7b-1e shunt to body washer" is replaced by "New Name".
3. Add a new product and a new part in this product (see Part Design user's guide and Assembly Design User's Guide):
4. Update the drawing, the Bill of Material is updated:

The New product and its part appear in the Bill Of Material.
5. Remove the Product you have added in step 3 and update the drawing one more time:
As Bill of Material-related information is retrieved from the 3D, if you update a Bill of Material after having modified it
directly in the drawing (e.g. if you changed the column size, edited text, etc.), all manually-applied changes are lost.
Generating Balloons on a View

This task will show you how to generate in the active view balloons corresponding to references defined
on the different parts of an assembly.
Note that the assembly components have previously been numbered in the Product Structure
workbench using the Generate Numbering command. For more information, refer to Generating
Numbering in the Product Structure User's Guide.
Open the Product_Balloon_Gen.CATProduct and Product_Balloon_Gen.CATDrawing documents.
1. Double-click the view in which you want to generate the balloons. In this particular case, double-click
Bottom view. This view is now active.
2. Select the Generate Balloons icon on the Dimension Generation toolbar.
The balloons that were previously created on the CATProduct are automatically generated onto the
active view.
3. If needed, multi-select these balloons and modify the font size from the Text Properties toolbar. You
can also select and drag a balloon to change its position.
4. If needed, create a circle around the text of the balloons: right-click a balloon (or multi-select several
and right-click) and select Properties->Text->Frame->Circle. Press OK. A circle is created around
the texts.
Balloons generated
Balloons after the font size and position were modified:

4. If needed, insert a bill of material into the active view (Insert -> Generation -> Bill of Material
from the menu bar).
The part numbers appear in the bill of material on the condition you specified it previously (Product
Structure workbench: Analyze -> Bill of Material -> Listing Report from the menu bar).
Showing Geometry in Views

This task will show you how to visualize geometrical elements in all viewpoints as well as in a 3D viewer
corresponding to the views analyzed.
Note that you can analyze both text/dimension and edge type elements on all the views of a
CATDrawing document. These views can be views generated from an assembly, a part or a .model.
These views can also be interactive views.
1. Go to Tools -> Analyze -> Show Geometry in All Viewpoints menu bar command.
Provided there is at
least one link between
the CATDrawing
document and a
CATPart (or assembly,
part or .model), a
window appears with
the 3D model
corresponding to the
CATDrawing views.
2. Move the cursor

over the geometrical
elements on one view.
All the views are

analyzed. The blue
color corresponds to
the immediate edge.
The red color
corresponds to the
adjacent faces.
If the Animate option

is on, the part
automatically appears
with the optimal
position (visually
speaking).
Modifying a Callout Geometry

This task will show you how to modify the geometrical characteristics of a callout used when
creating detail views, section views and section cuts.
For modifying the detail and section callout, you will go through some kind of a sub-workbench
and modify the existing callout geometry, reverse the callout direction or replace the callout.
Callouts represent an operation that has been performed on a generative view (such as a section
cut for example) and consequently do not behave as geometry. As a result, you cannot isolate
callouts, nor can you apply transformation or symmetry operations to callouts.
Open the GenDrafting_part_Callout.CATDrawing document.
1. Double-click the
callout to be
modified.
The Edit/Replace
toolbar appears.
2. Drag one of the

element components
to the desired
location. In this
particular case, drag
one segment
extremity of the
callout.
By default the
segment extremities
are not fixed.
To constrain one
segment, right-click
this segment and
select the
Line.object -> Fix
option from the
contextual menu. To
free one segment,
right-click this
segment and select
the Line.object ->
Unfix option from
the contextual
menu.
3. Click the End Profile
Edition icon
from the
Edit/Replace toolbar.
The callout arrow is

now properly
positioned and the
section view (B-B) is
automatically
updated.

1. Double-click the
callout to be
reversed.
2.
Click the Invert

Profile Direction icon
from the
Edit/Replace toolbar
that now appears.
The callout is
automatically
inverted.
● At any time, you

can stop editing
the callout. For
this, click the
End Profile
Edition icon from
the Edit/replace
toolbar.
● You cannot
reverse the
callout of a
detail.
● If after modifying a view containing a callout, the projection planes of the defining and the
resulting views are inconsistent, the callout becomes red to show that there is an
inconsistency in the drawing.
To have further information about red callouts, refer to the More about red callouts section below.
3. Click the Replace

Profile icon from the
Edit/Replace toolbar
now appears.
4. Start creating the

new profile.
5. Double-click to end
the new profile
creation.
The new profile

automatically
appears and the old
one disappears.
More about red callouts

Modification of callouts
If you modify an auxiliary or a section callout in a way that the plane of the resulting view is not
parallel anymore compared to the previous plane view or if you invert the profile:
● all the callouts of the resulting view are displayed in red,

● you cannot edit them,
● the change is not propagated to detail view.
Translation of section callouts
If you translate a section callout, the plane of the resulting section view is modified. It remains
parallel to its previous orientation, yet there is a an inconsistency between the section view and
the detail view defined on the previous plane view.
As a consequence:
● the detail callout becomes red,

● other callouts remain unchanged,
● all callouts can be edited.
If you create a detail view on the section view and translate the section callout without any visible
impact on the resulting section view, the detail callout becomes red anyway and is editable.
Resizing of callouts
If you resize a section callout constrained by the supporting lines of the profile:
● any detail callout does not turn into red,

● it can be edited

This task will show you how to overload the properties of elements in a view generated from a CATProduct.
A number of the properties that you can overload are originally defined as properties of the 3D product component, in
the Product Structure workbench. For more information on specifying the properties that should be used for a 3D
component when generating views, refer to Modifying Component Properties in the Product Structure User's Guide.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER_GS.CATProduct document and the GEAR-REDUCER.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click the section view A-A.
2. In the contextual menu, select Section view A-A object -> Overload properties.
The Characteristics dialog box is displayed.
Select the element (part instance) that you want to edit. This element is highlighted in the drawing and
listed in the dialog box.
● You can also select several elements, if you want to overload their properties in the same way.
● In the case of several elements generated from a single part instance, all these elements are highlighted when you
select one.
● You can select the elements in the 3D document, either by selecting a node in the specification tree or by multi-
selecting the elements in the specification tree.
3. Select the element you want to edit (as there is just one in our example, it is already pre-selected) in the dialog
box and click the Edit button.
The Editor dialog box is displayed.
You can modify the following parameters:
● Cut in section views: specifies that the 3D element will be cut in the section view, section cut or
breakout view. Uncheck this option if you do not want an element to be cut in the view.
● Use when projecting: specifies that the 3D element will be projected in the view.
Uncheck this option if you do not want an element to be represented in the view (other 3D elements
possibly hidden by this element in the view will then be visible in the view).
● Represented with hidden lines: specifies that 3D hidden lines will be represented.
● Shown: specifies that the dress-up (color, line type, etc.) associated to the 2D generated element will
be shown. The view is not re-computed.
● Graphic Properties area: lets you modify graphic properties such as element color, line type and line
thickness.
The Cut in section views, Use when projecting and Represented with hidden lines properties are originally
defined as properties of the 3D product component. So it is actually the properties of the 3D component that you are
overloading. In this case, the view is re-computed.
If Graphic Properties only are modified, the view is not re-computed.
4. Uncheck Cut in section views.
6. Back in the Characteristics dialog box, click Apply. A dialog box is displayed while the view is being re-
computed.
The selected element is not cut anymore.
7. In the product's specification tree, select the Slow speed node.
Back to the Drawing, the elements have been added to the Characteristics dialog box.
8. Select the last three elements in the list and click on the Edit button.
9. In the Editor dialog box select the red color in the Graphic properties drop down list.
11. Back in the Characteristics dialog box, click Apply. A dialog box is displayed while the view is being re-
computed.
12. In the product's specification tree, press the Ctrl key and multi-select Motor adaptator and Roller bearing
(Roller bearing.2)
Back to the Drawing, the elements have been added to the Characteristics dialog box.
13. Select the last two elements in the list and click on the Edit button
14. In the Editor dialog box uncheck Shown.
16. Back in the Characteristics dialog box, click OK again. A dialog box is displayed while the view is being re-
computed.
● In the Characteristics dialog box, the Reset button allows you to recover the values you had before changing
information in the Editor dialog box.
● In versions prior to V5 R13, in the case of faces overlapping with un-cut elements, the pattern area used to go over
the projected faces and edges. From R13 onwards, the pattern area is now limited to the face sectioned on the
part, as shown below.
Previous behavior New behavior
You can also set the Drafting properties in the 3D document so that they are propagated in the 2D view.
17. In the 3D document, right-click on the Bearing (Part1.1) instance.
18. Select Properties in the contextual menu and click on the Drafting tab.
The Drafting properties are displayed.
19. Check Represented with hidden lines.
20. In the CATDrawing, click on the Update icon .

The element is represented with hidden lines in the view.
There is two ways to activate the Drafting properties:

● go to Tools->Options and check Apply 3D specifications in the View tab
or
● right-click the view and select Properties, then check 3D spec in the View tab.
Modifying a Pattern
This task will show you how to modify the pattern of a view. Patterns are used for area fills or, as is the
case in this scenario, when cutting through material in section views/cuts or breakout views, for
example.
Open the GenDrafting_exploded_isometric.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the pattern be modified in the Section view.
2. Select Edit-> Properties.
You can also right-click the pattern and select Properties.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Pattern tab.
4. To define your own pattern, choose a pattern type from the Type drop-down list:
❍ Hatching
❍ Dotting
❍ Coloring
❍ Image
For the purpose of this scenario, select Dotting from the Type drop-down list.
If you want to choose from the various patterns available, you can also click the [...] button.
This will display the pattern chooser, from which you can make your selection.
5. In the Pitch field, type 5 mm.

6. From the Color drop-down list, select black, for example.
7. Uncheck the Zigzag field, and then click OK. The pattern is modified.
● Each part is assigned a specific pattern. Therefore, each time you modify a pattern using the
Properties dialog box, all the patterns of the views generated from this part will be modified. These
modifications will be applied to all existing sheets.
● Pattern properties are not persistent: for instance, the pattern may change after switching an exact
view to the approximate mode (and vice versa), or after uncutting then cutting a part in all views.
● Patterns are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition.
Duplicating Generative Geometry

This task will show you how to duplicate a generative view sub-element in order to modify a generated
view sub-part independently from the part linked to the drawing.
1. Double-click the view you want to modify to activate it.

The view is automatically highlighted.
2. Select the elements you want to modify and right-click them.
3. Choose Duplicate Geometry in the contextual menu.

The selected geometry is duplicated on the view at the same position. It is highlighted after creation.
Click on the drawing to de-select it.
The resulting geometry is under the generative one. To workaround this problem, you can hide the
corresponding generative geometry.
Modifying a View's Links

This task will show you how to modify the list of pointed elements for a view and resolve broken links.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER_GS.CATProduct document.
1. Create a new drawing sheet and tile windows horizontally using the Window -> Tile
Horizontally menu item.
2. Create a front view of the part.
3. Right-click the view and select Front view object > Modify Links in the contextual menu. The
Link Modification dialog box is displayed. You can see the whole assembly is selected.
4. In the 3D product, press the Ctrl key and select the following parts:
● Roller bearing 1
● Slow speed shaft
● High speed shaft
● Motor adaptator
In the case of consecutive elements, you can also use the Shift key
using the following procedure:
a. Select the first element.

b. Press the Shift key and select the last element. The first
element is de-selected.
c. Press the Ctrl key and select the first element once again.
5. Back in the drawing, the parts have been added in the Link Modification dialog box.
6. Click the Add all button.
7. Select the Preview check box to see what the 3D product looks like according to your selection.
8. Click OK.
You can see that an update icon is displayed in the specification tree of the drawing.
9. Click the Update icon.

The selected parts are displayed in the front view.
10. Right click and select Front view object > Modify Links.
Link Modification dialog box is displayed with links related to the parts.
11. Select Motor adaptator and click the Remove button.
12. Select the Preview check box to visualize your 3D product.

13. Press the Ctrl key, then click on High speed shaft and Roller bearing 1.
14. Click Remove.
The preview is updated.

15. Click OK, then the Update icon.
The front view is updated.
If you remove all the pointed elements, you are back to the step when you first created the
front view of your product or your part. You can start selecting links again.
16. In the 3D product, press the Ctrl key and select the following parts:
● High speed shaft
17. Back in the drawing, the parts have been added in the Link Modification dialog box.
18. Click OK, then the Update icon.
19. In the 3D product, delete Roller bearing 1.
Broken links are displayed in the drawing specification tree.
20. Right-click the view and select Front view object > Modify Links.
A warning message is displayed, advising you to remove broken links.

21. Click OK.
The Link Modification dialog box is displayed with the broken link highlighted so that you can
remove it.
22. Click the Remove button.
23. Click OK, then the Update icon: the drawing is updated accordingly.
● As long as you do not remove broken links, you cannot modify the view at all.
● If all links are broken and removed, you are back in the Link Modification dialog box, the whole
assembly being selected.
● All views must have the same 3D associated document.

● You can select products or sub-products if it is an assembly view, and bodies if it is a part view.
● If you want to modify links in your view when the related 3D document is not opened, you can only
remove links.
● You cannot perform Undo and Redo operations.

● If you modify the links of an exploded view, all the views generated from the assembly will be
modified. For more information on exploded mode, refer to the Creating an Exploded View section.
● If you modify the links on a scene, you can select the scene only.
Would you need to select products in your assembly, you need to remove the scene's link in the Link
Modification dialog box, then select products or parts' links only.
Remember you cannot mix scene links and products or parts' links.
Applying a View's Links to Another View

This task will show you how to apply a view's links to another view.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER_GS.CATProduct document. Make sure no drawing is already open.
1. From the menu bar, select Start -> Mechanical Design.
2. Select the Drafting workbench.
The New Drawing Creation is displayed with information on sheets that can possibly be created:
: empty sheet
: sheet containing all views,
: sheet containing the front, bottom and right views,
: sheet containing the front, top and left views,
as well as information on the drawing standards.
3. Select the All Views icon as shown below and click on OK.
4. Right click on the front view.
5. Select Front View object > Modify Links.
The Link Modification dialog box is displayed.

6. In the 3D product, press Ctrl key, then select Worm gear and Motor adaptator parts.
Back in the drawing, the parts are both displayed in the Link Modification dialog box.
7. Click on Add all and then on OK to close the Link Modification dialog box.
An update icon is displayed in the specification tree under the front view node.
8. Click on Update.
The front view is updated accordingly.

9. Right-click on the front View and select Front View object > Apply Links To.
10. Select the Bottom view.
An update icon is displayed in the specification tree under the bottom view node.
11. Click on Update: the view is updated accordingly.

● Only one view can be selected.

● If you try to apply the same links to the view = warning.
● The view must have the same 3D associated document.

The Generative Drafting workbench lets you use generative view styles, which are administrator-defined and
specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view.
For more information on the administration of generative view styles, refer to the Administration Tasks chapter.
Create views using generative view styles: Create views using generative view styles.
Switch a view to another generative view style: Switch a view which uses a given generative view style to
another style.
Apply the generative style of a view to another view: Apply the generative view style used to create a given
view to another view.
Apply a generative view style to a view: Apply a generative view style to a view which was created without one.
Creating a View using Generative View Styles

This task will show you how to create a view using generative view styles. Generative view styles are
defined by an administrator and specify the appearance and behavior of a generated view.
For the purpose of this scenario, you will create a front view using generative view styles, but you can
use generative view styles to create any type of view.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document. Define a new drawing sheet.
1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, and
uncheck the Prevent generative view style creation option. This activates the generative
view style functionalities.
2. Click the Front View icon from the Views toolbar. The Generative View Style toolbar is
automatically displayed.
3. Select one of the generative view styles available from the list. For example, select
DefaultGenerativeStyle. The parameters defined in this file will be used when creating the
view.
● The generative view styles available in the list refer to the external files that can be found
in specific directories as explained in Administering Generative View Styles and Standards
as well as the generative view style files embedded in the drawing, but in case those files
have the same name, only the embedded file is taken into account.
● The Generative View Style toolbar is displayed when creating most view types. However,
when creating advanced front views, this toolbar is not displayed. Instead, the View
Parameters dialog box (which is displayed when creating advanced front views) features
an additional list, which enables you to select a generative view style.
4. In the 3D window, select a plane of the 3D part or a plane surface, to define the reference
plane.

The view is created using the selected generative view style.
In our example, vidid edges are projected in black. Note that you may obtain a
different result. This result depends on the parameters defined in the
generative view style you selected.
Using the standards editor, you can check the parameters defined in the generative view style you
selected. To do this, go to Tools -> Standards. In the standards editor, choose the
generativeparameters category, and then open the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file from the drop-
down list. Then, for example, go to DefaultGenerativeStyle -> Drafting -> ViewDressup ->
GeneratedGeometry -> VividEdges, and select the Color parameter. You will see the what color is
specified in your generative view style for the projection of hidden edges.
Switching a View to Another Generative View

Style
In this task, you will learn how to switch a view which uses a given generative view style to another
style.
Generative view styles are defined by an administrator and specify the appearance and behavior of a
generated view.
Open the GenDrafting_GVS02.CATDrawing document. The front view was created using a specific
generative view style which specifies that hidden edges should be displayed in orange, using a specific
linetype and thickness.

2. Right-click the front view to display the contextual menu.
3. Select Front view object -> Generative View Style -> Set View Style. The Choose a style
dialog box appears, displaying the list of generative views styles available.
The generative view styles available in the list depend on what your administrator specified.
4. Select a style, CustomGenerativeStyle for example, and click OK.
5. Update the view by clicking the Update icon , for example.

The view is updated and the parameters defined in the

selected style are applied to the view.
In our example, hidden edges are projected in black, with a

different linetype and thickness than previously. Note that
you may obtain a different result. This result depends on the
parameters defined in the generative view style you selected.
Applying the Generative Style of a View to

Another View
In this task, you will learn how to apply the generative view style used to create a given view to
another view.
generated view.
Open the GenDrafting_GVS02.CATDrawing document. The front view was created using a specific
generative view style (which specifies that hidden edges should be displayed in orange, using a specific
linetype and thickness), while the isometric view was created with another generative view style.

3. Select Front view object -> Generative View Style -> Apply View Style to.
4. Click on the isometric view to indicate that you want to apply to it the generative style of the
front view.

The isometric view is updated and the generative view style of

the front view is applied to it.
Applying a Generative View Style to a View

In this task, you will learn how to apply a generative view style to a view which was created without
one.
generated view.
Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document. This view was created without a generative
view style.
3. Select Front view object -> Generative View Style -> Set View Style. The Choose a style
dialog box appears, displaying the list of generative views styles available.
The generative view styles available in the list depend on what your administrator specified.
4. Select a style and click OK.
The view is updated. However, the selected style is not visible

in the view yet. For the moment, the geometry is displayed in
a specific color, because the original parameters of the view
"overload" the generative view style parameters. (This means
that the parameters of the selected generative view style have
taken on the value of the parameters that were defined in the
view before you applied the style to it.)
You now need to reset the parameters of the generative view

style to their original values in order for the new style to be
visible in the view.
6. Right-click the front view to display the contextual menu once again.
7. Select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed.
8. On the View tab, in the Dress-up area, an asterisk * appears in front of the parameters which
are considered as being overloaded.

The list in the Generative view style area shows the generative view style which is applied to
the view.
9. Click the Reset to style values button, and then click OK to validate and exit the Properties
dialog box.
The view is updated once again and the parameters defined in

the selected generative view style are reset to their original
values and are applied to the view.
In our example, hidden edges are projected in orange, with a

different linetype and thickness than previously. Note that you
may obtain a different result. This result depends on the
parameters defined in the generative view style you selected.
The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method for generating dimensions. Generated dimensions
are associative to the elements created from a part or an assembly.
Before you begin: All you need to know before you start generating dimensions.
Generate dimensions in one shot: Generate dimensions in one shot from the constraints of a 3D part
(distance, length, angle, radius and diameter constraints).
Filter dimensions to be generated: Set filters before dimension generation using the Dimension Generation
Filters dialog box.
Generate dimensions semi-automatically: Generate dimensions step by step from the constraints of a 3D
part (distance, length, angle, radius and diameter constraints).
Analyze generated dimensions: Perform an analysis of generated dimensions via the Generated
Dimensions Analysis dialog box.
Position dimensions: Position dimensions (either generated dimensions or interactive dimensions) in a

better way and on the active view exclusively.
Analyze interfering dimensions: Analyze dimensions that were generated and possibly re-positioned
(Positioning icon) on the active view.
Driving 3D constraints via generated dimensions: Drive a 3D constraint via a 2D dimension that was
generated from it.
Before You Begin

This section provides the relevant information you need when performing dimensions generation:
● How are Generated Dimensions Positioned?
● What About the Dimensions that may be Generated from Constrained 3D Elements?
First of all, make sure you customize the dimension generation settings settings via Tools -> Options -
> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Generation tab.
How are Generated Dimensions Positioned?

Generated dimensions are positioned according to the views that are most representative. In other
words, a dimension will appear on a view so that this dimension needs not be also created on another
view. Generated dimensions will be positioned according to the following criteria:
1. on the view on which the dimension may be generated.

2. on the view on which the dimension is better visualized. For example, a view on which
elements are visualized in non-hidden lines instead of hidden lines.
3. on the view with a bigger scale.
4. on views including more dimensions.
The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the appropriate settings were previously
activated in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Generation tab.
What About the Dimensions that may be Generated

from Constrained 3D Elements?
To make sure the dimensions you need to handle in your session are those expected, here is a list
presenting the constrained 3D elements and the resulting associated dimensions after generation.
But first of all, remember that dimensions are generated according to the 3D constraints which belong to
the object referenced by the view. In other words, in a view referencing a body, dimensions will be
generated only for the constraints which are associated to this body.
Note that for views that are generated from surfaces, only sketched constraints are generated.
Constrained 3D Elements Generated Dimension Types

Sketcher All dimensions: angle, distance, radius, diameter
3D part Angle, distance
Features: The dimensions below:
All published dimensions of elements included in the user-defined
User-defined
feature
Pad Distance
Pocket Distance
Shaft/Groove Angle
Hole: Constraints and associated dimensions:
- Simple
- Tapered
- Counterbored
- Countersunk
- Counterdrilled
- Threaded
Fillet constraint variable Radius/Radii

Shell Distance
Thickness Distance
Stiffener Distance
Assembly constraints All assembly dimensions
About threaded hole dimensions
A fractional dimension is generated for threads/taps defined in a 3D part which use standards
with fraction as a symbolic representation (e.g. G1/8). This dimension is a fake dimension. It will
be displayed using the color configured for fake dimensions in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode category.
Note that although it is a fake dimension, it is always updated properly.
When using ISO standard values, the dimension displayed is a real one (displayed as Mxx) and is
based on a key.
When using personal standards including a thread description field, a fake dimension is displayed.
If the description field does not contain any value, a real dimension is used, based on the key and
the value of the nominal diameter.
For more information about Threaded Holes and standards, refer to the Creating Threaded Holes
section in the Part Design User's Guide.
Generating Dimensions in One Shot

Before you begin, make sure you customized the following settings:
Dimension generation:
Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting, and click on the Generation tab. Check the
Analysis after generation option.
This task will show you how to generate dimensions in one shot from the constraints of a 3D part. Only
the following constraints can be generated: distance, length, angle, radius and diameter.
Constraints may be of three kinds: created manually (i) via the sketcher or (ii) via the 3D part, or else
(iii) automatically created via internal parameters.
Open the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing document. Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart

document.
1. Click the Generate Dimensions icon from the Generation toolbar (Dimension Generation sub-
toolbar).
The dimensions are automatically generated on the front view, which in this particular case, is the only
view in the drawing.
In the case of drawings with several views, by default, dimensions are generated on all the views. To
generate dimensions on specific views, simply select these views prior to generating dimensions. The
selected views will be automatically highlighted, and dimensions will be generated on the selected views
only.
Drawing view with generated dimensions and one selected 3D part with displayed dimension
dimension: corresponding to the dimension selected on
the drawing view:
The Generated Dimensions Analysis dialog box showing the dimensions and constraints generated for
each part (in this case, there is only one) is automatically displayed.
2. Click OK to close the dialog box.
The generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In other words, a
dimension will appear on a view so that this dimension needs not be also created on another view.
Filtering Dimension Generation

This task will show you how to set filters before dimension generation using the Dimension Generation Filters dialog
box.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER.CATProduct and the GEAR-REDUCER.CATDrawing documents.
Tile your windows horizontally to view both your drawing and the related part. To do this, select Window -> Tile
Go to Tools->Options->Mechanical Design->Drafting, and click on the Generation tab. Check the Filters
before generation option. This automatically launches the dimension generation filters before generating
dimensions.
1. By default, dimensions will be generated on all views. If you want to generate dimensions on a specific view,
select this view.
2. Click the Generate Dimensions icon from the Generation toolbar (Dimension Generation sub-toolbar).
The Dimension Generation Filters dialog box is automatically displayed.

The Dimension Generation Filters dialog box displays the parameters and filters that you can use for dimension
generation, lists the elements for which dimensions will be generated, and specifies how many constraints there are
for each listed element.
Let's describe the dialog box more precisely:
Type of constraint
These options let you specify what type of constraints you want to generate dimensions from in your drawing.
● Sketcher constraints: generates dimensions from constraints created in the Sketcher workbench.
● 3D constraints: generates dimensions from 3D constraints (for instance an Offset between two planes).
● Assembly constraints: generates dimensions from assembly constraints. This option is active only in the case of
products or assemblies.
● Measured constraints: generates dimensions from measured constraints.
Options
These options let you generate additional dimension types.
● ...associated with un-represented elements: generates dimensions from constraints associated with
elements that are not represented on the drawing (i.e. which are not visible in the various views your drawing
may contain). In this case, the generated dimensions will appear as not attached to any element in the drawing.
● ...with design tolerances: generates dimensions from constraints with design tolerances, and applies the
constraint tolerance to the corresponding generated dimension.
Other
● Retrieve excluded constraints: retrieves all the constraints which you previously excluded (either using
the Not Generated icon when performing a step by step generation, or by removing a generated dimension
from the drawing), and re-generates the dimension. This icon is active only when there are dimensions to
retrieve.
● Add all parts: adds all parts that belong to the selected product or assembly to the list. This button is active only
in the case of products or assemblies.
● Remove: removes the selected element from the list. Dimensions will not be generated for this element.
By default, only the product is displayed in the list of elements for which dimensions will be generated, and only the
Assembly constraints and Measured options are active: if you left the dialog box as is, dimensions would only be
generated from the product assembly constraints and measured constraints.
3. You will now add additional elements to generate dimensions for. You have two possibilities:
● If you want to generate dimensions for specific elements only: in the drawing, select each element for which you
want to generate dimensions. The elements you select are added to the list.
● If you want to generate dimensions for all elements, click the Add all parts button to add to the list all the parts
belonging to the product.
For the purpose of this exercise, click the Add all parts button. All elements are added to the list. You can notice
that the Sketcher constraints and 3D constraints options are now active and selected.
When the same part is used several times within a given product (as is the case for Bearing (Part1.1) in this
scenario), generations for this part are generated only once, for a single part instance (instead of being generated for
all part instances). By default, dimensions are generated on the part instance which is the first in the product
specification tree. If you want to generate dimensions on a specific part instance, you need to select this instance.
4. Unselect the 3D constraints option to specify that dimensions from 3D constraints should not be generated. You
can notice that the list is updated with the proper number of constraints for each element.
5. Click OK. The dimensions are generated on the drawing.

Depending on whether the Analysis after generation option was selected in Tools->Options, the Generated
Dimension Analysis dialog box may now appear.
5. Click OK to close the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box.

Generating Dimensions Semi-Automatically
Before you begin, make sure you customized the following settings:
Dimension generation:
Analysis after generation option.
This task will show you how to generate dimensions step by step from the constraints of a 3D part.
Only the following constraints can be generated: distance, length, angle, radius and diameter.
Constraints may be of three kinds: created manually (i) via the sketcher or (ii) via the 3D part, or (iii)
automatically created via internal parameters.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing.
In this sample, constraints were manually created.
1. Select the views on which you want to generate dimensions. For example, the front view.
2. Click the Generate Dimensions Step by Step icon from the Generation toolbar (Dimension
Generation sub-toolbar).
The Step-by-step generation dialog box displays and will remain displayed until the end of the
dimension generation.
3. Check the Visualization in 3D button to see the constraints corresponding to the dimensions to be
created on the views.
4. Check the Timeout option.

The default timeout is set to two seconds (2s).
Enter the timeout value you need for example, three seconds (3s).
5. Click the Next Dimension Generation switch button to start the dimension generation.
Dimensions appear one after the other on the views.

Now, you might need to pause the generation for modifying the dimension position for example.
6. Click the Pause in Dimension Generation switch button . The generation is paused.
7. Select the dimension to be modified.
8. Drag the dimension to its new position.

Note that, at this step (pause), you can perform all kinds of modifications, not only on the current
dimension but also to other dimensions, before the dimension generation. You can select not only the
current dimension but also other dimensions.
● You want the dimension last generated before you clicked the Pause in Dimension Generation
switch not to be generated on the view? Perform as follows:
1. Click the Not Generated option in the Step by Step Generation dialog box.
The constraint is automatically excluded and the dimension will not generated.
● You want the currently generated dimension to be transferred (via Transfer icon)? Perform as
follows:
1. Click the Transfer icon from the Step-by-Step Generation dialog box.
2. Select the frame of the view in which the current dimension, or the dimension last created, is to
be pasted.
● You want to modify the graphical attributes of the current dimension? Perform as follows:
You simply need to apply the desired attributes in the required Properties toolbar.
9. Click again the Next Dimension Generation switch button and continue the process.
The dimensions are automatically generated on all the views.
The dimensions appear as shown, for example, on the front view documented in this particular case.
The Generated Dimensions Analysis dialog box showing the dimensions and constraints generated
for each part (in this case, there is only one) is automatically displayed. This dialog box is described in
detail in Dimension Generation Analysis.
Note that you can stop at anytime the generation by clicking or, on the contrary, accelerate the
process by clicking .
Analyzing Generated Dimensions
This task will show you how to analyze generated dimensions via the Generated Dimension Analysis
dialog box.
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart and then the GenDrafting_front_view.CATDrawing documents.
Tile your windows horizontally to view both your drawing and the related part. To do this, select
Window -> Tile Horizontally from the menu bar.

Analysis after generation option. This automatically launches the generated dimensions analysis after
dimension generation.
1. Click the Generate Dimensions icon from the Generation toolbar (Dimension Generation sub-
toolbar).
The dimensions are generated on the view.

You can select a dimension in the drawing to display the corresponding constraint in the 3D, and vice-
versa:
For example, if you pick this dimension in the drawing:
the counterpart constraint is displayed in the CATPart:

The Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box is automatically displayed.

The Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box displays the number of constraints available in the 3D, as
well as the number of dimensions generated on the drawing, for each part or product in the drawing (in
this case, there is only one part). You can use the options in this dialog box to highlight the dimensions
in the drafting sheet as well as the associated 3D constraints you can visualize in your Part or Product
document.
Let's describe the dialog box more precisely:
Constraint Analysis in 3D
These options let you display specific constraints on the 3D part.
● Generated constraints: displays all the constraints which are associated with the dimensions
generated on the drawing.
● Other constraints: displays all the constraints for which dimensions have not been generated on
the drawing.
● Excluded constraints: displays all the constraints which have not been taken into account during
the dimension generation (this can be because you previously excluded them using the Not
Generated icon when performing a step by step generation, or because you removed a
generated dimension from the drawing).
Dimension Analysis in 2D
These options let you highlight specific dimensions on the drawing.
● New Generated Dimensions: highlights the dimensions which were generated during the latest
dimension generation (this is useful if you generate dimensions several times).
● Generated Dimensions: highlights all the generated dimensions.
● Other Dimensions: highlights the dimensions created manually via the Interactive Drafting
workbench.
2. Check the Generated constraints and Generated Dimensions options. The generated dimensions
are highlighted on the drawing, and the constraints associated with the generated dimensions are
displayed on the 3D part.
3. Click OK to close the dialog box.

● The Analysis after generation option automatically displays the Generated Dimension Analysis
dialog box (after dimension generation), each time you generate dimensions either automatically
(Generating Dimensions icon ) or semi-automatically (Generating Dimensions Step by Step icon
).
● By default, the Analysis after generation option in Tools->Options is checked, and the
Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box is automatically displayed at the end of dimension
generation. You can deactivate this default by unselecting the Analysis after generation option.
● You can also launch an analysis explicitly when needed. To do this, go to Tools->Dimension
Generation->Analysis. The Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box will be displayed
immediately.
Positioning Dimensions (View per View)
This task will show you how to position distance and length dimensions (either generated dimensions or
interactive dimensions) in a better way. These dimensions will be positioned on the active view
exclusively.
Open the GenDrafting_part_ positioningdim.CATDrawing document.
In addition, select the View -> Toolbar -> Positioning option from the menu bar in order to have the
necessary toolbar (Positioning toolbar) displayed in the workbench.
1. Click the Dimension Positioning icon from the Positioning toolbar.
OR
1. Select Tools -> Positioning -> Dimension Positioning... from the menu bar.
The dimensions are automatically re-positioned.

If you want to have dimension interferences analyzed, use the Dimension Analysis icon (or select
Tools->Analyze->Dimension Analysis from the menu bar). You will thus be able to visualize and
manage interfering dimensions.
Analyzing Interfering Dimensions
This task will show you how to analyze dimensions that were generated and possibly re-positioned
(Positioning icon) on the active view.
Open the GenDrafting_part_ positioningdim02.CATDrawing document.
In addition, select the View -> Toolbar -> Analyze option from the menu bar.
1. Click the Dimension Analysis icon from

the Analyze toolbar.
OR
1. Select Tools -> Analyze -> Dimensions Analysis from the menu bar.
The Analyze dialog box appears with the

following options:
● List with all the annotations badly

placed/Optimized list with the
annotations badly placed
You can choose to have either a whole or a
filtered list with the interfering elements
● Total number of elements in the current list

As you choose the above list type, the total number of interfering elements is automatically updated
● Number of the pointed element
You are provided a number for the element currently pointed as an interfering element
● Scanner (Start, Before, Update, Next, End)
You can navigate among the list of interfering elements
The interfering dimensions are automatically

displayed in the red orange color.
Small circles allow visualizing the interference

location.
2. Select Optimized list with the

annotations badly placed option.
3. Click the Next switch .
4. Start modifying the dimension positions one

after the other.
Note that you may either re-position one

dimension or either delete or copy this
dimension, if needed.
View with interfering dimension

(Number 3): View once the interfering dimension has been deleted:
The Analyze tool is designed to analyze basic interfering elements, thus it does not take into account
advanced dimension manipulation such as leaders lines that might have been interrupted previously.
Driving 3D Constraints via Generated

Dimensions
In this task, you will learn how to drive 3D constraints via generated dimensions.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting.
On the Dimension tab, select Activate analysis display mode. Then, click the Types and colors
button to define the characteristics that will be assigned to constrained geometry.
The Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you select the colors you want to assign to driving
dimensions. Select the colors shown below, for example.
On the Administration tab, make sure that the Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints
option is not selected.
Open the Pinmounting.CATPart document.

Open the GenDrafting_drive_3dconstraints.CATDrawing document.
1. On the front view, double-click the dimension which defines the top radius (Dimension.5 object). The
Constraint Definition dialog box appears.
2. Type 30 in the radius field to change the

radius definition, and click OK.
The dimension is edited.
3. On the top view, double-click the dimension which defines the rounded corner radius (Dimension.1
object). The Parameter Definition dialog box appears.
4. Type 30 in the value field, and click OK.
The dimension is edited.
5. In the CATPart window, click the Update button to update the part. The part is updated and
reflects your modifications:
6. In the CATDrawing window, click the Update button to update the drawing. The drawing is
updated with the latest modifications in the part:
The Generative Drafting workbench enables you to create and modify dimensions.
Note that dimension commands are actually provided with the Interactive Drafting workbench.
Therefore, this section of the documentation actually points to the Interactive Drafting User's
Guide. As such, the information detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context.
If you want to manipulate dimensions in a Generative Drafting context, you can open the
GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document.
These dimensions will be associative to the elements created from a part or an assembly. When
created, these elements are associated with a view.
Note that for views that are generated from surfaces, only sketched constraints are generated.
Before you begin: You should be familiar with basic concepts.
Create dimensions: Create dimensions by clicking elements.
Create half-dimensions: Create half dimensions on distance, angle, diameter, cylinders, diameter edges
and diameter tangents but not on cumulate dimensions.
Create explicit dimensions: Create dimensions using explicit selection both of the desired icon and of the
required geometrical elements.
Create/modify angle dimensions: Create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of
modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector.
Create chamfer dimensions: Create a chamfer dimension using selection.
Create associative thread dimensions: Create associative thread dimensions.
Create/modify coordinate dimensions: Automatically create coordinate dimensions on elements.
Create a holes dimensions table: Create a table containing holes dimensions (diameter and center
coordinates).
Create points coordinates table: Create a table containing 2D and 3D points coordinates.
Create/modify radius curvature dimensions: Create and modify a radius curvature dimension. This lets
you know the curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.).
Create overall curve dimensions: You can create dimensions on the overall size of any kind of curve,
whether it is canonical or not (e.g.: line, circle, ellipse, spline, etc.). You can also create dimensions on
the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line, for example.
Create curvilinear length dimensions: You can create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e.
measure the overall length of a curve.
Create partial curvilinear length dimensions: You can create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a
curve portion, i.e. measure the partial length of a curve.
Create dimensions along a reference direction: You can create dimensions along a direction of measure.
In other words, you can measure the projection of a segment/distance onto a direction.
Create dimensions between intersection points: You can create dimensions between an intersection point
and an element or between two intersection points.
Create dimensions between an element and a view axis: Create dimensions between an element and a
view axis (one of the two axes or the origin).
Modify the dimension type: Modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. On other words, you
modify the dimension attributes.
Re-route dimensions: Re-route dimensions, i.e. recalculate dimensions taking into account new geometry
elements.
Interrupt one or more extension lines: Interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more
dimensions, either using the contextual menu or the Insert menu bar option.
Modify the dimension line location: Use the mouse to modify dimension line location either before or after
creating dimensions.
Modify the dimension value text position: Use the cursor to modify dimension value text position.
Specify the dimension value position: Automatically or explicitly position the dimension value inside or
outside the area between extremity symbols.
Add text before/after the dimension value: Insert text before or after the dimension value.
Modify the dimension overrun/blanking: Use the Blanking Edition dialog box to modify dimension overrun
or blanking.
Line up dimensions (free space): Line up dimensions relatively to a point in the free space.
Line up dimensions (reference): Line up dimensions according to a given reference.
Create a datum feature: Use the Datum Feature Creation dialog box to create a datum feature.
Modify a datum feature: Modify a datum feature by editing it.

Create a geometrical tolerance: Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box
to create geometrical tolerances.
Modify a geometrical tolerance: Use the Geometric Dimensioning And Tolerancing Parameters dialog box
to modify geometrical tolerances.
Copy a geometrical tolerance: Copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for
creating a new one.
Create driving dimensions: Create dimensions that will drive associated constrained geometry.
Before You Begin

Before you begin creating dimensions, you should be familiar with the concepts described in this section.
First of all, bear in mind that dimension creation in Drafting follows the general rules which apply to
geometry creation in V5: the geometry to dimension must be contained within a "box" whose dimensions
are 2.e+6mm (the coordinates can vary from -1,000,000 mm to +1,000,000 mm). Therefore, it is
impossible to create dimensions for elements exceeding these dimensions.
Creating Dimensions
You can create (and therefore modify) the following types of dimensions:
Dimensions created on one element:

● Length dimensions
● Diameter dimensions
● Radius dimensions
● Radius curvature dimensions
Dimensions created on two elements:

● Distance dimensions
● Angle dimensions
● Diameter/Radius Cylinder dimensions
Note that you can create half-dimensions on distance, angle, diameter cylinder, diameter edge and
diameter tangent dimensions but not on cumulate dimensions.
Modifying the Dimension Attributes

You can modify the following attributes at any time before you click to validate the dimension creation:
Modify while creating:

● Type
● Measure direction. Refer to Using Tools for more information.

● Angle sector
● One symbol
● Diameter/Radius center
Modify while or just after creating:

● Value position
● Extension line overrun/blanking (either one or both)
● Text before/after
● Properties (see further down)
● Swap to diameter/radius
Manipulating Dimensions
By default, when manipulating dimensions, you will use the following functionalities:
● dimension following the cursor: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting ->
Dimension tab, to use automatic positioning
● global move: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, to
move precisely dimension line, dimension value, secondary part of a dimension line.
● blanking manipulators (available when modifying a dimension): go to Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, not to visualize blanking manipulators or to
visualize other manipulators either when creating or when modifying a dimension (Overrun,
Blanking, Insert text before, Insert text after, Move value, Move dimension line, Move
DimLine Secondary Part).
● value snapped between the dimension lines symbols: go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design
-> Drafting -> Dimension tab, if you do not want to have the possibility to snap the dimension
value between both symbols of the dimension line and/or you want to snap the dimension position on
the grid.
● during creation: to switch temporarily the Dimension following the cursor option, hold on the ctrl
key.
● during creation and edition: to switch temporarily the Activate Snapping option, hold on the shift
key. Clicking on the dimension symbols will invert them.
● during angle dimension creation: if the Dimension following the cursor option is activated, you can
swap the angle sector according to the mouse position holding on the ctrl and shift keys. If the
Dimension following the cursor option is not activated, you can swap to the complementary angle
sector holding on the ctrl key and clicking on the dimension line.
Dimension Tools
The Tools palette appears whenever you select a command for which specific options or value fields are
available. This enables you to know immediately when specific tools are available for a command. The
options or fields available in the Tools Palette depend on the command you selected. Only a few examples
are provided here.
For example, if you select the Dimensions command, the Tools Palette may provide the following options:
Projected/Forced/True Length Dimension
Force Dimension on Element

Projected Dimension (according to the cursor position)
Force Horizontal Dimension in View Force Vertical Dimension in

View
Force Dimension along a direction
True Length Dimensions (for

isometric views only)
Remember that as you create the dimension in one mode, you can use the contextual menu and select
another mode.
Dimension Properties
You can apply given properties to all the dimensions you are going to create. For this, use the Dimension
Properties toolbar.
● Line type (regular, two parts, one part leader, or two parts leader)
● Tolerance type
● Tolerance value
● Numerical Display Format
● Precision.
● For the ISOCOMB combined tolerance, use the following type of syntax in the tolerance value field: H6
(+0.5 / -0.3)
● When creating a new drawing, the Unit field (here: NUM.DIMM) drives the unit of the dimensions to be
created.
The value which is used by default in this field for each type of dimension is usually defined by the
dimension styles (Tools -> Standards -> Styles -> [dimension style] -> ValueDisplayFormat -
> MainValue -> Name). However, if no value is defined by the styles, the one which will be used by
default is that defined as your default unit choice in Tools -> Options -> General -> Parameters
and Measure -> Units tab.
● When editing an existing drawing, if you change your default unit choice in Tools -> Options ->
General -> Parameters and Measure -> Units tab, then the numerical display format which best
corresponds to the selected unit is automatically selected in the toolbar instead of the current default
value.
Using Styles
You can use styles (i.e. a set of default values for each kind of element) when creating dimensions in
drawings created with version V5 R11 and later (or pre-R11 drawings whose standard has been updated
or changed in V5 R11 and later). Styles are defined in the standard used by the drawing and managed by
the administrator.
When creating a dimension, the Style toolbar displays the styles available for this type of dimension. (By
default, the Style toolbar is situated at the top left of screen.) If only one style is available, it will be used
by default.
If several styles are available for this type of dimension, you can choose the style that you want to use to
create this dimension by selecting it from the Style toolbar.
Refer to Using Styles for more information.
In drawings created with versions up to V5 R10, you can create dimensions using default values. Refer to
Setting Properties As Default in Pre-R11 Drawings and to Using Properties Set as Default in Pre-R11
Drawings for more information.
Creating Dimensions
In this task, you will learn how to create dimensions. When creating dimensions on elements, you can
preview the dimensions to be created.
This task deals with:
● Creating Dimensions
● More About Dimensions

❍ Properties
❍ Associativity
❍ Driving Dimensions
❍ True Dimensions
❍ Half Dimensions
❍ Extension Line Anchor
Creating Dimensions
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Dimensions icon on the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view. For example, a circle.
3. If needed, click a second element in the view.
The dimension type is automatically defined according to the selected elements ( or in

the Tools Palette).
At this step, the options in the Tools Palette ( ) allow you to position
the dimension using one of the following modes: Projected or Forced modes. These options are
also available in the contextual menu.
This toolbar is situated at the bottom right of screen. If you cannot see it properly, just undock it.
4. Click the Force Dimension on element icon from the Tools Palette.
5. Right-click to access the contextual menu and select 1 symbol.
The dimension becomes a one-symbol dimension.

During the dimension creation step, you can switch between one-symbol or two-symbols
dimension by selecting or deselecting 1 symbol in the contextual menu.
Once the dimension has been created, you must use the Properties menu to specify
whether you want to use one or two symbols. Right-click the dimension and in the
contextual menu, choose Properties. Click the Dimension Line tab and then select
Symbol 2 to display two-symbols dimension, or clear this check box to display one-symbol
dimension.
6. Click in the drawing window to validate the dimension creation.
7. Create two other dimensions on a line as shown.

8. Select the two dimensions with the Ctrl key (you can move them both).
9. Start creating another dimension: click the Dimensions icon and select another circle.
10. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation.
11. Right-click the dimension you just created and in the contextual menu, choose Dimension.3
Object and select Swap to Radius.
The diameter dimension has swapped to radius dimension.

12. Right-click the dimension again, and in the contextual menu, choose Dimension.3 Object, and
uncheck Extend to Center.
The radius extension line is not extended up to the center anymore.
More About Dimensions

● You can use this functionality through the Properties menu: right-click on the dimension and choose
Properties. On the Dimension Line tab, select the type of extension you want from the Extension
list: From standard, Till center or Not till center.
● This functionality works with radius dimension and one-symbol diameter dimension.
● When you create a dimension between a generated element in a broken view and a sketched element,
the dimension value may be false to let the user set a fake dimension value.
● When you create a dimension between an axis and another element, the dimension created by the
software is automatically an half dimension.
To bypass this problem, during creation, uncheck Half Dimensions in the contextual menu (right-
click).
● You can generate errors when refreshing the dimensions in the following cases:
❍ In this drawing the dimension "80.14" is measured from the line B to the line C:
If the corresponding part is modified and the chamfer removed, when the drawing is refreshed the
dimension is colored in fuchsia because the line B was removed with the chamfer:
❍ If the two elements separated by the dimension value are moved then merged, an error is
generated and the dimension turns to fuchsia by default (or according to the color defined for Not-
up-to-date dimensions in the Types and colors of dimensions dialog box available via Tools -
> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode
area, Types and colors... button).
Note that in this case, it is not possible to create a null value. Should you need to, you should
create a driving dimension and set its value to 0.
Properties
If you right-click the dimension before creation, a contextual menu lets you modify the dimension type
and value orientation as well as add funnels. Using this contextual menu once the dimension is created,
you can also access the Properties options.
Associativity
If one parent element of the dimension is deleted or deactivated, as soon as you update the drawing, the
dimension turns to the color defined for Not-up-to-date dimensions in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting, Dimension tab (provided the Analysis Display Mode is active).
Driving Dimensions
You can create dimensions that will, by default, drive the geometry. For this:
● Go to Tools -> Options-> Mechanical Design -> Drafting, Dimension tab, and activate the
Create driving dimension option.
● Create and/or modify the desired dimension on the geometry. If needed, you can use the Tools Palette
and define the Value of the dimension you want to be driving.
For more information, refer to Creating Driving Dimensions.

True Dimensions
True Length dimensions can be created using the True Length Dimensions option from the Tools
Palette or using the contextual menu.
Before using true dimensions, make sure that you have not set the only create non-associative
dimensions option in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting, Dimension tab,
Associativity on 3D. In order to work, this functionality must be applied to an associative dimension.
Half-Dimensions
You can create half-dimensions. For this, right-click the dimension as you create it and select the Half-
dimension option from the contextual menu.
Extension Line Anchor
As you create a dimension between two elements, one of these elements being a circle, you can select the
extension line anchor. To do tor this, you can :
● use the contextual menu (positioned on the dimension) and select one of the available Extension Line
anchor options.
You will thus position the extension line:
● at one extremity of the circle (First Anchor)

● at the center of the circle (Second Anchor)
● at one extremity of the circle (Third Anchor)
● drag the yellow symbol to the one of the anchors (anchors appear when the cursor is over the yellow
symbol):
Note that if you selected the Dimension following the mouse option in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, then, to move the extension line anchor, you must
press the Crtl key before selecting the yellow symbol (to switch temporarily the option).
Creating Half-Dimensions
This task will show you how to create a half-dimension. You can create half-dimensions on distance,
angle, diameter cylinders, radius cylinders made out of two selections, diameter edges and diameter
tangents. You cannot create half-dimensions on cumulated dimensions.
Half-dimensions are useful in the case of revolved features or elements using a plane symmetry, as they
let you create the dimensions only on half the geometry.
1. Click the Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view. For example, an edge.
3. If needed, click a second element in the view. For example, another edge.
4. Right-click the dimension and select Half Dimension.
The half-dimension appears. Only one extension line is displayed. The dimension line is shortened
with specific overrun, gap and length. The value is not centered on the dimension line. The
attributes mentioned in Dimension parameters drive the dimension graphic display.
● Once you select the half-dimension option from the contextual menu, all the following dimensions you
create will be assigned the half-dimension mode. If you want to create dimensions in the standard
mode, go back to the contextual menu and de-activate the Half Dimension option.
● You can create a half-dimension directly by selecting first an axis line and then an other element
(which is not an axis). The half-dimension value will be the double of the measured value between the
elements. If you don't want a half-dimension to be created when selecting such elements, uncheck
Half Dimensions from the contextual menu (right-click) when creating the dimension.
● The dimension value is doubled when they are made out of two selections (distance, angle, 2D
diameter cylinder, radius cylinder) but not for dimensions made out of one selection (angle on cone,
3D diameter cylinder, diameter edge, diameter tangent).
● Associativity in the case of half-dimensions is different from associativity in the case of standard
dimensions. For example, the half distance dimension below is associated to the axis and the element,
whereas a standard dimension is associated to both symmetrical elements.
Standard distance dimension: Half distance dimension:

Diameter and radius dimensions are usually created with one selection in 3D. If the dimension is
created with two selections, for instance an edge coming from a 3D revolution and another element,
the dimension will be not associative. To create the dimension below, you must select only the left or
the right side of the cylinder and then right-click on the dimension and select Half Dimension.
Half diameter dimension:

Creating Explicit Dimensions

This task will show you how to create a dimension you explicitly decide to be:
● a length/distance dimension
● an angle dimension
● a radius dimension
● a diameter dimension
You will select the required elements. Note that when entering the command dedicated to the creation of a given
type of dimension, the default orientation will be the most adequate one.
1. Click the desired icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
❍ Length/distance dimension
❍ Angle dimension
❍ Radius dimension
❍ Diameter dimension
2. Click as many elements as required in the view.
The Tools Palette automatically appears, displaying dimension modes, except in the case of angle
dimensions.
3. If needed, define the dimension mode in the Tools Palette using one of the
following modes: Projected, Forced or True Length modes. These options are also available in the contextual
menu.
Length/Distance Angle
Diameter
Radius
For radius dimensions, you can select the Foreshortened check box via Properties -> Dimension Line.
It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius dimension line. Then you can choose
the text position (on long segment or short segment), the dimension text orientation according to the dimension line
( parallel or convergent), the angle value, the ratio value (short segment/long segment), and the point scale value.
You can also specify whether you want to position manually the extremity point of the foreshortened dimension line
(in this case, you will be able to move the extremity point using a yellow manipulator).
Creating/Modifying Angle Dimensions

This task will show you how to create an angle dimension and perform the following kinds of
modifications: new angle sector or turn an angle sector into a supplementary sector.
Create two lines.
1. Select the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Select both lines to be dimensioned, one after the other.
The angle dimension appears in the sector associated to both selected lines.
3. Drag the angle dimension line to the desired quadrant (or sector).
You can move the dimension to a new sector by using the contextual menu:
❍ Right-click the angle dimension and from the contextual menu, Dimension.x object >
Angle Sector, either select a given angle sector or the Complementary Angle sector.
❍ You can also CTRL-click the dimension line.
4. Click anywhere to create the angle dimension.
You can edit the angle sector of an existing angle dimension, by right-clicking the angle
dimension and selecting the Dimension_name object -> Angle Sector command
5. Create a rectangle.
6. Select the Angle Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
7. Select two lines in the rectangle to create an angle dimension.

8. Click to create the angle dimension, then right click on the dimension and select Half
Dimension in the contextual menu.
9. Click in a free space to create the dimension.

Note that the half angle dimension's orientation depends on the order of selection of the
lines to be dimensioned.
If you had you selected the vertical line first, then the horizontal one, the orientation of
the dimension would had been the following:
If you need to modify the dimension, use the Re-route dimension command .
Creating Chamfer Dimensions

This task will show you how to create a chamfer dimension.
● Creating chamfer dimensions manually
● Creating chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection
● Remarks about chamfer dimensions
Creating chamfer dimensions manually

Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document.
1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab and make sure the
Detect chamfer check box is not selected.
2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed, you can choose:
❍ The format of the dimension:
■ Length x Length (19,1 x 19,1 in our example)
■ Length x Angle (19.1 x - 46deg84'8" in our example)
■ Angle x Length (- 46deg84'8" x 19.1 in our example)
■ Length (19,1)
❍ The representation mode:
■ One symbol
■ Two symbols
You can also access these options using the contextual menu: at any time during the chamfer
dimension creation, you can right-click to display the contextual menu.
4. Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode .
5. Select the element to be dimensioned.
6. Select a reference line or surface.
7. You have two options:
❍ Click on the sheet to end the dimension creation. The chamfer

dimension is computed with an implicit second reference line that
is perpendicular to the first one.
❍ Select a second reference line or surface. In this case, the

chamfer dimension is computed according to both reference lines
you selected.
In a Generative Drafting context (i.e. in the case of a

generative view), you must do this, i.e. you must explicitly
select the second reference line.
In any case, the dimension is associated to all the elements you selected.
Creating chamfer dimensions using chamfer detection

Note that chamfer detection is provided as a help in selecting chamfers. However, depending on the geometrical
configuration, it may not detect all chamfer types. If your chamfer is not detected, you can still create the chamfer
dimension manually as explained below.
Open the IntDrafting_Dim_Chamfer.CATDrawing document.
1. Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimensions tab and make sure the
Detect chamfer option is selected.
2. Click the Chamfer Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
3. In the Tools Palette which is displayed (as well as in the contextual menu), you can choose the format of
the dimension and the representation mode. For more information, refer to step 2 in Creating chamfer
dimensions manually.
Choose the Length x Length format and the One symbol mode .
4. Fly the mouse over the element to be dimensioned. You can notice that, depending on where you position
the cursor, the auto-detection agent indicates a different order for taking elements into account when
creating the chamfer dimension:
❍ 1 indicates the element to be dimensioned.
❍ 2 indicates the line which will be used as the first reference.
❍ 3 indicates the line which will be used as the second reference.
5. Click when you are satisfied with the order offered by the auto-detection agent. For example, click to accept
the 3 - 1 - 2 order. The chamfer dimension is computed according to the first and the second auto-detected
reference lines.
At this stage, if you are not satisfied with the order you just accepted, or if your chamfer is not
detected, you can still click to select the first reference line, and, optionally, the second reference line.
This amounts to creating the chamfer dimension manually.
6. Click to end the chamfer dimension creation.
The dimension is associated to all auto-detected elements.
Remarks about chamfer dimensions

● In a Generative Drafting context, you can create chamfer dimensions for the following types of cylindrical
shapes: cylinder/cone/cylinder, plane/cone/cone, plane/cone/cylinder, plane/plane/plane.
● When creating chamfer dimension on cylindrical shapes in a Generative Drafting context, remember that:
❍ in the case of projection views, the projection plane needs to be parallel to the cylinder axis.
❍ in the case of section views or section cuts, the section plane needs to to be parallel to, and to go through,
the cylinder axis.
❍ the sketched profile on which the cylinder (or the cone) is based must be a circle.
● All settings defined in Tools -> Option -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting (Dimensions and Manipulators
tabs) are taken into account when creating chamfer dimensions.
● When editing chamfer dimension text properties (Edit -> Properties command, Dimension Texts tab), any
information (e.g. associated text, fake dimension, tolerance, text before/after, etc.) added to the main value,
will actually be positioned according to the first value (excluding the "x" symbol, e.g. "19,1").
This information will be positioned in the following order: Text Before/Prefix/first value/Tolerance/Suffix/Text
After/second value (including the "x" symbol, e.g. "x 20,37"). An example is provided below, with a Text After.
● When re-routing chamfer dimensions which have only two reference elements (the element to be dimensioned
and a single reference line or surface), you will need to select three reference elements.
Creating Associative Thread Dimensions

This task will show you how to create associative thread dimensions.
Open the thread.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Thread Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-
toolbar).
2. In the front view, select the thread to be dimensioned. The thread diameter dimension appears.
If necessary, you can modify the orientation of this dimension: right-click it and select
Dimension1.object -> Dimension Representation -> Force Horizontal Dimension in View
(or Force Vertical Dimension in View ).
3. Click the Thread Dimension icon again.

4. In the section view B-B, select just one of the two lines representing the thread to be dimensioned.
Two thread dimensions appear, representing the thread diameter as well as the thread depth.
● The dimensions you just created in the section view are linked to 3D constraints. If the Activate
analysis display mode check box is selected in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting -> Dimension tab, these dimensions are therefore displayed using the color defined for
Dimensions generated from 3D constraints in the Types and colors dialog box (click the Types
and colors... button in the Analysis Display Mode area). Note that this is only true in the case of
dimensions in side views, and not in the case of dimensions in top views.
● In top views, you can modify the orientation of threads dimensions.
● The dimension prefix (M in this example) is issued from the thread description, defined when creating
the hole in the 3D part.
● For information on creating associative thread dimensions in an Interactive Drafting context, refer to
Creating Thread Dimensions in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
● Be aware that de-selecting the Thread option from the Properties dialog box (available via Edit ->
Properties) will make the thread dimension loose its associativity. It will appear as being not up-to-
date using the color defined for Not up-to-date dimensions in the Types and colors dialog box)
Subsequently re-selecting the Thread option from the Properties dialog box will not make the thread
dimension associative again and it will still appear as being not up-to-date. You will need to re-create
the dimension.
Creating/Modifying Coordinate Dimensions

This task will show you how to automatically create 2D or 3D coordinate dimensions on elements.
Coordinate dimensions allow you to define the coordinates of a point relative to the X, Y, and possibly Z,
axes.
Open the PointSketch.CATDrawing document.
1. Click Coordinate Dimension in the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
The Tools palette appears with two options:
❍ 2D Coordinates lets you create 2D (x, y) coordinate dimensions for interactive

geometry.
❍ 3D Coordinates lets you create 3D (x, y, z) coordinate dimensions for generative

geometry.
❍ These options are also available via the contextual menu.

❍ This choice of options is valid for generative geometry only. In the case of a generative
drawing, or in the case of a drawing containing a mix of generative and interactive
elements, both options will be available, but if you select sketched (i.e. interactive)
geometry, the 2D Coordinates option will be applied automatically (even if you selected
the 3D Coordinates option). In the case of a purely interactive drawing, the options will
not be displayed at all, and only the 2D Coordinates option will be applied.
2. Select 3D Coordinates in the Tools Palette, as you will be dimensioning elements

generated from the 3D.
3. Select the element for which you want to create the 3D coordinate dimension. The coordinate
dimension is created immediately.

❍ At this point, you can right-click to display the contextual menu, which allows you add a
breakpoint to the leader, or to choose the leader symbol.
❍ You can also select a set of elements by trapping them with the mouse, to create several
coordinate dimensions in one shot.
4. Click in the free space to end the dimension creation.
5. Select the coordinate dimension to modify its position. The dimension is highlighted and its anchor
point appears in yellow.
6. Drag the dimension to a new position.

● Coordinates are relative to the absolute axis system except for views created by selecting a 3D local
axis system.
● The yellow anchor point is associative and is linked to the element you dimensioned.
● If you create a coordinate dimension on the origin, this dimension is invariably non-associative. In this
case, the leader symbol may be different from the leader symbol used for associative coordinate
dimensions. Refer to Dimension Styles > Coordinate Dimension Styles for more information.
● If you need to hide the coordinate dimension's unit, you can do so by editing the properties of the
coordinate dimension (via Edit -> Properties): select the Text tab and uncheck the Display Units
option.
Then click OK to update the view: the units should not be displayed anymore.
Creating a Hole Dimension Table

This task will show you how to create a hole and center line dimension table (containing diameter and
center coordinates).
Open the alesage.CATDrawing document.
1. Select one or more holes and center lines (only center lines not associated with a hole) in the
drawing.
❍ Do not select arcs of circles, as it is impossible to include them in a hole and center line
dimension table.
❍ Hole and center line dimension tables cannot be associative. Selecting an element in the
drawing does not make the table associative to this element.
2. Click Hole Dimension Table on the Dimensioning toolbar.
The Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box contains the following options:
Axis system:
Indicate the holes coordinates 2D reference axis system. In this example, click on the view origin
(you can also select two lines or click anywhere in the drawing, or enter the origin coordinate).
Two reference axis appear:

You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip horizontally and Flip vertically icons and choose to
represent the axis system by checking the Create representation box.
Title: Type the table title.
Columns:
❍ Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with values
other than A or 1, click the icon and specify the start value.
❍ Select and name the column to display.
Table format:
❍ Select the Transpose table check box to invert columns and rows.
❍ Select the Sort table content check box to sort the table elements.
❍ Select the Split table check box to split the table into several tables. For more information on
splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.
3. Choose 2D reference axis system for the axis system from the associated drop-down list.
4. Type the table name in the Title field.
5. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the Index naming
mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing.
6. Select the X, Y and Diameter check boxes to have four columns corresponding to the hole labels
and to the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for each column.
7. Select the Transpose table check box to invert columns and rows in the table.
8. Select the Sort table content check box and then click the [...] icon to define the sorting
parameters.
The Sort dialog box is displayed.
9. To sort the table by descending X coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo box, and select
Descending. Then, click Close.
At this point, if you want to change the default diameter dimension properties such as a
numerical display format or a precision, you may do so using the Dimension Properties
toolbar. Note that once you validate the creation of the hole dimension table (by clicking OK
in the Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box), you will no longer be able to edit
these dimension properties. Also note that the values that are applied by default are defined
by dimension styles. Refer to Using Styles for more information.
10. Click OK in the Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box to validate your settings and
click in the drawing to define the location of the table. The table is generated.
Creating a Points Coordinates Table

This task will show you how to create a table containing coordinates of points from 2D and 3D.
1. Multi-select the points on one of the views or on all views.
2. Click Coordinate Dimension Table on the Dimensioning toolbar.
Points coordinates tables cannot be associative. Selecting an element in the drawing does
not make the table associative to this element.
The Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box is displayed.

This dialog box contains the following options:
Axis system:
You can choose to use the 2D axis system. It can be either the one of the view or user-defined. In
this case, it can be defined by typing the origin coordinates in the X and Y fields, or interactively
by either:
❍ indicating a point by clicking in the view
❍ selecting a point
❍ selecting two lines.
You can rotate or flip the axis using the Flip horizontally and Flip vertically icons and choose to
represent the axis system by checking the Create representation box.
Or you can choose to use the 3D axis system. In this case, it is the absolute axis of the 3D model,
or, if the model is a single part, a local axis.

Title: Type the table title.
Columns:
❍ Choose a label (A, B, C... or 1, 2, 3...). If you want column numbering to start with values
other than A or 1, click the icon and specify the start value.
❍ Select and name the column to display.
Table format:
❍ Select the Transpose table check box to invert columns and rows.
❍ Select the Sort table content check box to sort the table elements.
❍ Select the Split table check box to split the table into several tables. For more information on
splitting tables, see Creating/Modifying a table.
3. Choose Axis system.1 for the axis system from the associated drop-down list.
4. Type the table name in the Title field.
5. Select Label: A, B, C from the Column drop-down list (you can also choose the Index naming
mode) to give a label to the selected points in the drawing.
6. Select the X, Y and Z check boxes to create four columns corresponding to the points labels and to
the Cartesian coordinates. Then enter a title for each column in the associated field.
7. Select the Transpose table check box to invert columns and rows in the table.
8. Select the Sort table content check box and then click the [...] icon to define the sorting
parameters.
The Sort dialog box is displayed.

9. To sort the table by descending X coordinates, choose X in the Sort by combo box, and select
Descending. Then, click Close.
At this point, if you want to change the default diameter dimension properties such as a
numerical display format or a precision, you may do so using the Dimension Properties
toolbar. Note that once you validate the creation of the points coordinate table (by clicking
OK in the Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box), you will no longer be able to
edit these dimension properties. Also note that the values that are applied by default are
defined by dimension styles. Refer to Using Styles for more information.
10. Click OK in the Axis System and Table Parameters dialog box to validate your settings and
click in the drawing to define the location of the table. The table is generated.
Creating Curvature Radius Dimensions

This task will show you how to create and modify a curvature radius dimension. A curvature radius
dimension lets you know the curvature radius at a given point on a curve (spline, ellipse, etc.).
Create a spline.
1. Select the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Move the cursor over the spline. You can notice that the cursor changes to indicate that you are
going to create a dimension on a spline.
3. On the spline, click the point where you want to create the curvature radius dimension. A preview
of the curvature radius dimension is displayed.

4. Click to validate the dimension creation.
5. Move the dimension over the spline to modify the dimension.

Creating Overall Curve Dimensions

This task will show you how to create overall dimensions on curves. You can create dimensions on the
overall horizontal or vertical size of any kind of curve, whether it is canonical or not (e.g.: ellipse, spline,
etc.). You can also create dimensions on the overall size between 2 curves, or between a curve and a line,
for example.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. On the Dimension tab, uncheck
Dimension following the cursor (CTRL toggles).
Open the Dimension_Spline.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Force horizontal dimension in view icon to specify that you
want to create the dimension based on the horizontal direction.
The direction of overall curve dimensions can only be horizontal or vertical.
3. Select a spline. A preview of the dimension is displayed.

If the preview shows a curvilinear length dimension instead of an overall curve dimension,
right-click to display the contextual menu and select Overall instead of Curvilinear
Length.
4. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you created
indicates the overall horizontal size of the spline.
5. Again, click the Dimension icon .
6. In the Tools Palette, click the Force vertical dimension in view icon to specify that you
want to create the dimension based on the vertical direction.
7. Select the bottom line and the other spline. A preview is displayed. Yellow manipulators and point
indicators appear: these let you select precisely the points that you want the dimension to take
into account.
8. Move the spline dimension manipulator to point 7 on the spline, for example.
The preview is updated.

9. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The dimension you created indicates the
overall vertical distance between the bottom line and point 7 of the spline.
You can edit the dimension representation of an existing dimension, by right-clicking the dimension and
selecting the Dimension_name object -> Dimension Representation command from the contextual
menu.
Creating Curvilinear Length Dimensions

This task will show you how to create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve, i.e. to measure the
overall length of a curve.
Open the CurvilinearDimension.CATDrawing document.
2. Select a curve. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this preview shows an overall
curve dimension.
3. Right-click to display the contextual menu and select Curvilinear Length instead of Overall.
4. Still in the contextual menu, select a representation mode for the dimension line:
❍ Offset displays the dimension line as an offset of the measured curve.
❍ Parallel displays the dimension line as a translation of the measured curve.
❍ Linear displays the dimension line as linear.
Select Parallel, for example.

5. Optionally drag the dimension line and/or the dimension value to position them as wanted.
6. Click elsewhere in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. The semi-arc symbol displayed
over the dimension value symbolizes a curvilinear length dimension. You can now handle the
dimension just like any other dimension.
7. Again, click the Dimension icon .
8. Select another curve. This time, the preview of the dimension shows a curvilinear length dimension
(your previous selection was memorized).
9. Once again, right-click to display the contextual menu and select Offset as the representation
mode for the dimension line.

11. Repeat steps 7 to 9, this time selecting Linear as the representation mode for the dimension line.
12. Still in the contextual menu, select Dimension Representation -> Force Horizontal Dimension
in View to specify the dimension line orientation.

More About Curvilinear Length Dimensions

General remarks
● Curvilinear length dimensions can be created using the Dimensions and Length/Distance
Dimensions commands; they cannot be created using the Stacked Dimensions and Cumulated
Dimensions commands.
● You can create curvilinear length dimensions for all types of curves: splines, circles, arcs of circle,
conics, etc. Note that in the case of circles and arcs of circle, they will be called circular length
dimensions.
● The curvilinear length symbol is defined by the administrator in the standards.
● The linear representation mode for the dimension line is:

❍ forbidden in the case of closed curves.
❍ the only authorized representation mode for True Length dimensions.
Restrictions
● You cannot change the dimension line representation mode or orientation after the dimension has been
created.
● In the case of the parallel and offset representation modes, the dimension value cannot be moved out
of the curve limits, except for circles and arcs of circle. As a result, you cannot specify the dimension
value position (Inside, Outside, Auto).
● In some cases, depending on the curve and on the offset value, the offset representation mode cannot
be computed:
❍ In certain cases, when switching from another representation mode to the offset mode, the
dimension will be previewed as being not-up-to-date (i.e. using the color configured in Tools ->
Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode): try
to move the cursor closer to the dimension.
❍ In other cases, you will not be able to position the dimension further than a certain limit. The
examples below show the limits for positioning a curvilinear length dimension in offset mode for a
spline.
● In the case of curvilinear length dimensions in offset mode, it is recommended to activate the
Constant offset between dimension line and geometry setting in Tools > Options >
Mechanical Design > Drafting > Dimension tab. This will ensure that the dimension remains
associative if the geometry is moved.
● When dimensioning a 3D curve that is not planar, the extension line of the curve will extend to the
projection of the endpoints of the curve in the view plane of the dimension. As a result, the dimension
may seem to point nowhere.
● Curvilinear dimensions cannot be measured along a direction.
● Curvilinear dimensions cannot be driving dimensions.
Creating Partial Curvilinear Length Dimensions

This task will show you how to create dimensions for the curvilinear length of a curve portion, i.e. to
measure the partial length of a curve.
Partial curvilinear length dimensions are defined using points. You can use two different methods:
● Creating partial curvilinear length dimensions using existing points
● Creating partial curvilinear length dimensions using points created on-the-fly
Creating partial curvilinear length dimensions using

existing points
Open the CurvilinearDimension.CATDrawing document. Create two points on a curve, for example. These
points will be used to define the extremities of the curve portion to dimension.
You can also use spline control points (but there is none in the sample provided for this scenario), or
points created in free space. In the case of points in free space, the partial curvilinear length dimension
will be computed according to the normal projection of these points on the curve. So, when creating such
points, you need to make sure that they will be projected on the curve, as shown below for example.

2. Select the curve on which you created the points. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By
default, this preview shows an overall curve dimension.
3. Right-click to display the contextual menu and select Partial Curvilinear Length instead of
Overall.
4. Still in the contextual menu, select a representation mode for the dimension line:
● Offset displays the dimension line as an offset of the measured curve.
● Parallel displays the dimension line as a translation of the measured curve.
● Linear displays the dimension line as linear.
For the purpose of this scenario, select Parallel.
5. On the curve, select the existing point that defines the first extremity of the curve portion to
dimension.
6. Select the point that defines the second extremity of the curve portion to dimension.
over the dimension value symbolizes a curvilinear length dimension (whether partial or not). You
can now handle the dimension just like any other dimension.
9. Move one or both points, on the line or in free space. The dimension is re-computed (if you
moved the point in free space, it is re-computed according to the normal projection of the
points on the curve.)

If you move a point in such a way that it cannot be projected on the curve anymore, the dimension
becomes not-up-to-date.
Creating partial curvilinear length dimensions using

points created on-the-fly
Use the CurvilinearDimension.CATDrawing document from the previous scenario, but delete the points
and the dimension you created previously.
2. Select a curve. A preview of the dimension is displayed.
3. Right-click to display the contextual menu and make sure Partial Curvilinear Length is
selected.
4. Still in the contextual menu, select a representation mode for the dimension line: for the purpose
of this scenario, select Offset.
5. On the curve, select the point that defines the first extremity of the curve portion to dimension.
You can click on the curve, or in the free space.
Note that the indicated point cannot go further than the extremity of the curve itself.
6. Select the point that defines the second extremity of the curve portion to dimension.
Note that two points, as well as two coincidence constraints, have been created on the curve,
at the projection point of where you clicked.
over the dimension value symbolizes a curvilinear length dimension (whether partial or not). You
can now handle the dimension just like any other dimension.
More About Partial Curvilinear Length Dimensions

General remarks
● Partial curvilinear length dimensions can be created using the Dimensions and Length/Distance
Dimensions commands; they cannot be created using the Stacked Dimensions and Cumulated
Dimensions commands.
● You can create partial curvilinear length dimensions for all types of curves: splines, circles, arcs of
circle, conics, etc. Note that in the case of circles and arcs of circle, they will be called partial circular
length dimensions.
● You can create partial length dimensions for lines.
● The curvilinear length symbol is defined by the administrator in the standards. The same symbol is
used for partial curvilinear dimensions and for curvilinear dimensions.
● Partial curvilinear length dimensions cannot be True Length dimensions.
● If you delete a point that defines a dimension, the dimension becomes not-up-to-date, and its color
changes to fuchsia by default (or according to the color defined for Not-up-to-date dimensions in
the Types and colors of dimensions dialog box available via Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis Display Mode area, Types and colors...
button). If you delete both points, the dimension becomes a regular curvilinear dimension.
Restrictions
● You cannot change the dimension line representation mode or orientation after the dimension has
been created.
● In the case of the parallel and offset representation modes, the dimension value cannot be moved out
of the curve limits, except for circles and arcs of circle. As a result, you cannot specify the dimension
value position (Inside, Outside, Auto).
● In some cases, depending on the curve and on the offset value, the offset representation mode
cannot be computed.
● In the case of partial curvilinear length dimensions in offset mode, it is recommended to activate the
Constant offset between dimension line and geometry setting in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab. This will ensure that the dimension remains
associative if the geometry is moved.
● Partial curvilinear dimensions cannot be measured along a direction. However, partial length
dimensions can be measured along a direction.
● Partial curvilinear dimensions cannot be driving dimensions.
● When creating partial circular length dimensions on circles, you cannot select a circular sector.
Creating Dimensions along a Reference Direction

This task will show you how to create dimensions along a reference direction, i.e. measure the projection
of a segment/distance onto a direction. This direction is determined using either a linear element, a fixed
angle in the view or a combination of both.
Dimensions along a reference direction can be created for length, distance, diameter tangent, radius
tangent, and overall curve dimensions, as well as on linear (i.e. not angular) cumulated or stacked
dimensions.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon . Refer to Creating
dimensions between intersection points for more information about this functionality.
3. Click the first element, in this case, an intersection point.

4. Click the second element.
The dimension to be created is previewed. In the Tools Palette, click the Force dimension
along a direction icon:
Several options are then displayed in the Tools Palette:

● Dimension along a direction creates the dimension using a linear element (line,
axis line, center line) as the reference direction, or using an angle to define the reference
direction relatively to a linear element. In the latter case, key in a value in the Angle field.
● Dimension perpendicular to a direction creates the dimension perpendicularly to a

linear element.
● Dimension along a fixed angle in view creates the dimension using a fixed angle
in the view. In this case, key in a value in the Angle field.
Note that such a dimension follows the view rotation. Thus, a dimension line with a 30 deg
angle in a view which is set at 45 deg (relatively to the sheet) will be equivalent to a
dimension line with a 75 deg angle relatively to the sheet.
These options are also available in the contextual menu that you can display during
the dimension creation.
5. Click the Dimension along a direction icon . For the purpose of this scenario, leave the
Angle field set to 0 deg.
6. Select a linear element to use as the reference direction. Once created, the dimension will be
associative to this element.

The dimension is updated so as to measure the distance between the selected points once
projected onto the reference direction.
7. Drag the mouse to position the dimension as wanted.

More About Dimensions Along a Reference Direction

● In the case of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction, if you delete the linear element used
as the reference direction, the dimension will be automatically converted into a dimension along a
fixed angle in view (the angle being that of the reference element in the view before its deletion).
● The behavior of a dimension along or perpendicular to a direction will actually depend on whether the
Only create non-associative dimensions option is activated in Tools > Options > Mechanical
Design > Drafting > Dimension tab, Associativity on 3D button:
❍ If it is activated, then the dimension will actually be a dimension along a fixed angle in the view
(the angle being that of the reference element in the view).
❍ If it is not activated, then the dimension will always match the direction of the element defining
the reference direction.
● Once a dimension along a reference direction has been created, you cannot modify the elements that
define the direction of measure, i.e. either the linear element used as the reference direction or the
fixed angle in view.
● The reference direction will not be taken into account when re-routing dimensions (Re-route
Dimension command).
● Dimensions along a reference direction cannot be driving dimensions. So, if the Create driving
dimension option is activated in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting ->
Dimension tab, you will not be able to drive dimensions when dimensioning along a direction.
● Dimensions created in a shot (i.e. cumulated/stacked dimensions, or dimensions sharing the same
type as the first one) all have the same reference direction.
Creating Dimensions between Intersection Points

This task will show you how to create dimensions between an intersection point and an element or
between two intersection points.
Open the GEAR-REDUCER2.CATDrawing document.
2. In the Tools Palette, click the Intersection Point Detection icon .
3. Position the mouse over the first intersection point. An intersection point is the meeting point of:
● 2 extensions lines (as shown in this example)

● 2 lines
● a line and an extension line
A preview of the intersection point is displayed.

● In the case of drawings with many elements displayed on screen, intersection points may
sometimes be difficult to detect. If this happens (i.e. if the intersection point is not
previewed or if the previewed intersection point is not the one you want), simply position
the mouse over the first and then the second reference element. The proper intersection
point will then be previewed.
● In the case of a generative view created with the Approximate generation mode, detection
of intersection points is not available. In this case, you need to position the mouse over the
first and then the second reference element.
4. Click to create the intersection point. The point is created, as well as construction lines and
coincidence constraints between the point and its reference elements.
The display and behavior of intersection points is defined by the administrator in the
standards. Indeed, the administrator can specify the style that should be applied to the
intersection point and construction line, whether the intersection point can be printed or not,
and whether construction lines should be displayed and/or printable.
5. Now, position the mouse over the second intersection point.

6. Click to create the intersection point. A preview of the dimension is displayed. By default, this
dimension is a distance dimension.

At this point, if you want to create a diameter dimension or a radius dimension rather than a
distance dimension, you can right-click to display a contextual menu in which you will be able
to change the dimension type from the default Distance to Diameter Edge or Radius Edge.
For the purpose of this scenario, leave the default option, Distance, selected.
7. Using the mouse, position the dimension as wanted.
8. Click to validate and end the dimension creation.

Creating Dimensions between an Element and a

View Axis
In this task, you will learn how to create dimensions between an element and a view axis (one of the two
axes or the origin).
Open the IntDrafting_Viewplane_Front.CATDrawing document.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> General and check Display in the
current view to display the view axis.
1. Click the Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Click a first element in the view.
3. Select one of the two view axes or the origin.

4. Click anywhere in the drawing window to confirm the dimension creation.
The dimension is created.

Modifying the Dimension Type

This task will show you how to modify the dimension type as you create a dimension. In other words, you
modify the dimension attributes. In this particular example, we will apply a Radius Center dimension type
to a hole.
1. Click the Dimensions icon and then select a hole, for example. Make sure you do not click in
the drawing or on the dimension, as this would validate the creation.
2. Right-click the dimension.
3. Select the required dimension type from the displayed contextual menu. For example, Radius
Center.
The diameter dimension is automatically turned into a radius dimension.
4. Click in the drawing to validate the dimension creation. If needed, you can modify the dimension
location.
When you display the contextual menu during the dimension creation, you can define the value
orientation with the Screen, View or Dimension line as reference, or still Horizontal, Vertical or
according to a Fixed angle. These options are available in the Value Orientation dialog box.
Re-routing Dimensions
This task will show you how to re-route dimensions, i.e. to recalculate dimensions taking into account new geometry
elements which are compatible with the re-routed dimension type.
Re-routing dimensions can be particularly useful in the case of isolated dimensions resulting from V4 to V5 migration.
Indeed, re-routing isolated dimensions to the geometry enables you make them associative.
Open the Reroute_Dimensions.CATDrawing document. You can notice that the dimension properties are customized.
1. Select the Re-route Dimension icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).
2. Select the angle dimension. You can notice that the cursor indicates the type of dimension you are selecting.
3. Select the first element you want to take into account for the dimension re-routing, and then the second element.
Select the first element. Then, select the second element.

During this operation, the cursor gives a graphic preview of what type of element you are selecting (in this
case, lines).
A preview of the re-routed angle dimension is displayed.

5. You can proceed in the same manner to re-route the other dimension types available on the drawing.
● Always make sure that the element(s) to which you are re-routing dimensions are compatible with the re-routed
dimension type. For example, when re-routing a radius dimension, you need to select a curved element.
● In a Generative Drafting context, you cannot re-route dimensions generated via the Generate Dimensions command.
● Re-routing dimensions preserves dimension properties when you customized them.
● When re-routing chamfer dimensions which have only two reference elements (the element to be dimensioned and a
single reference line or surface), you will need to select three reference elements.
● When re-routing a dimension from one circle to another, note that:
A dimension associated to the will always be re-routed to the and cannot be re-routed to the
circle's... other circle's... other circle's...
edge edge center
center center edge

Interrupting Extension Lines

This task will show you how to interrupt manually one or more extension lines of one or more dimensions.
Open the Interruption_ExtLine01.CATDrawing document.
1. You have several possibilities:
❍ Right-click a dimension and select the Dimension.1 Object -> Create Interruption(s)
option from the contextual menu.
❍ Select a dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition -> Create
Interruption(s) from the menu bar.
❍ Select a dimension and click on the Create Interruption(s) icon in the Dimensioning
toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).
❍ You can also select the interruption command first, and then the dimension.
❍ You can multi-select several dimensions either using the Ctrl key or the mouse.
2. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to create the interruption on one extension line or on
both extension lines.

3. Click to indicate the first point defining the interruption to be created.
4. Click to indicate the second point defining the interruption to be created.
If you have chosen to create the interruption on one extension line, the interruption is
automatically created on the extension line which is closest to where you click.
5. To remove the interruption you created, you have several possibilities:
❍ Right-click the dimension and select Dimension.1 Object -> Remove Interruption(s) from
the contextual menu.
❍ Select the dimension and click Insert -> Dimensioning -> Dimension Edition -> Remove
Interruption(s) from the menu bar.
❍ Select the dimension and click on the Remove Interruption(s) icon in the Dimensioning
toolbar (Dimension Edition sub-toolbar).
6. In the Tools Palette, indicate if you want to remove a single interruption on an extension line, all
interruptions on an extension line, or all interruptions on both extension lines. In this case, leave
the Remove One Interruption icon selected.
7. Click to indicate the extension line from which you want to remove the interruption. The
interruption is removed from the extension line which is closest to where you click.
● When creating or removing interruptions, you can select the dimension either before or after selecting
the appropriate command.
● If you move the dimension, the interruption will remain as you created it.
● If you modify either the overrun and / or the blanking, the interruption also remains the same.
● You can perform interruptions on dimension systems, both on single dimensions of a system and the
whole system.
However, for stacked and cumulated dimension systems, the reference line cannot be interrupted.
● You can apply a maximum of eight interruptions to an extension line.

● Extension lines with funnels cannot be interrupted. Likewise, you cannot add funnels to extension lines
with interruptions.
Modifying the Dimension Value Text Position

This task will show you how to modify the position of the dimension value text using the mouse.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a distance dimension, for example.
1. Click the Select icon , if needed.
2. Select the dimension value text.
3. Drag the value text to the new position.
4. Click to validate the position.
Note that as a useful help, you can press the Shift key to use Snapping temporarily (as long as
you keep the button pressed).

At any time, you can restore the original value text position. To do this, right-click the dimension
you positioned and select Restore Value Position from the contextual menu.
Modifying the Dimension Line Location

This task will show you how to modify dimension line location either as you create or after creating
dimensions.
2. Select the dimension to be modified. For example, a distance dimension.
The distance dimension is highlighted.
3. Select the dimension line.
4. Drag the dimension line to the new position.

● You can also modify the dimension line location using the extension line.
● As a useful help, you can press the Shift key to temporarily activate/deactivate snapping (depending
on whether the Snap by default check box is selected in Tools > Options > Mechanical Design >
Drafting > Annotation and Dress-up tab).
Specifying the Dimension Value Position

In this task, you will learn how to place automatically the value outside the area between extremity
symbols when this area is too small, or how to explicitly position the value inside or outside the area
between extremity symbols.
2. Right-click the dimension to be modified.
3. In the contextual menu, select Properties. The Properties dialog box is displayed.
4. Click on the Value tab.
5. In the Value Orientation area, there are three options in the Position field:
❍ Auto: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols whenever this is
possible; otherwise, positions it outside.
❍ Inside: positions the value inside the area between extremity symbols.
❍ Outside: positions the value outside the area between extremity symbols.
6. Select Auto.
If you change the dimension from now on, and the value does not fit inside the area between
extremity symbols, the value will be automatically positioned outside. Try it by reducing the
dimension as shown in our example.

❍ The Auto position of the dimension value will be disabled if you modify the position of
the dimension value text using the mouse (i.e. if you manually move it). You can restore
the original position of the dimension value by right-clicking the dimension and selecting
Restore Value Position from the contextual menu.
❍ If you switch between Auto, Inside, and Outside, make sure the dimension value is
properly positioned by restoring the original position of the dimension value (use the
Restore Value Position option from the contextual menu).
Adding Text Before/After the Dimension Value

This task will show you how to insert text before or after the dimension value.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the
Modification box for the Insert text before and the Insert text after options.
1. Click the dimension to be modified. The dimension is highlighted and two manipulators appear,
both before and after the dimension value.
2. Click the manipulator before the dimension value, for example.
The Insert Text Before dialog box is displayed.
3. Enter the text that you want to add before the dimension value, L= for instance.
4. Click OK. The text is automatically inserted before the dimension value.
Note that any created Text Before is automatically added to the drop-down list in the dialog
box and can therefore be selected again from this list.
5. Click in the free space.

Modifying the Dimension Overrun/Blanking

This task shows how to modify dimensions extension line overrun and/or blanking either together or separately.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Manipulators tab, and check the Modification box for the Modify
overrun and the Modify blanking options.
1. Drag the overrun manipulator(s) to a new position.
If you want to modify one extension line only, press the Ctrl key and drag the desired manipulator.
2. Drag the blanking manipulator(s) to a new position.
3. If you need to be more precise, double-click the manipulator. The Blanking Edition dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the desired value to modify the blanking.

You can also modify the overrun/blanking of only one extension line of the dimension.
5. Double-click the overrun manipulator(s).
The Overrun Edition dialog box appears.
6. Enter the desired overrun value and un-check the Apply to both sides option from the Overrun Edition dialog box.
The overrun is applied to one side only.

● Note that you can also right-click the dimension and select the Edit -> Properties option from the displayed contextual menu. The
Properties dialog box appears. Select the Extension Line tab and modify the desired value(s) of the Overrun / Blanking
Extremities option(s).
● To set Cumulate dimension extension line length and text position, customize the Cumulate Dimension parameters in the standards.
● Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):
You can increase the overrun size. You cannot decrease it below the minimum value.
Lining up Dimensions (Free Space)

This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions relative to a point in the free space:
In other words, you are going to organize dimensions into a system with an offset. The offset will align the
dimensions according to each other, based on the position of the smallest dimension.
Open the LineUp_Dimensions01.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the dimensions to be lined up.
When selecting the dimensions, make sure that they belong to a single, coherent system (if
you select dimensions which could form two different systems, you could get unexpected
results).
2. Do either of the following:
❍ Right click and select Line-up from the contextual menu,
❍ click the Line-Up icon ,
❍ select Tools->Positioning->Line-up from the menu bar.
3. Click anywhere on the drawing.

The Line Up dialog box appears.
4. Enter the desired value for the offset to reference. For example, 20 mm.
5. Enter the desired value for the offset between dimensions. For example, 20 mm.
Two fields are available for both these options: the first field is dedicated to length, distance
and angle dimensions and the second field (grayed out in our example) is dedicated to radius
and diameter dimensions. Whether a field is active depends on the type of dimension selected.
6. Select Align stacked dimension values to align all the values of a group of stacked dimensions on
the value of the smallest dimension of the group.
Note that, in the case of cumulated dimensions, Align cumulated dimension values would align
all the values of a group of cumulated dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the
group.
7. Optionally, select Automatically add a funnel to display a funnel automatically whenever the
dimension value cannot be displayed correctly without one.
8. Click the Only organize into systems option: neither the smallest dimension of each system nor
dimensions that cannot be organized into systems will be moved.
9. Click OK to validate.
The dimensions are now aligned. The position of the smallest system dimension is not modified. The
stacked dimensions are aligned according to the smallest dimension.
When you click in the free space, the linear offset between the smallest dimension and the
reference is automatically set to 0 value. The space between two dimensions will be the space
defined in the Options dialog box (Tools > Options > Mechanical Design > Drafting>
Dimension tab, Line Up paragraph). See Dimension Creation in the Customizing chapter for
more details.
Lining up Dimensions (Reference)

This task will show you how to line up the following dimensions according to a given reference:
Open the LineUp_Dimensions02.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the dimensions to be lined-up.
When selecting the dimensions, make sure that they belong to a single, coherent system (if
you select dimensions which could form two different systems, you could get unexpected
results).
2. Right-click and select Line-up from the contextual menu, or select Tools -> Positioning -> Line-
up from the menu bar.
3. Select the element that will be used as reference for positioning dimensions, as show here:
The Line Up dialog box appears.
4. Enter the desired value for the offset to reference. For example, 20 mm.
5. Enter the desired value for the offset between dimensions. For example, 30 mm.
Two fields are available for both these options: the first field is dedicated to length, distance
and angle dimensions and the second field (grayed out in our example) is dedicated to
radius and diameter dimensions. Whether a field is active depends on the type of dimension
selected.
6. Optionally, select Align stacked dimension values to align all the values of a group of stacked
dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the group.
7. Optionally, select Align cumulated dimension values to align all the values of a group of
cumulated dimensions on the value of the smallest dimension of the group.
8. Make sure the Only organize into systems option is not selected.
The smallest dimension is positioned with an offset of 20 mm according to the selected element.
The offset between each dimension is equal to 30mm.

Creating a Datum Feature

This task will show you how to create a datum feature.
1. Click the Datum Feature icon from the Dimensioning toolbar.
2. Select the point at which you want the datum feature to be attached (attachment point).
3. Select the point at which you want the datum feature to be anchored (anchor point).
The Datum Feature Creation dialog box is displayed with A as default value (incremental value).
4. Change the value, if needed.

5. Click OK. The datum feature is created, and an extension line is automatically created on the
datum feature.
● The character string that is edited in the Datum Feature Creation dialog box is simultaneously
previewed on the drawing.
● When you create more than one datum feature, the character string of this datum feature is
automatically incremented.
● If the drawing uses an ANSI standard, you can change the Datum Feature ANSI representation to
ASME representation. To do this, change the TXTDatumMode parameter of the standard file. Refer to
Dimension parameters for more information.
ASME
TXTDatumMode = 1
(Normal)
ANSI
TXTDatumMode = 2
(Flag)
Modifying a Datum Feature

This task shows you how to modify a datum feature by editing it.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum feature with a value of A.
1. Double-click the datum feature you want to modify. The Datum Feature Modification dialog
box is displayed.
2. Modify the datum feature value. For example, enter B instead of A.
3. Click OK. The datum feature is modified.
4. Optionally drag the datum feature to move it.
Note that depending on the type of element to which the datum feature is attached, you may not be able
to move the datum feature as wanted. For example, if the datum feature is attached to a dimension line,
you will only be able to move the datum feature along the dimension line direction.

This task shows you how to create a geometrical tolerance (annotation).
You can also copy an existing geometric tolerance. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.
● Creating a geometrical tolerance
● Leader orientation
● Geometrical tolerance orientation

1. Click the Geometric Tolerance icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Tolerancing sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element (geometry, dimension, dimension value, text or point) or click in the free space to position the anchor
point of the geometrical tolerance.
● If you select an element, the anchor point will be an arrow. Note

that you can modify this symbol by editing the annotation leader.
● If you select a point in the free space, the anchor point will be a
small balloon.
● If you select a dimension, the anchor point will be at the

intersection of the dimension line and the extension line.
● If you press the Shift key and select the extension line, the leader
is perpendicular to the extension line and the anchor point
corresponds to the position of the cursor when you click to create
the geometrical tolerance.
● If you select a dimension value or a text, no leader will be

created. The geometric tolerance will be displayed just below and
parallel to the element you selected.
3. Move the cursor to position the geometrical tolerance and then click at the chosen location. The Geometrical Tolerance dialog
box appears.
● At this step, you can apply the parameter values of an existing geometric tolerance to the tolerance you are creating: to do this,
simply select the existing geometric tolerance.
● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design ->
Drafting -> Administration tab, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is pre-filled with custom style values (as defined in the
Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the geometrical
tolerance.
On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is pre-filled with the last entered
values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the creation of the geometrical tolerance.
● You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset button.
4. Select the Filter Symbol option to filter the available tolerance symbols according to the type of geometrical element you
selected (if any).
If you did not select any geometrical element, the tolerance symbols will not filtered.
5. Specify the tolerance type by clicking the Tolerance Symbol button and selecting the appropriate symbol.
6. Type the tolerance value in the Tolerance value field, adding symbols as needed. To do this, position the cursor at the proper
location in the field, and click the Insert Symbol button to choose the appropriate symbol.
You can add symbols to the tolerance and reference value as well as to the upper and lower text.
7. Type the reference values in the Reference value fields, adding symbols as needed.
8. To add a new geometrical tolerance, click the Next line arrow button and repeat steps 4 to 5.
9. Type the upper and lower texts in the appropriate fields. You may also add symbols if you want to.
The geometric tolerance is updated as you define values for each field.
10. Click OK when you're done. The geometrical tolerance is created.
11. You can add an all-around symbol to the leader. To do this, select the geometrical tolerance, right-click the yellow
manipulator on the arrow and select All Around from the contextual menu.
Specifying Leader Orientation

You can orient the geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is associated (for example, if the leader is
associated to a dimension, you can position the leader parallel to the dimension line and orthogonal to the extension line).
For this, you have two different possibilities:
● Either go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate
snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or Both. To orient directly the
geometrical tolerance leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the Shift key before clicking in the drawing to
position the tolerance (see previous scenario, step 3).
● Or go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Geometrical
tolerance in Annotation Creation. The leader will be oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by default. In this case,
pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.
Specifying Geometrical Tolerance Orientation

To make the tolerance vertical, hold the ctrl key before clicking in the drawing to position the tolerance (previous scenario, step 3).
Modifying Geometrical Tolerances

This task shows you how to modify a geometrical tolerance.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a geometrical tolerance.
1. Double-click the geometrical tolerance you want to modify.
The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is displayed, with the existing values pre-entered.
You can reset the current style values in the Geometrical Tolerance dialog box at any time using the Reset button.
2. Modify the values as desired, as explained in Creating a Geometrical Tolerance.
3. Click OK.
4. Click in the free space to validate the geometrical dimension

modification.
5. Create a dimension, then create a geometrical tolerance on it.
6. Click on the extension line and move the dimension.

You can see that the geometrical tolerance follows the dimension.
7. Click on the geometrical tolerance and move it.

You can see that it has not impact on the position of the dimension.
The behavior is the same if a geometrical tolerance is created on the dimension value.
Associativity between the dimension and the geometrical tolerance

1. Create a dimension.
2. Create a geometrical tolerance on it, selecting the dimension line.
3. Move the dimension.

You will note that the positioning and the length of the tolerance leader remain constant when moving the dimension, whatever the
dimension type.
5. Create a dimension.
6. Create a geometrical tolerance on it, selecting the extension line.
7. Move the dimension.

You will note the length of the tolerance leader is recomputed as long as the dimension is moved.
This is due to the fact that the ratio between the lengths of the leader's projection and the extension line's projection remain constant.
The positioning of the leader is also recomputed so that the distance between the anchor point of the tolerance and the extension line remain
constant.
When a tolerance is created on an angle dimension, the positioning and the length of the leader remain constant if the dimension is moved.
Copying Geometrical Tolerances

This task will show you how to copy an existing geometrical tolerance and then edit the content for
creating a new one.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a geometrical tolerance.
1. Click on the geometrical tolerance you want to copy.
2. Right-click and select Copy from the contextual menu.
3. Select the element to which you want the geometrical tolerance to be associated.
4. Right-click and select Paste from the contextual menu.
5. Move the copied geometrical tolerance to position it as desired.
6. Double-click the copied geometrical tolerance.
The Geometrical Tolerance dialog box is displayed, with the existing values pre-entered.
7. Make sure the Filter Tolerance box is selected. This will display only those tolerance symbols
generally considered appropriate for the type of geometrical element selected.
Unselecting this box displays all symbols, regardless of the selected type of element.
8. Modify the values as desired, as explained in Creating a Geometrical Tolerance.
9. After you are done entering values in a given field, press the Tab key to move to the next field.
The geometrical tolerance is updated as you define values for each field.
10. Click OK to confirm your operation and close the dialog box.
11. Click anywhere in the drawing to validate.

Creating Driving Dimensions

This task shows you how to create dimensions that will drive associated geometry.
You can create the following types of driving dimensions:
● length
● distance (and distance offset in the case of two concentric circles)
● angle
● radius
● diameter.
Go to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension and select Activate
analysis display mode. Then, click the Types and colors button. The Types and colors dialog box is
displayed.
Make sure the Dimensions driving 2D geometry check box is selected, and identify the color that will
be assigned to driving dimensions (you can change it if you want).
Create a line. Click the Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar and create a length
dimension on this line.
1. Double-click the dimension. The Dimension value dialog box is displayed.
2. Make sure the Drive geometry check box is selected. This dimension will now drive the geometry.
3. Modify the dimension value, entering 40 millimeter as the new length.
4. Click OK to validate and exit the dialog box. The geometry is updated according to the new driving
dimension value.
5. Click elsewhere in the drawing to deselect the dimension. You can see that the driving dimension is
assigned the colors defined in the Types and colors dialog box.
More about driving dimensions

Once the Drive geometry check box is selected, you can access a contextual menu and customize the
values properties according to your needs. For more information on the available options, refer to CATIA
Knowledgeware Infrastructure - Tips and Techniques - Summary, available from the Using
Knowledgeware Capabilities section in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
You cannot create driving dimensions between the following types of elements (in this case, the Drive
geometry option is deactivated when double-clicking the dimension):
● Between an interactive element and a generated circle center.
To bypass this problem, create a point that is concentric with the center of the circle and create the
dimension between this new point and the other element.
● Between an interactive circle and a generated circle.
● Between an interactive line and a generated one that are not parallel.
To bypass this problem, create a point that will be coincident with line A and line B at the same time
and create the dimension between this new point and the other element.
● Between two fixed elements, that is to say:
❍ generated elements
❍ axis lines
❍ center lines
❍ 2D components
❍ interactive elements that are fixed by constraints or driving dimensions.
Dimension Systems
The Interactive Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify given types of dimension
systems.
To edit dimension system properties, see Editing Dimension System Properties. To customize dimension system
styles, see Dimension System Styles.
Before you begin: You should be familiar with basic concepts.
Create chained dimension systems: Create a chained dimension system using selection.
Create cumulated dimension systems: Create a cumulated dimension system using selection.
Create stacked dimension systems: Create a stacked dimension system using selection.
Modify a dimension system: Modify a dimension system or a dimension within a dimension system.
Line-up dimension systems: Line up dimensions according to a given reference.

Before You Begin

A dimension system is a set of dimensions which can be handled either globally or individually.
Creating Dimension Systems

You can create (and therefore modify) the following types of dimension systems:
● Chained Dimension Systems
● Cumulated Dimension Systems
● Stacked Dimension Systems
Note that you can create half-dimensions on stacked dimension systems only.
Manipulating Dimension Systems

● By default, when manipulating dimension systems, Dimension following the cursor is activated. Go
to Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, to use or not
automatic positioning.
● A click over a dimension system enables you to select the whole dimension system. However, you may
want to reverse this behavior to select a single dimension. Click on the Dimension system selection
mode icon in the Tools toolbar to deactivate the dimension system. Selections will be now
focused on dimensions rather than on the whole dimension system. Click again on the icon to activate
the dimension system.
Modifying the Dimension System Attributes

You can modify the following attributes while you have no more than one dimension in the dimension
system:
Modify while creating:

● Type
● Measure direction. Refer to Using Tools for more information.

● Angle sector
Modify after creating:

● Properties (see further down)
● When creating: to activate temporarily the Dimension following the cursor option, hold on the ctrl
key.
● When creating and editing: to activate temporarily the Activate Snapping option, hold on the shift
key.
● When creating an angle dimension: if the Dimension following the cursor option is activated, you
can swap the angle sector of the first dimension according to the mouse position holding on the ctrl
and shift keys. If the Dimension following the cursor option is not activated, you can swap to the
complementary angle sector holding on the ctrl key and clicking on the dimension line.
Dimension System Properties

You can apply given properties to dimension systems. For this, use the edit Properties, see Editing
Dimension System Properties. Note, chained dimension systems have no specific system properties.
Using Styles
You can use styles when creating dimension systems in drawings created with version R14 and later (or
pre-R14 drawings whose standard has been updated or changed in R14 and later). Styles are defined in
the standard used by the drawing and managed by the administrator.
When creating a dimension system, the Style toolbar displays the styles available for this type of
dimension system and the styles available for its dimensions. (By default, the Style toolbar is situated at
the top left of screen.) If only one style is available, it will be used by default.
If several styles are available for this type of dimension system, you can choose the style that you want to
use to create this dimension system by selecting it from the Style toolbar.
If several styles are available for dimension in the dimension system, you can choose the style that you
want to use to create this dimension by selecting it from the Style toolbar.
Refer to Using Styles for more information.

Creating Chained Dimension Systems

This task will show you how to create a chained dimension system.
1. Click the Chained Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-
toolbar).
2. Click a first point on the view.
3. Click a second point on the view.
You just created a first dimension within the chained dimension system.
4. Click a third point on the view.
You now created a second chained dimension in the system. You can create as many chained dimensions
as desired.
Note that if you move one dimension line as you create a chained dimension, all the lines will move
accordingly. In the same way, clicking on one dimension line highlights all the lines showing the whole
system is selected.
5. Click in the free space to end the chained dimension system creation.
The Chained Dimension System works for distance and angle dimensions only.
You can interrupt manually extension lines on both single dimensions of a system and the whole system.
For more information, refer to the Interrupting Extension Lines section.
Creating Cumulated Dimension Systems

This task will show you how to create a cumulated dimension system on a view.
1. Click the Cumulated Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
You just created a first dimension within the cumulated dimension system.
You now created a second cumulated dimension in the system. You can create as many cumulated
dimensions as desired.
Note that if you move one dimension line as you create a cumulated dimension, all the lines will move
accordingly. In the same way, clicking on one dimension line highlights all the lines, thus showing that
the whole system is selected.
5. Click in the free space to end the cumulated dimension system creation.
● If the cumulated dimensions are set with the value oriented along dimension line, set the Parameters applying
only if value orientation reference is Dimension Line (Cumulate Dimension: Value Orientation Reference = 1) in
the standards.
● You can interrupt manually extension lines on both single dimensions of a system and the whole system. For
more information, refer to the Interrupting Extension Lines section.
● The Cumulated Dimension System works for distance and angle dimensions only.
Creating Stacked Dimension Systems

This task will show you how to create a stacked dimension system on a view.
Stacked dimensions are parallel lines with a common extension line.
1. Click the Stacked Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar (Dimensions sub-toolbar).
You just created a first dimension within the stacked dimension system.
You now created a second stacked dimension in the system.

You now created a third stacked dimension in the system. Note that this stacked dimension is inserted
properly into the system.
You can create as many stacked dimensions as desired.
6. Click in the free space to end the stacked dimension creation.

The Stacked Dimension System works for distance and angle dimensions only.
You can interrupt manually extension lines on both single dimensions of a system and the whole system. For more
information, refer to the Interrupting Extension Lines section.
Modifying a Dimension System

This task will show you how to modify a dimension system or a dimension within a dimension system.
In our example we chose to create a stacked dimension system and to perform the following actions:
● Moving a dimension system
● Moving a dimension
● Aligning a dimension system
● Restoring a value position
● Adding a dimension into a system
● Deleting a dimension from a system
● Copying a dimension system
1. Create a stacked dimension system including several dimensions as shown below.
Moving a Dimension System

1. Click over the dimension system to select it.
The whole system is highlighted.
2. Drag the whole system below the drawing.

3. Click in the free space to end the stacked dimension system selection.
Moving a Dimension
1. Right-click on the Dimension system and select Properties in the contextual menu.
2. In the System tab, set the Offset mode to Free, then click on OK.
See Editing Dimension System Properties for further information on the Properties' panel.
3. In the Tools toolbar, click on the Dimensions system selection mode icon to deactivate the
dimension system.
4. Select several dimensions and drag them above the dimension system.
5. Click in the free space to end the dimension selection.

Moving a dimension can be performed only on stacked dimension system.
Aligning a Dimension System

1. Make sure Dimensions system selection mode icon is activated in the Tools toolbar.
2. Click over the dimension system to select it.
3. Right-click and select Align into System.

The dimensions are aligned into the system as before.
You can perform an Align into System on a whole system as well on several dimensions after multi-
selecting them. To do so, set the system's offset mode to free (see Editing Dimension System Properties),
then click on the Dimensions system selection mode icon to deactivate the dimension system. The
dimensions you selected are aligned into a system of their own as shown below.
Restoring a Value Position

2. Right-click on the Dimension system and select Properties in the contextual menu.
3. In the System tab, set the Dimension values alignment at 10mm from the Reference line.
4. Click on Apply to visualize the Dimension values alignment.
5. Click on the Dimensions system selection mode icon to deactivate the dimension system.
6. Move some of the dimensions.

7. Click on the Dimensions system selection mode icon to activate the dimension system again.
8. Right-click on the dimension system and select Restore Value Position.
The dimensions' values are back to their initial position.

9. Click on the Dimensions system selection mode icon to deactivate the dimension system.
10. Drag several dimension values to modify their position.

11. Multi-select the dimensions.
12. Right-click and select Restore Value Position in the contextual menu.
The dimensions' values are centered back in the system.

Adding a Dimension into a System

You have to select the icon corresponding to create the dimension system you would like to modify i.e. a
chained, cumulated or stacked dimension system.
2. In the System tab, set the Offset mode to Constant, then click on OK.
See Editing Dimension System Properties for further information on the Properties' panel.
3. Go to menu Insert->Dimensioning->Dimensions and select Stacked dimensions.
4. Select the system you want to insert a dimension to.
5. Select the geometry to dimension.

The new dimension is inserted into the system and is automatically aligned into the system.
Deleting a Dimension from a System
1. Make sure Dimensions system selection mode icon is deactivated in the Tools toolbar.
2. Select a dimension.
Note that only the selected dimension is highlighted, not the whole system.
3. Press Del key.
The dimension system is updated accordingly automatically aligned.

Should you want to delete the whole dimension system, make sure Dimensions system selection mode
icon is activated in the Tools toolbar and press Del key.
Copying a Dimension System
2. Select the geometry and its associated dimension system and click on the Copy icon.
3. Create a new view and select it.
4. Click on the Paste icon:
The geometry and its dimension system is pasted in the view.

If the dimension system offset mode is set to Free, modifying one or several dimensions of the system
will not impact the system 's alignment.
If the dimension system offset mode is set to Constant, an automatic line-up is applied to dimension
lines and values in case you perform any of the following action:
● Adding a dimension to a system

● Deleting a dimension to a system
● Updating the 3D geometry
● Applying a style to a system
For more information on the Constant and Free Offset mode, refer to the Editing Dimension System
Properties section.
Lining Up Dimension Systems

This task will show you how to line-up a dimension system.
1. Create a cumulated dimension system including several dimensions as shown below.
2. Click on the Dimension icon to create a dimension.

3. Right-click on your dimension system and select Line-up in the contextual menu.
4. Position the mouse on the dimension you just created to align the dimension system on it.
The Line Up dialog box is displayed.

For a dimension system only Offset to reference, Align stacked dimension values and Align
cumulated dimension values are taken into account.
5. Modify the Offset to reference value to 5mm.
6. Click on OK.
The dimension system is aligned on the dimension with an offset of 5mm.
The dimension system is aligned according to its dimension system properties.


The Interactive Drafting workbench lets you create dimensions for technological features such as electrical
harness, or between technological features such as structural plates.
Before you Begin: You should be familiar with basic concepts.
Creating Intra-Technological Feature Dimensions: Create dimensions for technological features such as
electrical harness.
Creating Inter-Technological Feature Dimensions: Create dimensions between technological features such
as structural plates.
Before you Begin

There are a few things you should know before you begin creating technological feature dimensions.
Technological feature dimensions let you create dimensions for technological features such as electrical
harness or structural stiffeners, or between technological features such as structural stiffeners.
Technological feature dimensioning relies on the fact that technological features can specify the way
they should be dimensioned, which allows you to create only realistic and customized dimensions,
based on the know-how of a given discipline.
Depending on the type of feature that you will be dimensioning, you need specific product licenses to
create technological feature dimensions. For more information on the availability of technological
feature dimensioning for a given workbench, refer to the related documentation.
Action/object and Object/action Mode

Technological feature dimensioning is available in action/object mode (i.e. selecting the command first
and then the feature to dimension) and in object/action mode (i.e. selecting or multi-selecting the
feature(s) to dimension and then selecting the command).
Technological Feature Dimensions icons

Several Technological Feature Dimensions icons are available from the Technological Feature
Dimensions sub-toolbar.
● Technological Feature Dimensions creates any type of technological feature dimension

(intra or inter) specified by the feature, depending on the option selected in the Tools palette.
● Multiple Intra Technological Feature Dimensions icon create either the intra-technological
feature dimension type specified by the feature when only one is specified, or the preferential intra-
technological feature dimension type specified by the feature when several are specified.
● Chained Technological Feature Dimensions icon create either the inter-technological

feature dimension type specified by the feature when only one is specified, or the preferential inter-
technological feature dimension type specified by the feature when several are specified.
● Length Technological Feature Dimensions , Angle Technological Feature Dimensions
, Radius Technological Feature Dimensions and Diameter Technological Feature
Dimensions create a specific dimension type when the feature specifies several dimension
types. Using one of these options is particularly useful when you want to create a dimension type
other than the preferential type specified by the feature.
Contextual menu
At any time during the dimension creation, you can right-click a technological feature to display a
contextual menu.
This contextual menu is particularly useful when several dimension types can be created for a given
feature. This depends on what is specified by the feature.
● Optional choices, available when several dimension types are available for the selected feature or
features, let you specify a single dimension type that you want to create, out of all the types
available.
● The All option creates all available dimensions for all selected features.
● The None option creates none of the available dimensions for all selected features.
● The Show Panel option lets you display the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog
box.
Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog

box
The Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box lets you select precisely the types of
dimensions that you want to create for a given feature. This dialog box is particularly useful when
several dimension types are available for a given feature (especially when creating inter-feature
dimensions).
● From the list area, you can select the types of dimension that you want to create for a given feature
or de-select those that you want to delete.
● You can also use the Create drop-down list. The default option, (Selected), creates the dimension
types selected from the list area above. The All option creates all available dimensions for all
selected features. The None option deselects all available dimensions for all selected features.
● The Hide button lets you hide the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box.
When a feature is checked and grayed out as shown below, it means that not all dimensions available
for this feature have been selected.
You can also show or hide the Technological Feature Dimensioning Selection dialog box using the Show
Panel icon available in the Tools Palette.
Limitations
You cannot create coordinate, stacked and curvilinear dimensions for technological features.
Creating Inter-Technological Feature Dimensions

This task will show you how to create dimensions between technological features such as structural stiffeners.
You need a Structure Functional Design or a Ship Structure Detail Design license for the purpose of this
scenario as we will be dimensioning Structure features. Inter-technological feature dimensioning may also be
available for other applications. For more information on the availability of technological feature dimensioning
for a given workbench, refer to the related documentation.
Refer to Before you Begin for general information about technological feature dimensions.
Open the MemberForDim.CATDrawing document.

For your information, this document references the MemberForDim.CATProduct document. You do not need to
open this product.
1. Click the Chained Technological Feature Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning toolbar,
Technological Feature Dimensions sub-toolbar.
You can also click the Technological Feature Dimensions icon and then select the Chained
Technological Feature Dimensions icon from the Tools Palette.
2. Select Ref_FunStiffener_002 as the first feature for dimensioning. Note that the name of a feature is
displayed as a help as you move the cursor over it.
3. Select Ref_FunStiffener_001 as the second feature.

A preview of the dimension is displayed. The dimension creation command remains active.
4. Right-click to display the contextual menu.
5. Select Angle between supports (true dimension).
The next dimension will be created between the previously selected feature (i.e. the second feature
you selected) and the next feature you select.
6. Select the third feature.

You can also right-click to view the various types of dimensions you can create between the
features. For the purpose of this scenario, leave Distance between parallel supports (true
dimension) selected.
7. Optionally move the dimension to position it as wanted.
8. When done, click in the drawing (but not on a technological feature) to create the dimension. The inter-
feature dimensions are created as specified by the feature.
You can now handle the dimensions just like any other dimension.
Note that the dimension arrow is automatically oriented according to the direction of material (in
this case, the stiffener's molded side), which is the case when dimensioning structural features.
Creating Intra-Technological Feature

Dimensions
This task will show you how to create dimensions for technological features such as electrical harness.
You need an Electrical Harness Assembly license for the purpose of this scenario as we will be
dimensioning Electrical Harness Assembly features. Intra-technological feature dimensioning is also
available for other applications such as Structure Functional Design or Ship Structure Detail Design. For
more information on the availability of technological feature dimensioning for a given workbench, refer
to the related documentation.
Refer to Before you Begin for general information about technological feature dimensions.
Open the ElectricalAssembly.CATProduct document and make sure it is loaded in the Electrical Harness
Assembly workbench (if necessary, select Start -> Equipment & Systems -> Electrical Harness
Assembly to launch the workbench). Open the ElectricalAssembly.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Multiple Intra Technological Feature Dimensions icon from the Dimensioning
toolbar, Technological Feature Dimensions sub-toolbar.
You can also click the Technological Feature Dimensions icon and then select the
Multiple Intra Technological Feature Dimensions icon from the Tools Palette.
2. Select the feature that you want to dimension. Note that the name of a feature is displayed as a
help as you move the cursor over it.

The dimension is created as specified by the feature. In this specific example, the bundle
segment specifies that the dimension should provide its overall length.
The dimension creation command remains active.

3. Repeat step 2 for each additional feature that you want to dimension.
4. End the dimension creation by clicking anywhere in the drawing (but not on a technological
feature) or by lining-up the dimension. The intra-feature dimensions are created as specified by
the feature.
You can now handle the dimension(s) just like any other dimension.
Annotations
The Generative Drafting workbench lets you create and manipulate annotations.
Note that annotation commands are actually provided with the Interactive Drafting workbench. Therefore,
this section of the documentation actually points to the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. As such, the
information detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context.
If you want to manipulate annotations in a Generative Drafting context, you can open the
GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document.
In order to be consistent with the way commands have been grouped in toolbars and sub-toolbars, the
following tasks are documented in the Manipulating Dimensions chapter:
● Datum Feature Creation and Modification
● Geometrical Tolerance Creation, Modification and Copy
See Before you begin to learn about important concepts, including setting text properties.
Before you begin: You should be familiar with basic concepts such as setting the properties of a text (font
style, size, justification, etc.), using default values, and specifying the position and/ or orientation of a
text.
Create a free text: Create a text that either wraps or not, that is assigned an unlimited width text frame,
even though this text may reach the frame boundary.
Create an associated text: Create a text which you want to be and remain associated to an existing
element.
Make an existing annotation associative: At any time and once an annotation has been created, you can
add a link between an annotation and another element.
Create a text with a leader: Create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an
element.
Add a leader to an existing annotation: Add a leader to an annotation that was previously created.
Handle annotation leaders: Add or remove breakpoints, extremity or interruptions. Move and position
leader breakpoints.
Add frames and sub-frames to existing text: Add a frame or a sub-frame to a text that was previously
created.
Replicate a text and attribute: Replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute.
Copy text graphical properties: Copy the text graphical properties of an annotation or element to other
elements.
Create a datum target: Create a datum target on a view.
Modify a datum target: Modify a datum target by editing it in a dialog box.

Create a balloon: Create a balloon using a dialog box.
Creating an associative balloon on a generated product view: Create associative balloons on views
generated from a product.
Modify a balloon: Modify a balloon using a dialog box.
Create a roughness symbol: Create a roughness using a dialog box.
Create a welding symbol: Create a welding symbol using a dialog box.
Create a geometry weld: Create a geometry weld symbol.
Modify annotation positioning: Assign new positioning to existing annotations.
Create/modify a table: Create, edit and modify a table.
Find/replace text: Locate and then, if needed, replace strings of characters.

Perform an advanced search: Use the advanced search command.
Query object links: Query object links in a drawing.
Adding attribute links to text: Add one or more attribute links between text that was previously created.
Before You Begin

● Setting Text Properties
● Specifying the Position and Orientation of a Text
● Annotations: Limitation
Setting Text Properties

Text properties such as font style, size and justification can be applied to text, dimension text, text with
leader, balloon and datum target, as well as to text included in datum features and geometrical
tolerances. You can set the properties of a text either before or after creating it.
Create a text.
If the Text Properties toolbar is not displayed, choose View -> Toolbars, and select Text Properties.
1. Select the text.
2. Choose the properties you want to apply to this text in the Text Properties toolbar. For instance,
select Italic and Bold. The properties you chose are applied to the selected text.
The options available in the Text properties toolbar are listed in the table below:
Option Name Description
Changes the style of the
Font Name
text.
Changes the size of the
text. Note that this size
Font Size
cannot be inferior to 0.2
mm.
Changes the weight of the
Bold text. Toggles between
normal and heavy (bold).
Changes the angle of the
Italic text. Toggles between
normal and slanted (italic)
Underline Adds a line under the text.
Adds a line through the

Strike Thru
center of the text.
Overline Adds a line above the text.
Raises the text above the

Superscript
normal text line.
Lowers the text below the
Subscript
normal text line.
Aligns multiple lines of text
Left Justify to the left edge of the text
frame.
Centers multiple lines of
Center Justify
text within the text frame.
Aligns multiple lines of text
Right Justify to the right edge of the
text frame.
Anchor point Changes the position of the
point that connects the
text to the drawing or to
an element. Choices are as
follows:
● Along the top of the
text: left, center or
right
● Along the vertical
center of text: left,
center or right
● Along the bottom of the
text: left, center or
right
Frame Draws a single-line frame
around the text.
A variety of different
shapes is available.
You can choose to create

each frame with either a
variable or a fixed size. For
a rectangular frame, for
example, the icon

represents the variable-
size frame, and the icon
(with the padlock)

represents the fixed-size
frame.
Insert SymbolInsert a symbol if the

selected element allows it.
Specifying the Position and Orientation of a Text

You can specify the position (x, y) and/ or orientation (angle) of a text using the Position and
Orientation toolbar. Note that the options available in this toolbar apply to annotations only (not to
dimensions, for example).
Create a text.
If the Text Properties toolbar is not displayed, choose View -> Toolbars, and select Position and
Orientation.
1. Select the text whose position and/or orientation you want to specify.
2. Enter the required values in the Position and Orientation toolbar.
❍ X: sets the horizontal position.
❍ Y: sets the vertical position.
❍ A: sets the orientation.
Annotations: Limitation
● In the Drafting workbench, it is impossible to store annotations in a selection set.
● If you multi-select annotations and geometry and then try to drag the selected elements, then either
annotations or geometry will be moved (depending on what elements are located under the mouse),
but not both. To bypass this limitation, you can translate the elements instead of trying to drag them.

This task explains how to create a text, with possible line wrapping. This text is assigned a frame of
unlimited width, even though it may reach the frame boundary. You can set the properties of a text
(anchor point, font size, justification, etc.) either before or after creating it.
You will learn how to perform the following operations:
● Creating a Free Text
● Specifying Text Orientation

1. Click Text in the Annotations toolbar.
2. Click where you want to insert the free text on the drawing. A green frame appears, as well as the
Text Editor dialog box.
3. If you want to specify the horizontal boundary of the text, drag the frame to where you want to
place the boundary. If you want the horizontal boundary to adjust to your text, proceed with the
following step.
4. Type your text in the Text Editor dialog box: "free text", for example.
The drawing is automatically updated with the text you are typing in the Text Editor dialog box.
❍ You can copy text from another application and paste it into the Text Editor dialog box,
and vice-versa. Note that the text layout and properties will not be preserved when
copying/pasting.
❍ When copying/pasting an engineering symbol (such as φ Phi for example) in the text
editor, note that the symbol is pasted as a plain character. As a result, if the symbol
does not exist in the current font, the resulting character in the drawing may be
different.
❍ You cannot copy complex objects (such as tables) from another application.
5. When you are done typing your text, click OK in the Text Editor dialog box, click anywhere on
the drawing, or click any command. You can also click the Select icon : in this case, the text
will remain selected so you can change its properties for example.
You can now start setting the properties of the text you just created using the Text Properties
toolbar.
Although you can create a text in a view that is not up-to-date, you cannot associate it to geometry. If
you try to do so, a message appears, indicating that the selected or active view is not up-to-date.
Specifying Text Orientation

You can associate the text to an element and make it parallel to it. To do this, you can either:
● Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-Up tab and check Text in the
Annotation Creation area. From then on, any text you create after having selected an element will
be automatically associated to this element.
● When the above option is not activated, you can specify when you want to associate a text to an
element. To do so, click Text and then press the Shift key while selecting the element you want
the text to be associated to. You can then type your text.
You can also make the text vertical. To do this, click Text and then press the Ctrl key while clicking in the
drawing where you want to create your free text.
Creating an Associated Text

This task shows you how to create a text that will be associated to an existing element. This text will
remain associated with this element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create two diameter dimensions, for example.
1. Click the Text icon in the Annotations toolbar.
2. Select the element to which you want to associate a text.
Here, we will use a dimension. You can associate the text either to the dimension line or to the
extension line by clicking the appropriate element. Click the dimension line as in our example.
The green text frame is displayed as well as the Text Editor dialog box.
3. Enter the text to be created in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing. For example,
enter "diameter".
4. Click in the free space or click the Select icon to end the text creation.
5. If needed, select the dimension and move it to the desired location.
The text remains associated to the dimension.

❍ Note that the text is associative to the whole selected element. In other words, in the
case of a dimension, if you move the dimension text exclusively, the associated text will
not move accordingly.
❍ When creating associated texts, pressing the SHIFT key lets you change the orientation
of the text as regards the element to which it is associated.
❍ You can associate text to the following elements:
■ Annotations: text, datum feature, datum target, balloon, geometrical tolerance,
roughness symbol, weld symbols.
■ Dimensions
■ 2D elements: point, circle, ellipse, parabola, hyperbola.
■ Generative edges
Making an Existing Annotation Associative

This task explains how, at any time and once an annotation has been created, you can add a link between
an annotation and another element. You can add two different types of links:
● positional links
● orientation links
The elements that can be linked to annotations are listed below:

● Annotations
❍ text
❍ datum feature
❍ datum target
❍ balloon
❍ geometrical tolerance
❍ roughness symbols
❍ weld symbols
● Dimensions
● 2D elements
❍ points
❍ circles
❍ ellipse
❍ parabola
❍ hyperbola
And, in a Generative Drafting context:
● Generative edges
Positional link
You can create positional links for every type of annotation.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a text.

1. Click the Select icon .
2. Right-click any part of the text (text itself, frame or leader).
3. Select Positional Link -> Create from the contextual menu.
4. Select the element to which you want the text's position to be linked.
The positional link is created. If you now select the linked element and drag it in the drawing, you
can notice that the text follows this element.
5. To remove the positional link, right-click the text again, and select Positional Link -> Delete
Orientation link
You can create orientation links for texts, texts with leader and roughness symbols.
6. Right-click the text.
7. Select Orientation Link -> Create from the contextual menu.
8. Select the element to which you want the text's orientation to be linked.
The orientation link is created. If you now select the linked element and modify its orientation, you
can notice that the text's orientation is modified simultaneously.
● If you create a link between an annotation and a dimension system, remember that the link can only
be made on a single dimension of the system.
● In a Generative Drafting context, certain types of generated elements (such as Pipe elements) are not
associative. For this reason, positional links or orientation links between an annotation and such
elements are not taken into account.

This task shows you how to create a text with a leader either in the free space or associated with an
element. You can set text properties either before or after you create the text.
● Creating a Text with a Leader
● About Texts with Leader

❍ Specifying Leader Orientation
❍ Specifying Text Orientation
❍ Elements that can be Assigned Text with a Leader

Create a rectangle.
Note that leader lines are displayed in either of the following ways based on the standard set when
defining the sheet.
1. Click the Text With Leader icon from the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).
2. Click the point on the element you want the leader to begin (arrow end).
A red frame appears.
3. Click in the free space to define a location for the text.

The Text Editor dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the text in the Text Editor dialog box or directly on the drawing: "text with a leader", for
example.
5. If needed, re-position or modify the text.
6. To end the text creation, click again in free space or select a command icon.
The leader is associated with the element you selected. If you move either the text or the
element, the leader stretches to maintain its association with the element.
If you change the element that is associated with the leader, both the new element and the
text with leader remain associative to each other.
7. Create a circle.
8. Drag the text with leader (using the yellow manipulator at the leader's extremity) to associate it
with the circle instead of the rectangle.
Although you can create a text in a view that is not up-to-date, you cannot associate it to
geometry. If you try to do so, a message appears, indicating that the selected or active view
is not up-to-date.
About Texts with Leader

Specifying Leader Orientation
When creating a text with leader, you can orient the leader perpendicularly to the element to which it is
associated.
To do this, you have two different possibilities:
● Either go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab and check Activate
snapping (SHIFT toggles). Then, click the Configure button and select either On orientation or
Both. To orient directly the leader perpendicularly to the associated element, press the Shift key
while clicking on the element to which you want to associate the text with leader (previous scenario,
step 3).
● Or go to Tools -> Options -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-Up tab, and check Text in the
Annotation Creation area. The text leader will be oriented perpendicularly to the geometry by
default. In this case, pressing the Shift key will let you orient it differently.
Specifying Text Orientation

When creating a text with leader, you can make the text vertical. To do this, hold the Ctrl key while
clicking in the drawing to position the text (previous scenario, step 3).
● You can also add a leader to existing text. To learn how to do this, refer to Adding a Leader to Existing
Text.
● You can perform a number of operations on a leader. To learn more, refer to Editing Annotation
Leaders.
Elements to which a Text with a Leader Can Be Assigned
You can assign a text with a leader to the following elements:
● 2D elements
❍ lines
❍ points
❍ circles
❍ curves
● Generative edges
Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation

This task shows you how to add a leader to an annotation that was previously created. Leaders can be
positioned freely, or using snapping (the leader is oriented perpendicular to the reference element).
For the purpose of this scenario, you will learn how to add a leader to an existing text, but this
functionality is available with other annotation types as well.
Go to Tools -> Options-> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-Up tab . Make
sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on the Configure button and
select either On orientation or Both.
Create a hexagon. Create an annotation, a free text for example.
1. Right-click the annotation to which you want to add a leader.
2. Select Add Leader.
3. You have two possibilities:
❍ If you want to position the leader freely:
Click where you want to position the leader head. The leader is created.
You can then move it to the desired location using the mouse. You can position the leader
breakpoint anywhere on the reference element, and snapping is not used.

❍ If you want the leader to be oriented perpendicular to the reference element:
Press the Shift key while clicking where you want to position the leader head. The leader is
created: it is snapped, and oriented perpendicular to the element to which it is attached.
Release the Shift key and the mouse.

To create as many leaders as required for an existing text, go to Tools -> Customize
and create the Add Leader command in a separate toolbar. You will then be able to
double-click the Add Leader command and click to locate the leader(s) to be created.
If several text elements are selected as you activate the Add Leader command, the
selection is cleared. Make sure you select one annotation only.
The leader remains associative to the text even if you modify the text it is associated
with.
Handling Annotation Leaders

This task shows you how to do the following:
● handle annotation leaders, by performing such operations as adding or removing a breakpoint, an
extremity or an interruption.
● move and position leader breakpoints.
Depending on the type of annotation the leader is associated with, not all operations described in this
section will be available.
Multi-selection restrictions:
● For all operations described in the Handling Leaders section below (except for changing the symbol
shape - see next comment), multi-selection is not taken into account. The operation will be
performed only on the leader you right-click in the selection.
● Changing the symbol shape behaves differently depending on whether one or several annotations in
the selection have more than one leader:
❍ if the leader you right-click is the only one in the annotation, then the symbol is applied to this
leader and to all annotations which have only one leader.
❍ if the leader you right-click is not the only one in the annotation, then the symbol is applied to
this leader only.
About associative and non-associative annotations:
When you create an annotation, a type of leader is automatically set, provided the standard files have
not been modified. If you choose the Automatic option, a default symbol will be used, depending on the
standard type, on the annotation type, and on whether the leader is associated to an element or not:
● If the leader is associated to an element:

❍ Unfilled arrow for ANSI / ASME
❍ Open arrow for ISO / JIS
● If the leader is not associated to an element:

❍ Unfilled circle for ANSI / ASME
❍ Filled circle for ISO / JIS
Handling Leaders
Create a text with a leader.
1. Right-click the yellow control point at the end of the leader. The leader's contextual menu is
displayed.
2. Choose from the available options.
● To add a breakpoint, select Add a Breakpoint. Then, to remove this breakpoint,

right-click on the breakpoint and
select Remove a Breakpoint.
● To add an extremity to an existing breakpoint, right-click on Then, to remove this extremity, right-
the breakpoint, select Add an extremity, and then click where click on the additional extremity and
you want to position the extremity. select Remove Leader/Extremity.
You can add an extremity only in the case of a text or a Clicking on the main leader
welding symbol. extremity will remove the leader.
● To add an interruption, select Add an Interruption and then, on Then, to remove this interruption,
the leader, click the two points between which you want to add right-click on the leader yellow
the interruption. control point and select Remove
Interruptions.
Any existing interruption will be removed from the leader when adding or removing breakpoints.
● To remove the leader, select Remove Leader/Extremity.
● To add an all around symbol, select All Around.

● To modify the leader symbol shape, point to Symbol Shape. Then, select No Symbol if you do not
want a symbol for the leader, or select the symbol you want from the available symbols.
You can remove the leader extremity symbol for all annotations.
3. You can also move the leader or any existing breakpoints by clicking a yellow control point and
moving it using the mouse.
● To move the annotation but not the leader, click the annotation and move it using the mouse.
● To move the leader along with the annotation while making sure the leader keeps its original shape,
select Rigid and then move the annotation.
● This functionality is available for texts, welding symbols, 2D components, tables and geometrical
tolerances, but not for other annotation types.
● This functionality also applies when rotating the annotation text using the Free Rotation icon .
Moving and Positioning Leader Breakpoints

You can move and position leaders breakpoints easily, for all types of annotations. Leader breakpoints
are moved and positioned using snapping (the leader is oriented perpendicular to the reference element).
Go to Tools -> Options-> Drafting -> Mechanical Design -> Annotation and Dress-up tab. Make
sure the Activate snapping (Shift toggles) option is selected. Then, click on the Configure button
and, in the dialog box which is displayed, select either Leader orientation or Both.
Open the Move_Leaders.CATDrawing document. This document contains a text with leader and a balloon.
Add a breakpoint to both annotations, as explained in the previous section.
1. Move the text leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint
anywhere, and snapping is not used.
2. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The leader is
snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, or perpendicular to the element to which it is
attached.
3. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the leader.
4. Move the balloon leader breakpoint with the mouse. You can position the leader breakpoint
anywhere, and snapping is not used.
5. Now, press the Shift key while moving the leader breakpoint with the mouse. The leader is
snapped, and is positioned vertically or horizontally, which happens to be the same orientation as
the element to which the leader is attached.
6. Release the Shift key and the mouse when you are satisfied with the position of the leader.
Both leaders are now positioned properly.

Adding Frames or Sub-Frames

This function allows you to add frames and sub-frames to texts and texts with leader.
Create a free text.
1. Select the text you have created and click the Frame icon in the Text Properties toolbar.
The Frames sub-menu is displayed.
You can choose to create each frame with either a variable or a fixed size. For a rectangular frame, for
example, the icon represents the variable-size frame, and the icon (with the padlock)
represents the fixed-size frame.
● Variable-size frames adapt to the text length, whereas fixed-size frames always remain as is, no
matter what the text length is. So if you choose a fixed-size frame and the length of you text exceeds
the frame size, then the text will extend beyond the frame.
● Fixed frame sizes are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Frames in
Administration Tasks > Setting Standard Parameters and Styles > Setting Standard Parameters.
2. Choose a frame in the menu, scored circle, for example, and click to select it.
3. Right-click on the text and in the contextual menu choose the Add leader command and click in
the free space to end the leader creation.
You can zoom to make it easier to move the leader round the text.
4. Right-click the hanged point.
A contextual menu is displayed, in which Standard Behavior is selected by default. Selecting or
deselecting this option drives how many anchor points are available when moving the leader
around the frame (refer to the Frames Anchors Table below, Standard Behavior OFF or Standard
Behavior ON columns).
Frames Anchors Table

Type of frame Standard Behavior OFF Standard Behavior ON
1 2 3
Rectangle o-------o-------o
o-------o-------o
/ \
/ \
1 o o 2
4 o o 5
Scored Rectangle \ /
\ /
o-------o-------o
o-------o-------o
Square
Circle 3
__o__ __o__
Scored Circle 2 o o 4 / \
| | | |
Set 1 o o 5 1 o o 2
| | | |
Fixed Support 8 o o 6 \ /
--o-- --o--
Sym Part 7
Sym Set
3
o o
/ \ / \
Diamond 2 o o 4 o o
/ \ / \
1 o o 5 1 o o 2
\ / \ /
8 o o 6 o o
\ / \ /
o o
7
Nota
3
o o
/ \ / \
2 o o 4 o o
Triangle / \ / \
1 o----o----o 5 1 o---------o 2
6
1 2 3
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Right Flag | \ | \
4 o o 5 1 o o 2
| / | /
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Right Oblong 6 7 8
1 2 3
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Left Flag / | / |
4 o o 5 1 o o 2
\ | \ |
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
Left Oblong 6 7 8
1 2 3
Both Flag o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
/ \ / \
4 o o 5 1 o o 2
Oblong \ / \ /
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
6 7 8
Ellipse
1 o---------o 2
Sticking 1 o---------o 2
3 4 5
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
/ / / /
2 o o 6 o o
Parallelogram / / / /
o-------o-------o o-------o-------o
1 8 7 1 2
5. Drag the leader hanged point and see how it behaves depending on whether Standard Behavior
is selected or not.
6. Select a part of the text, as an example "Te", for this:
❍ Double-click on the text to edit it, the Text Editor appears.
❍ Select "Te" in the Text Editor or in the drawing.
7. Apply the Both Flag frame to the text.
You cannot use the following types of frames as sub-frames: Sticking, Nota, Scored Rectangle, and all
types of fixed-size frames.
The size of frames depends on:

● whether you use them as frames or sub-frames,
● the height between the characters top and bottom or cap and base,
● margins.
Thus, a frame or a sub-frame might look different although the text to which it is applied is identical.
Example of frame. Example of sub-frame.

Replicating Text and Attribute

This task shows you how to replicate text as well as the corresponding text attribute.
Open the GenDrafting_part_02.CATPart document. Open the GenDrafting_part_03.CATDrawing

document.
1. Click the hole to be assigned text on the part. For example, on GenDrafting_part_02.CATPart,
select Hole.1.
2. Click the CATDrawing (GenDrafting_part_03.CATDrawing) and click the Replicate icon in the
Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).
3. Select the text to be replicated.
The new replicated text automatically appears under the cursor.
4. Click where you want the new text to be positioned.
The hole diameter automatically corresponds to the diameter of Hole1 you selected on the part.
5. If needed, add a text leader to the new text.

Copying Graphic Properties

This task shows you how to copy the graphic properties of a text element to existing texts. This is true for
any type of Interactive Drafting element. In this task, we will take free text as an example.
Create free texts.
1. Multi-select the free texts to be modified graphically speaking.
2. Click the Copy Object Format icon from the Graphic Properties toolbar.
3. Select the text to be used as a graphical reference for selected texts.

The graphical properties assigned to the text used as a reference are now copied onto the multi-selected
free texts to be modified.
Creating a Datum Target

This task will show you how to create a datum target on a right projection view. You can set text
properties either before or after you create the datum target.
1. Click the Datum Target icon from

the Annotations toolbar (Text sub-
toolbar).
2. Select the attachment point of the
datum target leader.
3. Select a point to be used to position the
datum target (anchor point).
The Datum Target Creation dialog box is displayed.
4. Enter the required values in the fields. For example, 1 and A.

Click the button if you want to specify that the datum target provides information on the diameter of
the selected element.
5. Click OK.
The datum target is created.
The character string that is edited in the Datum Target Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed
on the drawing.
Modifying a Datum Target

This task shows you how to modify a datum target by editing it.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a datum target.
1. Double-click the datum target you want
to modify.
The Datum Target Modification dialog box is

displayed.
2. Modify any of the datum target values.
For example, enter B instead of A.
3. Click OK.
The datum target is modified.

Creating a Balloon
This task will show you how to create a balloon. You can set text properties either before or after you
create the text.
1. Click the Balloon icon from the Annotations toolbar (Text sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element. For example, select the bottom line of the rectangle.
3. Click to define the balloon anchor point.
The Balloon Creation dialog box appears, with the value 1 pre-entered in the field.
4. You can enter another string or value as needed. For the purpose of this exercise, leave the pre-
entered value as is.
5. Click OK.
● The value that is edited in the Balloon Creation dialog box is simultaneously previewed on the
drawing.
● When you create more than one balloon, the value of this balloon is automatically incremented.
Creating Associative Balloons on Generated

Product Views
This task will show you how to create associative balloons on views generated from a product (that is to
say, in a Generative Drafting context).
Open the Product_Balloon.CATProduct document.
On this CATProduct document, Product Structure sub-products have already been assigned numbers
(Generate Numbering icon). For more details, see the Product Structure User's Guide.
1. Go to the Generative Drafting workbench by opening Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.
2. Click Balloon in the Annotations toolbar (Texts sub-toolbar).
3. Go over one of the part with your cursor.
All the edges on all the views extracted from the part are highlighted.
4. Create a balloon by selecting an edge.
The number of the balloon corresponds to the number of the sub-product created in the product
which the views were generated from. In this particular example, even though the balloon you
are creating is the first one, it is assigned number four as it is applied to sub-product number
four.
Note that if you modify the numbering in the product and then regenerate the product,
the balloon modification will be applied to the generated views only after you perform a
view update.
Modifying a Balloon
This task shows you how to modify a balloon.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a balloon.
1. Right-click the balloon you

want to modify.
2. From the contextual menu, select Properties.
3. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab.
4. You will now define the balloon frame properties from the Frame drop-down list. By default, balloons
are assigned a variable-size circle which adapts to the balloon text length. You have other options:
● You can display the balloon without a frame by selecting the None icon .
● You can assign a fixed-size frame to the balloon by selecting the fixed-size Circle icon .
For more information about fixed-sized frames, refer to Adding frames or sub-frames.
For the purpose of this exercise, select the fixed-size Circle icon .
5. Click OK to validate and

close the Properties dialog box.
The balloon size is modified.
6. Now, double-click the balloon. The Balloon Modification dialog box is displayed.
The Autofit option is active when the size of the balloon frame is fixed.
7. Modify the balloon value.
8. Select the Autofit option to adapt the size of the text to that of the balloon frame.
9. Click OK. The text is

enlarged to fit within the
balloon frame.
In the case of large texts, the Autofit option reduces the text size.
10. You can also modify the anchor point and thereby the position of the balloon.
Creating a Roughness Symbol

This task will show you how to create a roughness symbol.
Open the Roughness.CATDrawing document.
1. Click the Roughness Symbol icon from the Annotations toolbar.
2. Select the attachment point of the roughness symbol. The roughness symbol position and orientation will be
associative to this point.
The Roughness Symbol dialog box is displayed.

The fields available in the Roughness Symbol dialog box depend on the standard used by the drawing, as defined
by the administrator.
Symbols Definition
Surface texture
Surface texture and all surfaces around
Basic
All surfaces around
Lay approximately parallel to the line representing the surface
Lay approximately perpendicular to the line representing the surface
Lay angular in both directions
Lay multidirectional.
Lay approximately circular
Lay approximately radial
Lay particulate, non-directional, or protuberant
Basic surface texture
Material removal by machining is required
Material removal by machining is prohibited.
3. Enter the required values in the various field(s).
4. Click OK. The roughness symbol is created.

5. If needed, modify the roughness symbol position by dragging it to the required location. Note that an
extension line may be displayed between the roughness symbol and the element to which it is attached
(providing this element is linear), depending on where you drag the roughness symbol.
● By default, there is a 1 millimeter space between the geometry and the extension line, as well as a 1
millimeter space between the end of the extension line and the roughness symbol. Those spaces cannot be
customized.
● The roughness symbol default parameters are 1 for thickness and solid for line type. They cannot be
customized.
● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with
custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools
Palette are disabled during the creation of the roughness symbol.
On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Roughness Symbol dialog box is pre-filled with
the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active during the
creation of the of the roughness symbol.
● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option, you can reset the current style
values in the Roughness Symbol Editor dialog box at any time using the Reset button.
● At any time, you can modify the roughness symbol. For this, double-click the roughness symbol to be
modified and enter the desired modifications in the displayed Roughness Symbol dialog box.
● By default, the roughness symbol's orientation is determined according to the orientation of the line it is
associated with. You can modify this orientation using the Invert button available in the Roughness Symbol
dialog box.
● When this is not already the case, you can link roughness symbol position and orientation to another element,
see Making an Existing Annotation Associative.
Creating a Geometry Weld

This task will show you how to create a geometry weld.
1. Click the Weld icon in the Annotations toolbar (Symbols sub-toolbar).
2. Select a first element. For example, a line.
3. Select a second element. For example, another line.
The geometry default weld symbol automatically appears on the drawing.
The Welding Editor dialog box is displayed.
4. If needed, modify the geometry welding symbol. For example, modify the thickness from ten to
five millimeters.
5. If needed, modify the type of the geometry welding symbol by selecting the Change Type option
from the Welding Editor dialog box.
6. Click OK.
The geometry welding symbol is created.
● The area fill corresponding to the geometry weld cannot be modified.

● Geometry welds are not associative, which means that changing the geometry does not move the
weld accordingly.
Creating a Welding Symbol

This task will show you how to create a welding symbol. You can set text properties either before or after
you create the text.
Welding symbols
Square butt weld
Singe V butt weld
Single bevel butt weld
Flare V butt weld
Flare bevel butt weld
Single U butt weld
Single J butt weld
Fillet weld
Spot weld
Back weld
Steep-flanked single-bevel butt weld
Steep-flanked single-V weld
Plug weld
Removable backing strip used
Permanent backing strip used
Surfacing weld
V flare weld
Spot weld
Complementary symbols
Weld with flat face
Weld with convex face
Weld with concave face
Flush finished weld
Fillet weld with smooth blended face
Finish symbols
C finish symbol
F finish symbol
G finish symbol
H finish symbol
M finish symbol
R finish symbol
Complementary indications
Field weld
Weld-all-around
Weld text side (up or down)
Indent line side (up or down)
Weld tail
Reference

1. Click the Welding Symbol icon from the Annotations toolbar (Symbols sub-toolbar).
2. Select an element or click in the free space to position the leader anchor point, and then click to
validate. The welding leader will appear.
3. Move the cursor to position the welding symbol and then click at the chosen location.
The Welding creation dialog box is displayed.
4. Type the desired values in the upper and/or lower field(s).
5. Click the symbol buttons to choose the welding symbol, complementary symbols and/or finish
symbols.
The welding symbols available depend on your standard.
6. If you want to add complementary indications like a field weld or a weld tail, for example, click the
appropriate button.
7. Click OK.
The welding symbol is created.
8. If needed, modify the welding symbol position by dragging it to the required location.
9. Double-click on the welding symbol to edit it, and change the weld text side for example by
clicking the Up/Down switch button.

● If you have selected the Use style values to create new objects option in Tools -> Options ->
Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab, the Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled
with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor). In this case, Properties toolbars and the
Tools Palette are disabled during the creation of the welding symbol.
On the other hand, if you have not selected this option, the Welding creation dialog box is pre-filled
with the last entered values (if any). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette are active
during the creation of the welding symbol.
● You can reset the current style values in the Welding creation dialog box at any time using the Reset
button.
● You can close the tail (reference) using a rectangle variable-size frame . For more information
about adding frames, refer to Adding Frames or Sub-Frames.
● At any time, you can modify the welding symbol. To do this, double-click the welding symbol to be
modified and enter the modifications in the displayed dialog box.
● You can import a plain text file (.txt) to use as a reference (specification, process or other) by clicking
the Import File button.
Modifying Annotation Positioning

This task will show you how to assign new positioning to existing annotations.
You can also modify the position of the views using the same dialog.
Open the IntDrafting_Annotations_Positioning.CATDrawing document.
1. Multi-select the annotations to be

newly positioned. In this example,
multi-select text.
2. Select the Tools -> Positioning -

> Element Positioning command
from the menu bar.
The Positioning dialog box appears:
3. Select the Align to top option .

Align to the left
The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the left.
The text anchor point is moved to the left (for example, from the bottom center to the bottom left).
The texts are aligned vertically relatively to the reference text origin point (same x abscissa as for the
reference text).
Align to the center
The reference text is positioned at the middle of both left and right extremity points.
The text anchor point is moved to the center (for example, from the top left to the top center).
reference text).
Align to the right
The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the right.
The text anchor point is moved to the right (for example, from the middle center to the middle right).
reference text).
Align to the top
The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the top.
The text anchor point is moved to the top (for example, from the bottom left to the top left).
The texts are aligned horizontally relatively to the reference text origin point (same y coordinate as for the
reference text).
Align to the middle
The reference text is positioned at the middle of both top and bottom extremity points.
The selected texts are assigned the middle attribute as text origin (for example, from the top left to the
middle left).
reference text).
Align to the bottom
The reference text is the text, among the selected texts, that is positioned the most at the bottom.
The text anchor point is moved to the bottom (for example, from the top left to the bottom left).
reference text).
4. Select the Space from left to right option and set the Space value to 30mm.
Note that when you select a Space option, the modification does not appear similarly on the drawing. This
modification only appears when you enter the new Space value in the Positioning dialog box or when you
select a Space value.
5. Select the Distribute horizontally option .

6. Select the Move vertically to top option and set the Move value to -10mm.
Note that when you select a Move option, the modification does not appear similarly on the drawing. This is
only the case once you enter the new Move value in the Positioning dialog box or when you select a spacing
option.
Creating/Modifying a Table
This task shows you how to create and edit a table by adding text, inserting columns and/or rows,
merging cells, inverting lines and/or columns, switching lines and columns, and inserting views. You can
also split a table, import a table, and insert a view in a table.
Choose a task:
● creating a table,
● editing and modifying a table,
● splitting a table,
● importing a table,
● inserting a view in table.
Creating a table
Create a new sheet and a new view.
1. On the Annotations toolbar, click Table .
2. Click a point in the drawing to specify the table position.
Tables cannot be associative. Selecting an element in the drawing does not make the table
associative to this element.
3. In the Table Editor dialog box that appears, enter the number of columns and rows you want for
the table.
❍ The line height corresponds to the height of a string.

❍ The line width corresponds to 5 times the height of a string.
4. Click OK to validate the table creation.
Editing and modifying a table

Create a table as explained earlier in this task.
1. Select the table and drag it to another position.
2. Double-click the table to switch it to edition mode.

You cannot move a table while it is in edition mode.
While in edition mode, you can:
❍ Select a column by clicking above the column when the symbol appears.
❍ Select a line by clicking on the left-hand side of the row when the symbol appears.
❍ Leave edition mode by clicking outside the table.
3. To access the general contextual menu, right-click the corner of the frame around the table.
This contextual menu allows you to:
❍ invert columns.
❍ invert rows.
❍ turn rows into columns and columns into rows.
❍ fit the text in the cells by automatically defining the optimal cell size.
❍ extend the table by adding columns and/or rows to it.
4. Choose Invert rows in the contextual menu. Rows are inverted, i.e., the last row becomes the
first one, the first row becomes the last one, etc.
5. Choose Invert Columns in the contextual menu. Columns are inverted.
6. Select Invert Columns / Rows in the contextual menu. Rows and Columns are inverted:
7. Right-click a column or row to access the related contextual menu, which lets you:
❍ Insert a column/row.
❍ Delete a column/row.
❍ Clear the content of a column/row.
❍ Modify the size of a column/row by either:
■ setting a new size for the column/row.
■ "autofitting" the size (the optimal cell size is automatically defined in order for text to fit in
it).
The size of a column or row and the text properties depends on the insertion point in the
table. If you insert a column/row:
❍ in the middle of a table, the size and text properties are the same as the preceding
column/row.
❍ at the beginning of the table, the size is the same as the first column/row and the text
properties are the same as the current text style.
8. Right-click two cells and choose Merge.
You cannot merge a cell that has already been merged.
9. Select the new cell formed by the two cells you have merged and choose Unmerge to split them
in two cells again.
10. Double-click on the text of a cell. The Text Editor dialog box appears: modify the text and click
OK to validate.
11. To choose vertical and horizontal text alignment, use the Anchor point tool . Align the text
of a cell on the right using .
12. Right-click a cell, and select Properties from the contextual menu. The properties available are
the same as those available for texts. Refer to Editing Text Properties for more information.
13. On the Font tab, specify a color, red for example, and click OK. The text in the selected cell is
now red.
When editing cell properties, note that a number of properties do not apply to the selected
cell, but to the table and all its cells.
❍ On the Text tab:
■ X and Y position
■ (Orientation) Reference
■ Orientation
■ Blank Background
❍ On the Graphic tab (Lines and Curves section):

■ Color
■ Linetype
■ Thickness
Splitting a table
Open the Split_tables.CATDrawing document. It contains a table that you will split into several tables.
1. Right-click the table and choose Split Table. The Table Split dialog box appears.
It contains the following options:
❍ Max. number of rows: if you want to split the table so that each new table contains a
maximum number of rows, select this option and enter the wanted number of rows in the
associated field.
❍ Max. height: if you want to split the table so that each new table has a maximum height,
select this option and enter the wanted height in the associated field.
❍ Vertical: check this option to create the new tables one below the other.
❍ Horizontal: check this option to position the new tables one next to the other.
❍ Distance: indicate the distance you want between each new table.
❍ Duplicate first row: check this option if you want to duplicate the first row in each new
table.
2. Select Max. number of rows, and enter 5 in the corresponding field.
3. Select Vertical.
4. In the Distance field, type 5 mm.
5. Select Duplicate first line.
6. Click OK. The table is split into several tables, according to the criteria you specified.
Importing a table
You can import a table in a drawing (of the .csv type only).
To perform this scenario, you must have a .csv file at your disposal.
Note that this functionality is based on system options. Indeed, in a CSV (Comma Separated
Values) file, each line corresponds to a line in the table; within a given line, each cell is separated by a
specific character that depends on the decimal separator specified in the system options.
This decimal separator determines the character that will be interpreted as the cell separator:
● if the decimal separator is a dot, then the comma (,) is used as the column separator.
● if the decimal separator is a comma, then the semi-column is used as the column separator.
1. Click the Import Table icon and select the table you want to import.
2. Click Open. The table is imported into the drawing.
Inserting a view a in table

Open the GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing file. Create a table in the front view.
1. Double-click the table to switch it to edition mode.
2. Right-click the cell you want to fill. Select Insert Object.
3. Choose the view you want to insert by clicking the view in the drawing or in the tree.
❍ You cannot select the view containing the table,

❍ The view must be in the same drawing.
❍ If you modify the 3D part and update the drawing, the view in the table will be updated
as well.
Choose the Top view:
The top view is inserted in the table, and it is resized so as to fit the cell. You can resize the cell if
you want to enlarge the view in the table.

Finding And Replacing Text

This task explains first how to locate a string of characters and then how to replace it.
Strings can be found and replaced in the following elements:
● balloons
● datum features
● datum targets
● dimensions
● texts
Open the IntDrafting_Text_Replace.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the Edit->Find item from the menu bar.

The Find dialog box appears.
2. Select any of the optional settings. For example, enter

First as the Find what text.
3. Select .
The following message appears in the dialog box: Searching All Current Sheet Views. If you
previously selected a given number of sheets or elements in the document, the message will be
Searching All Current Elements.
The first instance found is red colored.
4. If needed, select to search for other

instances.
5. Select .
The Replace dialog box now appears.
6. Enter the text you want to use as replacement text
and select again. For example, enter Second

as the Replace with text.
To replace all instances of the text, select .
You can also match case, find whole words only or re-
frame the window.
7. Select .
Note that you can directly access the Replace dialog box by selecting the Edit->Replace item from the
menu bar.
Performing an Advanced Search

This task will show you how to use the advanced search command in the Drafting workbench.
First, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide to learn more about advanced search.
1. Select the Edit->Search... command then click the Advanced tab:
2. Choose Drafting as the workbench.

Any element type has the following attributes:
● Name: indicate the name of the searched element
● Color: select a color from the color chooser or use the color of an existing element
● Set: a selection set indicating a numeric value with the corresponding unit of measure.
Some elements have additional types:

Type Additional attributes Value to select or to key in
Balloon Part name name of the searched element
Datum Feature Reference name name of the searched element

Datum Target Reference name name of the searched element
Size size indicated in the searched element

Dimension Type type of dimension (angle, diameter, radius,
length, etc.) searched
value dimension value searched
Not associative on 3D Yes/No
Not updateable Yes/No
Fake Yes/No
Driving dimension Yes/No
True Yes/No
Geometrical tolerance value tolerance value searched

tolerance type (circularity, concentricity,
type
flatness, parallelism, etc.) searched
Text having attribute links Yes/No
text string text string searched

3. Select an operating sign in the first combo box.
4. Select (if there is a combo box) or key in the value you are looking for.
Querying Annotation Links

This task explains how to query annotation links in a drawing (this lets you know what object an annotation is
linked to) and how to zoom on the linked object.
Open the query_link.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click on the text "Front view Scale: 1:1" and select Query Object Links in the contextual menu.
The Query Link Panel appears:
It displays the linked objects name and specifications. In our example, the view name and scale are linked to the
front view.
2. Click the Close button to close the Query Link Panel.
Zoom on the linked object

1. Right-click on the text "Note 1: Circle..." and select Query Object Links in the contextual menu.
2. In the Query Link Panel, check Re-frame the window and select the linked object you want to zoom (in
this specific case, you can only select Circle.2).
The application zooms on the object to which the text is linked, i.e. the circle.
3. Click the Close button to close the Query Link Panel.

Adding Attribute Links to Text

This task shows you how to add one or more attribute links to text. You will learn how to:
● create an attribute link between a hole on the 3D part and the corresponding text in a drawing view
● assign an attribute link to a view
Creating an attribute link between a hole on the 3D part and

the corresponding text in a drawing view
Open the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document and the GenDrafting_part_02.CATDrawing document.
1. On the active view, double-click the text to which you want to add a link.
An empty text is created in the drawing. The Text Editor dialog box is also displayed. Do not pay attention
to this dialog box yet.
2. In the drawing, right-click the text and select Attribute Link.
3. Select the object to which you want the text to be linked, from the specification tree (either from the 3D or
from the CATDrawing document).
For example, select Hole 2 from the CATPart specification tree.
The Attribute Link Panel dialog box is displayed in the Drafting window:
4. Select the "Part1\PartBody\Hole.2\Diameter 8.5mm" attribute from the list.
The 8.5mm value automatically appears both in the Text Editor dialog box and on the CATDrawing.
6. Modify the diameter value of Hole 2 on the CATPart. For example, change it to 13.5mm.
The views generated on the CATDrawing and the text attribute value are updated to take this modification
into account.
❍ If the modification is not taken into account, go to Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Part
Infrastructure, General tab and select the Automatic update mode.
❍ At this step, you can perform a query on the link(s) you just created. To do so, right-click the view
and select Query Objects Links. The Query Link Panel dialog box appears, displaying a list of
the existing links.
❍ You can only modify the part of the text that is not of the text attribute type.
Modifying the text attribute requires isolating it first. To do so, right-click the text attribute and
select Isolate Text.
❍ You cannot replace text in attribute links (even though attribute links are displayed and the
Replace button is available in the Links dialog box, which is available through Edit -> Links).
Assigning an attribute link to a view

The GenDrafting_part_02.CATDrawing document is still open from the previous task.
Creating a parameter
1. Click the Formula icon from the Standard toolbar.
The Formulas: Drawing dialog box is displayed.
2. In the drop-down lists next to the New Parameter of type button, choose the String with Single Value
type.
3. Click the New Parameter of type button.
4. In the Edit name or value of the current parameter fields, replace String.1 by UserName in the first field,
and enter the value, i.e. NameOfUser in the second field.

5. Click Apply and then click OK. The parameter is created, and it is displayed in the Drafting specification tree,
under the Parameters node.
If the Parameters node in no displayed in the Drafting specification tree, go to Tools -> Options ->
General -> Parameters and Measure, Knowledge tab, and check the With value and With
formula options.
Defining the Text Attribute
6. Click the Text icon from the Annotations toolbar and click in the free space (under the Front View -
Scale:1 text, for example).
An empty text is created in the drawing (in the active view). Also, the Text Editor dialog box is displayed. Do
not pay attention to this dialog box yet.

7. In the drawing, right-click on the empty text and select the Attribute Link option from the contextual
menu.
8. From the specification tree, select the object which you want the text to be linked to. For example, select the
CATDrawing document (GenDrafting_part_02 item at the very top of the specification tree). The Attribute
Link Panel dialog box is displayed.
9. Scroll down the list and select UserName in the Attribute List.
10. Click OK. The value assigned to UserName, i.e. NameOfUser, is displayed in the Text Editor dialog box as
well as on the drawing view.
11. Click OK to close the Text Editor dialog box.
Modifying the Text Attribute
12. Double-click the UserName parameter in the specification tree. The Edit Parameter dialog box is displayed.
13. Change the parameter name (NameOfUser) to NewNameOfUser.
14. Click OK. The parameter name is automatically updated on the view.
Dress-Up Elements
The Generative Drafting workbench enables you to create a number of view dress-up elements on existing 2D
elements.
Note that dress-up commands are actually provided with the Interactive Drafting workbench. Therefore,
this section of the documentation actually points to the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. As such, the
information detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context. Still, you can open the
GenDrafting_part.CATDrawing document and thus manipulate dress-up elements in a Generative Drafting
context. This dress-up will be associative to the elements created from a part or an assembly. When
created, these elements are associated with a view.
● If you delete generated center lines, threads or axis lines, you will be able to generate them again
thanks to the Restore deleted option from the contextual menu.
● If you delete in 3D the geometry on which dress-up elements are based, these dress-up elements will
be permanently deleted when you update the drawing (an update operation cannot be undone).
This has a consequence on existing annotations or dimensions (i.e. annotations or dimensions that
were created on such a dress-up element prior to its deletion):
❍ annotations will be no longer be linked to anything.
❍ dimensions will appear as being not-up-to-date. Note that you can re-route dimensions to
geometry when relevant.
Create center lines (no reference): Apply a center line to one or more circles.
Create center lines (reference): Apply a center line to one or more circles with respect to a reference
(linear or circular).
Modify center lines: Modify one or more center lines at one or more end(s) of this/these center lines.
Create threads (no reference): Create a thread without a reference.
Create threads (reference): Create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear
(line).
Create axis lines: Create an axis line by selecting lines.
Create axis lines and center lines: Create an axis line by selecting lines.
Create an area-fill: Create an area fill, i.e. a closed area on which you will then apply graphical dress-up
elements called patterns (these can be hatching, dotting or coloring). Patterns can be applied to area fills
created from both sketched and generated elements.
Create arrows: Create an arrow.

Creating Center Lines (No Reference)

This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse.
1. Click the Center Line icon from the Dressup toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
2. Select a circle.
Center lines are automatically applied to the circle
.
3. Click in the drawing to confirm the creation and select the center lines.
4. Use manipulators to modify center lines size.
● You can apply this scenario to an ellipse.
● When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot
be associative to the 3D.
Creating Center Lines (Reference)

This task will show you how to apply a pair of center lines to a circle or an ellipse with respect to a
reference (linear or circular).
1. Click the Center Line with Reference icon from the Dressup
toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can multi-select circles before you enter the command to

create center lines for all selected circles.
2. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines.
3. Select the reference line.
The center line created is associative with the reference line.
You can create a pair of center lines according to a circular reference (a point or a circle):
4. Click the Center Line with Reference icon from the Dressup
toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can multi-select circles before you enter the command and
thereby apply center lines to the selected circles.
5. Select the circle to be applied a pair of center lines.
6. Select the reference circle.
The pair of center lines created is associative with the reference

circle type element.
You cannot apply this scenario to an ellipse.
When creating a center line on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be
associative to the 3D. In this case, the center line is neither linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements.
For example, a non-associative center line with a reference line will not be updated when the reference
line is moved.
Modifying Center Lines or Axis Lines

This task will show you how to modify a pair of center lines at one or more end(s) of this/these center
lines. You can use the same method to modify axis lines.
1. Click a center line. End points appear.
2. Select any end point and drag to move all the center line extremities to a new position.
3. Press the Ctrl key while selecting any end point and drag the selected extremity to a new
position.
❍ You can multi-select elements when modifying center lines.

❍ You can also modify the center line through Edit > Properties > Graphic tab.
Creating Threads (No Reference)

This task will show you how to create a thread without a reference. In this particular case, you will apply
a thread to a hole.
1. Click the Thread icon from the Dress-up toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
You can also multi-select holes before clicking the Thread icon.
Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette which is automatically displayed:
● The Tap type option , which is activated by default.
● The Thread type option .
2. Select the Thread type option .
3. Select the hole (or circle) to which you want to apply the thread.
The thread is created.
4. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified
symmetrically.
If you want to move only one axis line, hold on the Ctrl key while you are dragging the manipulator.
If you delete the thread axis line, the external circle is also deleted and vice versa.
● The thread that appears on the hole is assigned a standard radius and representation (compliant
with the selected standard).
● When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the thread cannot be
associative to the 3D.
Creating Threads (Reference)

This task shows you how to create a thread with a reference, either circular (circle or point) or linear
(line). In this particular case, you will apply a thread to a hole with a line as reference.
1. Click the Thread with Reference icon from the Dress-up toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-
toolbar).
You can also multi-select holes before clicking the Thread icon.
Activating this command displays two options in the Tools Palette which is automatically displayed:
● The Reference Tap type option , which is activated by default.
● The Reference Thread type option .
2. Select the Reference Thread type option .
3. Select the hole (or circle) to which you want to apply the thread.
4. Select a reference line.
The thread is created according to this reference.

5. Select a manipulator and drag it along a direction. Thread axis lines are modified symmetrically.
When creating a thread on a generative view, a message will be displayed if the center line cannot be
associative to the 3D. In this case, the thread is neither linked to the 3D nor to 2D drawing elements.
For example, a non-associative thread with a reference line will not be updated when the reference line
is moved.
Creating Axis Lines

This task will show you how to create an axis line.
1. Click the drawing window, and click the Axis Line icon from the Dress-up toolbar (Axis
and Threads sub-toolbar).
2. Select two lines.
The axis line is created.

❍ If needed, you can select two non-parallel lines that are not co-linear.
❍ Both in the case of center lines and axis lines, a default overrun is created.
❍ When creating an axis line in a Generative Drafting context, a message will be displayed
if the axis line cannot be associative to the 3D.
❍ In a Generative Drafting context, you can create axis lines between symbolic fillet edges
or fillet representation. Note that these axis lines will not be associative (a message will
be displayed).
❍ In a Generative Drafting context, depending on the type of element selected, the axis
line is sometimes created directly after you select a single element. If you are not
satisfied with the axis line thus created, you can force the selection of a second element
by pressing the Ctrl key prior to making your selection: you will then be able to select
the first and then the second element.
If you need to modify an axis line, refer to Modifying Center Lines or Axis Lines. Note that
you can multi-select elements when modifying axis lines.
Creating Axis Lines and Center Lines

This task will show you how to create simultaneously axis and center lines on several circles.
1. Click the drawing window, and click the Axis Line and Center Line icon from the Dress-
up toolbar (Axis and Threads sub-toolbar).
2. Select two circles.
The axes and center lines are created.

3. Select an axis line manipulator and drag it along a direction. You can notice that thread axis lines
are modified symmetrically.
When creating axes and center lines in a Generative Drafting context, a message will be displayed if
axes and center line cannot be associative to the 3D.
Creating an Area Fill

An area fill is a closed area on which you then apply graphical dress-up element called patterns (these can be
hatching, dotting or coloring). You can create area fills on the following elements:
● sketched elements,
● generative elements
● part-sketched, part-generative elements
In this task, you will learn how to create an area fill on a drawing containing a mix of sketched and generative
elements.
Open the GenDrafting_Area_Fill.CATDrawing document. This drawing is a generative one.
Define your area fill profile by creating lines so that your

drawing looks like the figure shown here. In this example,
sketched elements (the ones you create) are selected
(they are shown in red), and generative elements are
shown in black.
The area fill profile will therefore consist of both sketched

and generative elements.
You do not need to activate the view in which you are going to create an area fill.
1. Click the Area Fill icon in the Dress-Up toolbar.
The Area Detection dialog box appears.
2. Click the Automatic option (the other option is described in the remarks section below) and then click inside
the area for which you just defined the profile, under the line which represents the fillet edge.
The software automatically detects the area to fill based on where you clicked and fills this area with the
selected pattern. The Areas to Fill dialog box disappears.
3. Optionally, you can select another pattern for your area fill. To do so:
a. make sure the area fill is selected and click the down arrow besides the Pattern icon in the
Graphic Properties toolbar.
b. In the Pattern dialog box, select a pattern for your area fill and click OK.
A few remarks
Area to Fill dialog box
The two options available in the Area to Fill dialog box are described below. You can specify the area you want to fill
before or after choosing the option in the Area to Fill dialog box.
For each option, examples illustrate what kind of area fill you will get depending on where you click. Note where the
cursor is located on the figures.
● Automatic automatically detects the area to fill based on where you click: just click inside the area you want to
fill.
If you click in this area: You get this area fill:

● With profile selection lets you specify the area to fill: select all the 2D elements that make up the profile of the
area you want to fill, and then click inside this area.
As you select elements on a view, intersection

symbols (stars) appear where elements
intersect. This enables you to know where the
profile is open: in this case, intersection
symbols do not appear. As you cannot apply an
area fill to an open profile, make sure all
elements intersect.
If you select these elements: You get this area fill:

Miscellaneous remarks about applying area fills

● Whichever option you choose in the Areas to Fill dialog box, make sure the profile you select is closed, i.e. that all
elements that make up its profile intersect. An error message will appear if you select a profile which is not
closed.
● When you create an area fill on sketched elements, or on part-sketched, part-generative elements, extra
sketched elements are added over the generative elements which make up the profile of the area fill. Also,
coincidence constraints are created between the original generative elements and the added sketched elements.
● On generative drawings, the area fill is not associative with the 3D part. If you modify the original 3D part and
then update the generative drawing, the area fill will not be changed.
● When a view is isolated, any area fill on the view is isolated as well. Consequently, there is no longer any
relationship between the area fill and its profile.
● Select elements carefully: the area will be filled according to the elements you selected.
● If you apply modifications to the filled area, the pattern will be modified accordingly.
● In the case of superposed views, the area fill will be created on the active view (provided the active view is one of
the superposed views).
● If you create text in a filled area, the background of the text will be blanked as shown here.
● For more information about hatching or dotting patterns, refer to the General remarks about patterns section in
Administration Tasks > Setting Standard Parameters and Styles > Setting Standard Parameters > Patterns.
What you get if the pattern cannot be
What you have before applying the pattern:
displayed:
Creating Arrows
This task will show you how to create an arrow. For the purpose of this exercise, you will use an arrow to
illustrate the kind of hole you want to apply to a circle.
1. Select Insert -> Dress Up -> Arrow from the menu bar.
2. Click a point or select an object to define the arrow starting point (the tail). For example, select a
circle.
3. Click another point or select another object to define the arrow extremity (the head). The arrow is
created.
❍ The arrow and the selected object are associative.

❍ To modify the general appearance of the arrow, either click the arrow and then use the
Graphic Properties toolbar, or right-click the arrow and then use the Properties dialog
box (select Properties and click the Graphic tab).
❍ To modify the position of the arrow, click the arrow and use the manipulators to drag it
to its new location.
4. You will now add a breakpoint to the arrow. Select the arrow and right-click on a yellow
manipulator. A contextual menu appears.
5. Select Add a Breakpoint. A breakpoint is added to the arrow; you can drag it to change the
arrow path.
6. You will now choose a symbol for the arrow tail. To do this, right-click on the yellow tail
manipulator.
7. In the contextual menu, point to Symbol Shape and select a symbol, Filled Circle for example.
The symbol you choose now appears on the arrow tail. You can also change the symbol used for
the arrow head by repeating steps 6 and 7.

8. You will now create an interruption on the arrow tail. Right-click on the yellow tail manipulator
again.
9. In the contextual menu, select Add an Interruption. An interruption is added to the arrow.
● You cannot add another extremity to an arrow.

● Arrow angle and length are defined by standards. For more information, refer to Dimension
Parameters in Administration Tasks > Setting Standard Parameters and Styles > Setting Standard
Parameters.
Properties
This section discusses how to quickly access and edit information on 2D geometry, dress-up elements,
annotations and dimensions in a single dialog box, provided you use the Edit -> Properties contextual
command.
The data you can access (tabs) depends on the element you select. Note that clicking the More switch gives
you access to more tabs.
Note that properties are actually documented in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide. As such, the information
detailed in this section is presented in an Interactive Drafting context. When information specific to Generative
Drafting is introduced, this will be specified.
Edit sheet properties: Access and edit sheet properties.

Editing view properties: Access and edit view properties.
Editing 2D geometry feature properties: Access and edit information on 2D geometry features (name and
stamp).
Editing 2D element graphic properties: Access and edit graphic properties.
Edit pattern properties: Access and edit pattern properties.
Editing annotation font properties: Access and edit annotation font properties.
Editing text properties: Access and modify text color, position and/or orientation.
Editing picture properties: Access and modify picture position, size, scale and compression.
Editing dimension text properties: Access and edit dimension text properties.
Edit dimension font properties: Access and edit dimension font properties.
Editing dimension value properties: Access and edit dimension value properties.
Editing dimension tolerance properties: Access and edit dimension tolerance properties.
Editing dimension extension line properties: Access and edit dimension extension line properties.
Editing dimension line properties: Access and edit information on dimension line properties.
Editing dimension system properties: Access and edit information on dimension system properties.
Editing 2D component instance properties: Access and edit 2D component instance properties.
Editing callout properties: Access and edit the callout properties.
Editing Sheet Properties

This task explains how to edit sheet properties.
Define a new sheet.
1. Right-click the sheet in the specification tree (press F3 to display it).
2. Select Edit -> Properties.
3. Click the Sheet tab. It contains a number of properties:
● General properties
● Format properties
● Projection Method
● Generative Views Positioning Mode
● Print Area
General properties
Name
Enter a meaningful name for the sheet.
Global scale
Specify the scale (i.e. the scaling factor) which applies to all views in the sheet.
The scale does not determine the position of the views (or any other object) contained in the sheet.
When the grid is displayed, the position of the view in the sheet is not determined by the grid, which
only deals with what is drawn directly in the sheet. To see the real position of a given view in a sheet,
you need to use the ruler. It is the only way to see the real coordinates in a sheet referential.
Format properties
Format
This list contains the format names defined by the administrator in the Standards Editor. For more
details, see Sheet Format Definition in the Administration Tasks chapter.
You may also create your own user-defined formats, defined locally for a given drawing. To create
your own format, proceed as follows:
1. Type a name for the format in the Format field.

The name of the newly created format must be different from those in the user-defined
and in the standard lists of formats. If not, a warning message is displayed to inform you
the format name you chose is not valid.
2. Use the tab key to access the Width and Height fields and set their values.
Display
Display the frame representing the format of the sheet.
Width
Width of the selected format. This field is available for user-defined formats only.
Height
Height of the selected format. This field is available for user-defined formats only.
Orientation
Orientation of the selected format. Available only if the selected format allows you to modify the
orientation type. For more information, refer to Sheet Format Definition.
Projection Method
Note that properties in this section apply to all generative views available in the sheet (i.e. in a
Generative Drafting context).
First angle standard
Select this option if you want all views in the sheet to be created using the first angle standard.
The first angle standard is an orthographic representation comprising the arrangement, around the
- the view from above is placed underneath
- the view from below is placed above
- the view from the left is placed on the right
(Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)
Third angle standard
Select this option if you want all views in the sheet to be created using the third angle standard.
The third angle standard is an orthographic representation comprising the arrangement, around the
- the view from above is placed above
- the view from below is placed underneath
- the view from the left is placed on the left
(Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)
Generative Views Positioning Mode

Note that properties in this section apply to all generative views available in the sheet (i.e. in a
Generative Drafting context). The chosen property will be taken into account next time you update the
sheet. This property is also defined in the Sheet Styles.
Part bounding box center
Select this option if you want generative views to be positioned according to the center of the 3D
bounding box. This mode ensures that the center of the 3D bounding box remains at a fixed position
on the sheet, when views are updated.
Part 3D axis
Select this option if you want generative views to be positioned according to the 3D axis system. This
mode ensures that the projection of the 3D axis remains at a fixed position on the sheet, when views
are updated (even if the center of gravity of the 3D geometry has changed).
Example
Take this original view, for example:
Now, imagine you modify the 3D geometry in such a way that the center of gravity of the 3D changes.
You then update the view on the sheet.
● If Part center of gravity is selected: the center of gravity of the 3D geometry remains at a fixed
position on the sheet after the update.
● If Part 3D axis is selected: the projection of the 3D axis remains at a fixed position on the sheet
after the update.
Print area
Activate
Check this box to specify that only a specific area of the sheet should be printed. Doing this will
activate the associated fields so that you can define the print area.
Note that on top of checking this box, you must select Document area option as the Print area in
the Print dialog box in order for the print area to be printed. If you do not select the Document area
option, the whole document will be printed. Refer to Printing Sheets for more information.
Specify the X coordinate of the lower left-hand corner of the print area.
Specify the Y coordinate of the lower left-hand corner of the print area.
Width
Specify the width of the print area.
Height
Specify the height of the print area.
Format
Select a format if you want to define the print area using the width and height specified for that
format.
A specific contextual command lets you visualize the print area (providing it is activated), so as to re-
position or re-dimension it for example. To do so, either right-click the sheet item in the specification
tree and select Sheet.X object -> Visualize Print Area, or activate the sheet and select Edit ->
Sheet.X object -> Visualize Print Area. This zooms onto the print area, which is outlined as a
purple dashed box, with an X cross at its center.
Use the manipulators at the corners of the box to re-dimension the print area.
Drag the dashed box or the central X cross to re-position the print area.
You can then exit the print area visualization mode by pressing the Escape key or by clicking
elsewhere in the drawing. You can check the sheet properties to make sure that the coordinates,
width or height have been updated.
4. Change the sheet properties as wanted, and then click OK to validate.

Editing View Properties

This task explains how to edit view properties.
1. Right-click the front view and select Edit -> Properties.
2. Click the View tab. You can notice that a number of options are disabled, as they apply to
generative views only.
3. Choose your options.
Visualization and behavior
● Display View Frame: shows/hides the view frame,

● Lock View: locks the view so that it cannot be modified anymore.
● Visual Clipping: lets you reframe a view so as to display only part of it. Refer to Reframing a View for
more information.
Scale and Orientation
● Angle: defines the angle between the view and the sheet,
● Scale: defines the scale of the view.
● =: displays the decimal value with respect to the fraction. This field is read-only.
The view scale and angle are computed according to the view origin (which is visualized thanks to the
view axis), not according to a center of gravity.
View Name
Allows you to modify the name of the view (or of the 2D component when pertinent), and to enter a
prefix, an ID or a suffix. Among other things, you can create a formula for the view name. For more
information, refer to the Knowledge Advisor User's Guide.
4. Click OK to validate and exit the Properties dialog box.
Properties available on Generative Views
In the case of generative views (Generative Drafting workbench), a number of additional properties will be
available. The properties described below apply to generative views only, and will be active in a
Generative Drafting context.
Dress-up
Specifies the dress-up elements that should be displayed in the view:
● Hidden Lines: generates hidden lines.

● Center Line: generates center lines.
● 3D Spec: specifies whether, in an assembly, the properties assigned to given parts (also called
components) will be applied in the view.
The following 3D specifications may be defined for components in the Product Structure workbench:
❍ The component will, or will not, be cut when projected in section views (Do not cut in section
views).
❍ The component will, or will not, be projected in views (Do not use when projecting).
❍ The component will, or will not, be represented with hidden lines (Represented with hidden lines).
For more information, refer to Modifying Component Properties in the Product Structure User's Guide.
● 3D Colors: specifies that the colors of a part should be automatically generated onto the views.
● Axis: generates axis lines.
● Thread: generates threads.
Thanks to technological results, you can now generate threads in exact views pointing parts that
were created using the Paste Special > As Result with Link command. To sum up,
technological results enable you to generate the same threads (and thread dimensions) from an
original part as from its "as result with link" copy.
Here is what you need to know about this functionality:
❍ CPU and memory consumption are decreased while creating or updating a view containing
such threads.
❍ This functionality is not available for views generated using the CGR, Approximate and
Raster generation modes.
❍ Once you have created technological results for a given part, it is recommended not to
deactivate them. If you do so anyway, some thread dimensions may become not-up-to-date
(and will be displayed using the color defined in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -
> Drafting -> Dimension tab if the Activate Analysis Display Mode is active).
❍ Thread dimensions created with the Thread Dimension command are not generated from
3D constraints (and they are displayed using the black color). Therefore, you will not be able
to drive 3D constraints from such dimensions.
For more information, refer to the Handling Parts chapter in the Part Design User's Guide:
❍ for more on the Paste Special > As Result with Link command, see Handling Parts in a
Multi-Document Environment
❍ for more on technological results, see Creating Technological Results.
● Fillets: generates fillets. You can choose to view Boundaries, Symbolic, Original Edges, Projected
Original Edges:
Boundaries
Thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets.
Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces

which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if they
correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two faces
whose curvature radii vary.
This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection

between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what
option you select.
Symbolic
Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each
corresponding surface.
Approximated Original Edges

Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the
fillet.
Projected Original Edges

Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view
projection.
This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection
mode.
The following restrictions apply to Symbolic, Approximated Original Edges and Projected Original
Edges:
● Dimensions on such fillets are not associative.
● Such fillets cannot inherit 3D colors. Likewise, when using generative view styles, such fillets cannot
inherit the 3DInheritance view dress-up parameters (defined in Tools -> Standard ->
generativeparameters -> *.XML file, Drafting -> ViewDressup -> 3DInheritance).
● Always have in mind that those fillets representations are only a symbolical preview of the 3D.
● 3D Points: projects points from 3D (no construction elements). You can choose from the following
options:
3D symbol inheritance: keeps the symbol from the 3D.
Symbol: displays the symbol you choose from the drop-down list.
● 3D Wireframe: displays both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views. You can choose
whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden or is always visible:
Can be hidden: with this option selected, 3D wireframe geometry will follow standard removal
of hidden lines.
Is always visible: with this option selected, 3D wireframe geometry will not follow standard
removal of hidden lines and will always be visible.
Whichever option you choose, note that linear elements will not be projected as points when
they are perpendicular to the projection plane.
Note that if you delete generated center lines, threads or axis lines, you will NOT be able to generate
them again (by updating the drawing), even if you select the appropriate dress-up options in the
Properties dialog box. It is impossible to restore generated center lines, threads or axis lines that have
been deleted.
Generation Mode
● Only generate parts larger than: specifies that you only want to generate parts which are larger
than the size indicated (in millimeters) in the appropriate field.
● Enable occlusion culling: saves memory when generating exact views from an assembly (or a part
or product) which is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system
option is active). This will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of
loading all of them, which is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU
usage.
● View generation mode: lets you change how the view is generated. A short description of the
various view generation modes is provided below. For a detailed description (including the advantages
and restrictions pertaining to each mode), refer to View Creation > About the View Generation Modes.
To a lesser extent, you may also refer to Customizing Settings > View.
❍ Exact view: turns the view into a exact view (the geometry becomes available).
❍ CGR: turns the view into a CGR view (only the external appearance of the component is used and
displayed; the geometry is not available).
❍ Approximate: turns the view into an approximate view. Although approximate views are not as
high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory
consumption. Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision
(click the Options button). Therefore, the approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to
sophisticated products or assemblies involving large amounts of data.
❍ Raster: turns the view into an image view. You can configure a number of options such as the
level of detail or the type of image to generate (shading, shading with edges, etc.) .
If you select a mix of exact, CGR, approximate and/or raster views, the options will be disabled. To
activate these options, make sure you select views which use the same generation mode.
Generative view style
● The Generative view style area shows the generative view style which is applied to the view.
● If you have modified the values of the properties defined in the selected generative view style by
editing some dress-up properties, for example, you can use the Reset to style values button to reset
these values to the original style values. (To let you know when properties have been changed
compared to the original generative style, an asterisk is displayed in front of them.)
The Generative view style properties are only available on generative views, when generative view style
functionalities are activated (i.e. when the Prevent generative view style creation option is de-
selected in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Administration tab).
Editing 2D Geometry Feature Properties

This task shows you how to access and edit information on 2D geometry features (name and stamp).
1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select Edit->Properties and click the Feature Properties tab.
You can also right click the 2D element and then select Properties from the displayed
contextual menu.
3. If needed, click the More button.
4. Enter a new name for the element in the field. The information displayed concerns the creation of
the elements.
5. Click the Graphic Tab. A number of properties are available. For more information, refer to
Editing 2D Element Graphic Properties.
6. Click OK to validate and exit.

Editing Graphic Properties

This task explains how to access and edit graphic properties for elements, such as geometry,
annotations, etc.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. For the purpose of this scenario, you will be editing
the graphic properties of a 2D geometrical element.
1. Select a 2D element on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select Edit -> Properties and click the Graphic tab.
You can also right click the 2D element and then select Properties from the displayed
contextual menu.
3. If needed, click the More button.
4. If needed, modify the available properties. Depending on the element you selected, not all
properties will be available.

● Fill:
❍ you can color the selected element and set the filling transparency.
● Edges:
❍ you can define the color, linetype (dotted, dashed, etc.) and thickness that will be used for edges.
See Graphic Properties Toolbar.
● Lines and Curves:

❍ you can define the color, linetype (dotted, dashed, etc.) and thickness that will be used for lines
and curves. See Graphic Properties Toolbar.
● Points:
❍ you can define the color and the symbol that will be used for points.
● Global Properties:
❍ you can choose if the element will be shown or not (check/uncheck Shown option)
❍ you can activate or deactivate Pickable mode. If you uncheck it, geometry will not be selectable
anymore. See Pick/No Pick mode.
❍ you can choose to display the selected element using a lower intensity.
❍ you can choose a layer for the selected geometry.
In some cases, changing the color of an element provides unexpected results, as the color of related
elements will be changed as well.
For example, if you change the color of a table frame, the font color of the table's text will also be
changed. In this case, a workaround is to change the font color after having edited the graphic
properties.
5. Click OK.
For more information on graphic properties, refer to the Infrastructure User's guide.
Pick/No Pick mode

When you create elements using the No Pick mode (Pickable option unchecked),
● If you want to make one or several elements pickable back again, perform as follows:
1. Select Edit -> Search from the menu bar and select the element(s) to be modified
from the Search dialog box.
2. Select Edit -> Properties from the menu bar and check the Pickable option from the
Properties dialog box.

● If you want to make all the elements on a sheet or in a view pickable back again, perform as follows:
1. Click the sheet or the view(s) to be applied the Pick mode from the specification tree.
2. Select Force Pick Mode from the contextual menu.
Graphic Properties Toolbar

You can also modify graphic properties using the Graphic Properties toolbar.
The Graphic Properties toolbar lets you modify the following graphical options:
● the line color
● the line thickness
● the linetype
● the symbol to be used for points
● a layer for the selected geometry
● copying objects (Copy Object Format icon )
● the pattern (Pattern icon ). This option display the Pattern Chooser dialog box, from which you
can select a pattern.
Care when you assign graphic attributes to a line (for example, make it thick and red).
When you turn this red thick line into a construction line (from the contextual menu: Object.Line ->
Definition..., Construction line option in the Line Definition dialog box), the line will become a dotted gray
line. Even though you then decide to make it a standard line back again (by un-checking the
Construction line option), the line will have lost its "red" and "thickness" attributes and will be assigned
its original attributes.
Editing Pattern Properties

This task explains how to access and edit pattern properties. Patterns are used for area fills or, in a
Generative Drafting context, when cutting through material in section views/cuts or breakout views, for
example.
Open the GenDrafting_Edit_Pattern_Properties.CATDrawing document.
1. Select the pattern be modified. For the purpose of our scenario, select the hatching pattern in the
Section view.
You can also right-click the pattern and then select Properties from the displayed contextual
menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Pattern tab.
4. To define your own pattern, choose a pattern type from the Type drop-down list:
❍ Hatching
❍ Dotting
❍ Coloring
❍ Image
If you want to choose from the various patterns available, you can also click the [...] button. This
will display the pattern chooser, from which you can make your selection.
5. Select your options as required.
❍ The options available in the dialog box depend on the type of pattern you selected, as
well as on the standard used by the drawing.
❍ When editing the properties of a pattern associated with a part material, the software
offers its own selection of patterns, and not the patterns defined in the standard.
Hatching
❍ Number of hatchings: Defines the number of different hatchings to use in this pattern. A tab
will be created for each hatching, to let you define each one individually.
This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard.
❍ Angle: For each hatching this pattern, specifies the angle value in degrees.
❍ Pitch: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the pitch in millimeters.
❍ Offset: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the offset in millimeters.
❍ Color: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the color.
❍ Linetype: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype.
❍ Thickness: For each hatching in this pattern, specifies the linetype thickness.
❍ Preview: Lets you preview the resulting hatching pattern.
The Color, Linetype and Thickness options can be modified, provided the EditAvailability
parameter is set to Yes under the Pattern node in the Standards editor. For more
information, refer to Pattern Definition.
Dotting
❍ Pitch: Specifies the dotting pitch in millimeters.

❍ Color: Specifies the dotting color.
❍ Zigzag: Specifies whether dotting should zigzag.
❍ Preview: Lets you preview the resulting dotting pattern.
Coloring
❍ Color: Specifies the color.

❍ Preview: Lets you preview the resulting coloring pattern.
Image
❍ Browse button: Lets you select the image to use for this pattern.
This option is unavailable with the current drawing standard. You can only use the images
defined by the administrator. These images are available from the pattern chooser (click the
[...] button).
❍ Angle: Specifies the angle value in degrees.
❍ Scale: Specifies the scale.
❍ Preview: Lets you preview the original image (not the result after modifying the angle and
scale).
6. Click OK to validate and exit.
● You can also modify pattern properties using the Pattern icon on the Graphic Properties
toolbar. This option displays the Pattern Chooser dialog box, from which you can select a pattern.
● Patterns are defined in the standards. For more information, refer to Pattern Definition.
Editing Annotation Font Properties

This task explains how to access and edit annotation font properties.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a free text, for example.
1. Double-click the text to switch it to edit mode.
2. Select the whole text (you can also select only part of the text) and then select Edit ->
Properties.
You can also right-click the selected text and then choose Properties from the contextual
menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Font tab. The associated panel is displayed.
● Font, Style, Size, Underline and Color: choose the font, size, style and color of the text, and
underline it.
● Attributes: draw a line through (Strikethrough) or above (Overline) the selected text, and make it
superscript or subscript.
You can either underline or overline a text, but you cannot do both.
When you are using a font stroke for annotations, the character's thickness is set to 1 for regular style
and 3 for bold style.
You can customize standard files in order to remove this parameter from the thickness' combo box so that
it cannot be applied to annotations' characters.
● Character:
❍ Ratio: modify character width.
❍ Slant: modify character slant (for italic text, slant=15 deg).
❍ Spacing: change the spacing between characters.
❍ Pitch: set a fixed or a variable pitch. As an example, create the free text "Tools" and apply the
font ROM1.
Fixed Pitch Variable Pitch

The Slant and Pitch options are available only for stroke fonts.
The pitch of some stroke fonts cannot be modified. In that case, the Pitch combo list is disabled.
In case you use characters in some fonts that have no or very little spacing (i.e. i or l), you should not set
the spacing to 0 mm, otherwise they would look as if they are superimposed and only one character would
seem to be displayed in your annotation.
Clicking the More button displays extra options, if any are available.
4. Modify the available options as required.
For more information on font properties, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Changing Character Ratio and Spacing

In this task, you will learn how to change the character ratio and spacing of a portion of text, but it is also
possible to change these for a whole text.
Create a free text.
2. Select a portion of text and right-click it.
3. Click Properties in the menu that appears. The Properties dialog box appears.
4. Click the Font tab.
5. In the Character area, increase or decrease the value in the Ratio field to change the character
ratio.
6. Modify the value in the Spacing field to change the character spacing.
7. Click OK to validate your changes. The text is updated.

Making Text Superscript or Subscript

In this task, you will learn how to make a text superscript, how to make a text subscript, and how to
specify their position.
Create a free text.
2. Type a text, "subscript" for example, after the text you created previously.
3. Select the piece of text you just typed and right-click it.
5. Click the Font tab.
6. In the Attributes area, select the Subscript check box.

7. Click OK to validate your changes. The selected text is made subscript.
8. Now type another text, "superscript" for example, after the existing text. For the moment, the new
text takes on the properties of the subscript text in front of it.
9. Select the piece of text you just typed and right-click it.
10. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
11. In the Attributes area, select the Superscript check box (instead of Subscript) and click OK. The
selected text is made superscript.
12. For the purpose of this exercise, you will now align the subscript and superscript texts and set
their offset and size. To do this, select the whole text and right-click it.
The offset defines the vertical position of the superscript or subscript text from the baseline of the text.
The size defines the height of the superscript or subscript text. Both values are expressed as a percentage
of the font size.
13. Click Properties in the menu that appears.
14. In the Properties dialog box, click the Text tab.
15. In the Options area, select the Back Field check box to align the texts.
16. Increase or decrease the values for the superscript and subscript texts in the Offset and Size
fields to set the offset and size.
17. Click OK to validate. The subscript and superscript texts are now aligned and set as defined.
This functionality does not always work when the text is wrapped.
Editing Text Properties

This task explains how to access and modify text color, position and/or orientation. You will also learn how
to specify the text display mode.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create an annotation such as a free text, for
example.
1. Select the annotation you just created. (For the purpose of this exercise, you select a free text,
but you could also select any other type of annotation.)
You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual
menu.
3. Click the Text tab. The associated panel is displayed.

● Frame: you can choose a frame type for the selected text that is to say rectangle, triangle, circle, etc.
You can specify the color, line thickness and line type for the frame in the associated fields.
● Position:
❍ Anchor Point: you can change the text position in relation to the anchor point.
❍ Justification: you can specify a justification for the text: left, center or right.
❍ X, Y: you can modify anchor point coordinates.
❍ Anchor Mode: it allows you to position the anchor line to the character Top and Bottom or to the
character Cap or Base.
● Line Spacing Mode: you can choose the spacing mode between to line of characters. As an example,
create the following free text:
Now, select base to cap option in the combo box. The spacing between the two lines will be between the
base of first line characters and cap of second line characters:
● Line spacing: you can increase or decrease the spacing between two lines of characters.
● Word wrap: allows you to wrap the text in a width you specify.
When you create a free text, the anchor point is the point you click in the free space to define a location
for the free text.
● Orientation: specify a text orientation.

❍ Reference: choose Sheet to use the sheet as the reference for the text orientation, or View / 2D
Component to use the view or 2D component as the reference for the text orientation.
❍ Orientation: the text is oriented according to the chosen reference; choose Horizontal to
position it horizontally, Vertical to position it vertically or Fixed Angle to position it using a fixed
angle.
❍ Angle: if you choose Fixed Angle for Orientation, you can define the orientation angle according
to the chosen reference.
❍ Mirroring: specify whether you want to mirror the selected text, and what kind of mirroring, or if
the text should flip automatically in such a way that it will always be in a readable position.
● Options:
❍ Display Units: in a text containing parameters with units, displays these units.
❍ Apply scale: applies the scale of the view or of the 2D reference component to the display of the
text or to the value of a dimension.
If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Apply Scale
property and the Create with a constant size setting (in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting -> Annotation and Dress-up tab): the size of both the 2D component and
its text will then be independent from the view scale.
❍ Back Field: aligns superscript and subscript texts above one another.
❍ Blank Background: specifies that the text background should be blanked when the text is
displayed over a pattern or over a picture.
❍ Superscript: increase or decrease the values for the superscript texts.
The Offset parameter specifies the distance of the superscript text from the base line according to
the font size of the text.
The Size parameter specifies the size of the superscript text according to the font size of the text.
❍ Subscript: increase or decrease the values for the subscript texts.
The Offset parameter specifies the distance of the subscript text from the base line according to
the font size of the text.
The Size parameter specifies the size of the subscript text according to the font size of the text.
❍ Display: specifies a display mode for the text: Show Value, Show Box or Hide Value. Refer to
Specifying the Text Display Mode below for more details.

Specifying the Text Display Mode

In this task, you will learn how to specify the display mode for the text. For the purpose of this exercise,
you will use a text with a leader and a frame, but this feature is also available with text only, as well as
with dimension texts.
Create a text with a leader and a frame.
1. Select the text and right-click it.
3. Click the Text tab.
4. In the Options area, choose the display mode you want for your text from the Display list.
You have the following options:
● Show Value: displays the text, and (when applicable) its leader and its frame. This option is selected
by default.
● Show Box: replaces the text and (when applicable) its frame by a rectangular box and displays its
leader.
● Hide Value: hides the text and (when applicable) its frame but (when applicable) displays its leader.
5. Click OK to validate. The text is now displayed using the mode you set.
If you select Hide Value as the display mode for a text with no leader, the text will not be visible at all on
your drawing. You can find all hidden texts in a drawing using advanced Search options. To do this,
choose Edit -> Search, click the Advanced tab. Select Drafting from the Workbench list, Text from
the Type list, Display from the Attributes list. In the dialog box that appears, select = and Hide Value
and then click OK. Click the Search icon. All hidden texts are listed.
In the case of dimensions, the display modes are as shown below:

● Show Value: displays the dimension and its leader. This option is selected by default.
● Show Box: replaces the dimension by a rectangular box and displays its leader.
● Hide Value: hides the dimension but displays its leader.

Editing Picture Properties

This task explains how to access and edit raster or vector picture properties.
● Define a new sheet.

● Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save
Target As in the contextual menu).
1. Select the Insert -> Picture command.
A dialog box appears, allowing you to browse your disk.
2. Select the file "logo.tif" you have previously imported. The image is imported in your drawing.
3. Right-click on the picture and select Properties in the contextual menu.
The Picture tab of the Properties dialog box is displayed.

You can modify the properties of the picture and click on Apply to preview the changes.
Position
● Horizontal: defines the horizontal positioning on the sheet, taking the bottom left corner of the image
into account.
● Vertical: defines the vertical positioning on the sheet, taking the bottom left corner of the image into
account.
Size
● Width: defines the width in millimeters of the picture.

● Height: defines the height in millimeters of the picture.
When you modify the size, the scale is automatically modified at the same time.
Scale
● Width: defines the width in percentage of the picture.

● Height: defines the height in percentage of the picture.
● Lock aspect ratio: enables to keep the ratio between width and height. If it is not checked, the
picture might look distorted when modifying only one feature.
Original Size
● Width: defines the original width of the picture in millimeters.

● Height: defines the original height of the picture in millimeters.
● Reset: resets the original size of the picture if one feature was modified.
Crop from
● Top: defines the top part of the picture to be hidden.

● Bottom: defines the bottom part of the picture to be hidden.
● Left: defines the left part of the picture to be hidden.
● Right: defines the right part of the picture to be hidden.
Compression
You can compress a picture to a given format, available in the combo box.
● None: the picture keeps its original size.

● PNG: the picture is compressed without loss.
The PNG format is used by default when inserting a picture whatever its original format.
● JPEG: the picture is compressed in JPEG format, that is with loss.
● Picture compression properties: you are given the compression rate in percentage and the size of the
picture in bytes according to the chosen format once it is saved on your hard drive. The compression
rate and picture size vary according to your picture.
In our example, the compression properties for the logo picture are as follows:
Format/Properties Compression rate Picture size
None 100.00% 14.44 KB (14783 bytes)
PNG 15.33% 2.21 KB (2262 bytes)
JPEG 15.09% 2.18 KB (2228 bytes)
In case you insert a monochrome picture, it is automatically set to the CCITTG3 format, which is a unique
format without loss.
Should you need to edit the picture, refer to the Editing Raster Images section.
Editing Dimension Text Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension text properties.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a diameter dimension, for example.
1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select Edit -> Properties and click the Dimension Texts tab.
You can also right click the current element and then select the Properties command from the
displayed contextual menu.
3. If needed, modify the available options.
● Prefix - Suffix: you can insert either a symbol or a text before the dimension text or a text after the
dimension text.
You cannot insert a prefix and a suffix.
If you want to remove the symbol before the dimension text, click the Insert Symbol icon and, from
the list of symbols that appears, select this symbol:
● Associated Texts: you can insert texts before, after, below and above the main and the dual value.
Dimension texts positioning:
● Dimension score options: you can choose to score only the value, all dimension texts or not to score
(for Main Value and/or Dual Value).
● Dimension frame options: you can choose to include in the frame Value+tolerance+texts or
Value+tolerance or Value for Main Value, Dual Value or both.

Editing Dimension Font Properties

This task explains how to access and edit dimension font properties.
Open the Brackets_views03.CATDrawing document. Create a dimension (of whatever type).
1. Select the dimension.
You can also right-click the dimension and then select Properties from the displayed
contextual menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Font tab. The associated panel is displayed.
● Font: choose the font.

● Style: choose the font style.
● Size: choose the font size.
● Underline: underline the dimension text.
● Color: choose the font color.
● Strikethrough: draw a line through the dimension text.
● Overline: draw a line above the dimension text.
You can either underline or overline a text, but you cannot do both.
● Ratio: modify the character width.

● Spacing: change the spacing between characters.
4. Modify the available properties as required.
For more information on font properties, refer to the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Editing Dimension Value Properties

This task explains how to access and edit dimension value properties.
1. Select a dimension (whatever the type) on the CATDrawing you opened.
2. Select Edit -> Properties and click the Value tab.
contextual menu.

Dimension Type: check Driving if you want projected dimensions to drive geometry.
If you want to key in a value for the driving dimension, you must close Properties dialog box, double-
click the dimension in the drawing, check Drive geometry and key in a value.
Value Orientation: you can choose:

● the value orientation reference (Screen, View or Dimension Line),
● the value orientation (Parallel, Perpendicular or Fixed Angle),
● the orientation angle if Fixed Angle is selected in orientation,
● the value position (Auto, Inside or Outside),
● the value offset in relation to the dimension line.
Dual Value: you can show dual value by checking Show dual value and choosing its location: Below,
Fractional or Side-by-Side.
Format: you can set Main value and Dual value format.
● Description: select a type of format.

● Display: choose to display one, two or three factors.
● Format: choose fractional or decimal format.
● Precision: select the value precision.
For chamfers, you can set Description, Display and Format in the chamfer tab.
Fake Dimension: check this option to display fake dimensions, you can choose to display numerical or
alphanumerical fake dimensions.
Texts for numerical fake dimensions are restricted to six characters.
If you need to insert a text containing more than six characters, simply use the alphanumerical fake
dimension.

Editing Dimension Tolerance Properties

This task explains how to access and edit dimension tolerance properties.
There are different types of tolerances:
● Numerical tolerances
● Alphanumerical tolerances
● Combined tolerances (an alphanumerical value

and two numerical values): ISOCOMB tolerance.
1. Select the diameter dimension.
2. Select Edit-> Properties and click the Tolerance tab.
contextual menu.
3. You can associate a tolerance to the selected dimension. In this example, choose ISOALPH1 in the
Main Value field.
The First value field is enabled and displays an alphanumerical value. The corresponding
numerical equivalents are displayed in the Upper value and Lower value fields. (These
equivalents are defined by standards.)
4. Assign the desired tolerance to this dimension by selecting another alphanumerical value. In this
example, select H9 in the First value field. The corresponding numerical equivalents are
automatically displayed.
5. In some cases, you may wish to display another tolerance. In this case, select a tolerance type in
the Dual Value field.
● If you choose the same tolerance type for main and for dual value, then the values for this tolerance
will also be the same.
● For a full description of the tolerance type selected in the Main Value and Dual Value fields, click the
information (i) icon in front of each field.
● For dimensions with alphanumerical tolerances, you can display the corresponding numerical
equivalents in the drawing, simply by selecting the dimension and placing the cursor over the
tolerance in the drawing. The numerical equivalents are displayed in a tooltip.
● For dimensions with tolerance js and JS, there is no correspondence between the numerical and alpha
numerical value. The numerical value displayed is +-0 or the previous numerical value applied to the
dimension.
Editing Dimension Extension Line Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension extension line properties.
1. Select the dimension you created (whatever the type).
You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Extension Line tab.
● Color: choose a color for the extension line.

● Thickness: specify the thickness for the extension line.
● Display first extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the first extension line, when applicable.
● Display second extension line: check to display or uncheck to hide the second extension line, when
applicable.
● Slant: set the slant angle for the extension line. This angle is set between 90 degrees and -90 degrees
excluded, the default angle being 0 degree.
This functionality works only on linear dimension line and the line linking extension line anchor points (blanking
excluded) has to be parallel to the dimension line, as shown
below.
● Extremities: it allows you to increase or decrease extension line Overrun and Blanking.
Overrun is the overrun minimum value. As an example, for a cumulated dimension (for ISO Standard):
You cannot decrease it below the

You can increase the overrun size
minimum value
To set extension line length and text position for cumulated dimensions, use the CUMLExtMode dimension
parameter in the standards.
● Funnel: to insert a funnel, you must check this option. You can configure the funnel:
❍ the Height,
❍ the Angle,
❍ the Width,
❍ the funnel mode: external or internal
External Funnel Mode Internal Funnel Mode
● the Funnel side allows you to apply a funnel only on one extension line (Left or Bottom, Right or Top)
or both of them (Both Sides).
You cannot create interruptions on funneled dimension lines.

Editing Dimension Line Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit dimension line properties.
Open the Brackets_views02.CATDrawing document. Create a dimension.
1. Select the dimension you just created (whatever the type).
You can also right-click on this dimension and then choose Properties from the contextual
menu.
3. In the Properties dialog box that appears, click the Dimension Line tab. The associated panel is
displayed. Not all fields are active: their activation depends on your choice of options.
Representation
Specify how you want the dimension line represented: Regular, Two Parts, Leader one Part, Leader
two Parts.
Color
Choose a color for the dimension line.
Thickness
Specify the thickness for the dimension line.
Second part
If you chose Two parts or Leader two Parts for the representation, you need to provide information about
the second leader part:
● the Reference for positioning the second part of the dimension line,
● the Orientation for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference,
● the Angle for the secondary part of the dimension line in relation to its reference (if you selected
Dimension Line in the Orientation field and Fixed Angle in the Reference field).
Extension
Choose an extension type for your dimension line.
Leader Angle
Specify the angle you want for the extension line.
Symbols
Choose the properties you want to apply to Symbol 1, Symbol 2 (you may need to check this box to
specify you want to the dimension to display two symbols), and Leader Symbol (if you chose to
represent the dimension line with a leader).
● Shape: you can choose the dimension line shape (open arrow, outlined circle, plus, etc.).
● Color: you can choose the symbols color.
● Thickness: you can define the symbol thickness.
● Reversal: you can set the position of the symbols (inside or outside) in relation to the extension
line.
In the case of two-symbols dimensions, you can specify a different position for each symbol
(i.e. symbol 1 inside and symbol 2 outside, or vice-versa).
You can also do this interactively using the Ctrl key.
You can apply different kinds of modifications between arrow symbol 1 and symbol 2 on the condition the
drawing was created from version 5 release 5 on.
Foreshortened
For radius dimensions, you can activate the Foreshortened option.
It allows you to transform a radius dimension line into a foreshortened radius dimension line. You can
then choose from the following options:
● Text position: specify whether the text should be positioned on the long segment or on the short
segment of the dimension.
● Orientation: define the orientation of the text associated to the dimension line (parallel or
convergent).
● Angle: specify the angle value.
● Ratio: specify the ratio for the short segment and the long segment of the foreshortened dimension.
● Point scale: specify the point scale value.
● Unfix extremity position: check this box to unfix the extremity point of the foreshortened
dimension line. You will then be able to move the extremity point using a yellow manipulator.
For foreshortened radius dimensions, you can define the appearance of the extremity point by making
sure the Symbol 2 box in the Symbols area is checked, and then choosing the appropriate options.
Clicking the More button displays extra options, if any are available.

For example, from the Representation drop-down list, choose Leader two Parts.
5. In the Leader Angle field, specify the angle you want between the two parts of the leader.
This angle is applied to the first segment:
You can also drive the second segment from the options in the Second Part area: it can be
horizontal, vertical, parallel, perpendicular, fixed angle with screen, view, or dimension
horizontal and vertical.
6. Change the Leader symbol in Symbols-> Shape.
Choose Double Filled Arrow, for example.

7. Transform this two parts leader into a one part leader: from the Representation drop-down list,
choose Leader one Part.

Editing Dimension System Properties

This task explains how to access and edit dimension system properties.
Note that chained dimension systems do not have specific properties.
1. Right-click on any stacked or cumulated dimension system you created, and select Properties.
You can also select a stacked or cumulated dimension system and select Edit -> Properties.
2. Click on the System tab.
Dimension lines alignment
Offset mode
Select an offset mode. Note that the options available depend on the selected dimensions system type.
❍ Constant: the offset between dimensions of a system remains constant and equal to the value defined in the Offset
between dimensions field. Available for stacked dimension systems.
The offset between dimensions remains constant to the scale of the view as well. Consequently, if you modify the scale
of a view and perform an alignment on the dimension system, the offset between dimensions is also modified so as to
remain constant to the view's scale.
❍ Free: the dimensions of a system can be moved independently. Available for stacked dimension systems and cumulated
dimension systems.
Offset between dimensions
Enter the value of the offset between dimensions.
Dimension values alignment
Chained dimension systems can only be centered.
Align cumulated dimension values
Select an option to specify how dimension values should be aligned for cumulated dimensions systems.
❍ Reference line
❍ Center
❍ Opposite
❍ From standard
In the image below, d is the Values Offset properties:
Align stacked dimension values
Select an option to specify how dimension values should be aligned for stacked dimensions systems.
❍ Reference line
❍ Center
❍ Opposite
In the image below, d is the Values Offset properties:

Values Offset
Specify the distance between the alignment reference and the dimension value.
In the standards, the Cumulate Dimension: Value Orientation Reference parameter lets you specify whether cumulated
dimensions are set with their value oriented along extension lines or dimension lines.
The cumulated dimension behavior then differs depending on what you chose as the value orientation reference:
❍ extension lines: the Cumulate Dimensions: Parameters applying only if the value orientation reference is Extension
Line standard parameters are used. Only some dimension system styles are used.
❍ dimension lines: some Cumulate Dimensions: Parameters applying only if value orientation reference is Dimension
Line standard parameters are used. However, the value horizontal positioning is not defined in the standards (the
corresponding parameters are deprecated), but by the following dimension system styles: Aligned cumulated
dimension values and Values Offset.
Automatically add a funnel
Select this check box if you want funnels to be automatically added to cumulated or stacked systems whenever a dimension
value line-up is performed.
If you do not select this check box, you can add funnels manually via Edit -> Properties or when creating the dimension
system.

Editing 2D Component Instance Properties

This task explains how to access and, if needed, edit information on instantiated 2D component
properties.
Open the Position_Component03.CATDrawing document.
1. Right-click on the 2D component instance to access the contextual menu.
2. Select Properties and click the 2D Component Instance tab. You can modify the 2D
component instance position and orientation:
You can also select the instance, go to Edit -> Properties and click the 2D Component Instance tab.
● Location:
It allows you to access the instance location and the origin of the 2D component it was instantiated
from.
● Position and orientation:
you can modify detail instantiated 2D component coordinates, angle with horizontal reference axis
and scale.

Editing Callout Properties

This task will show you how to modify the graphical attributes of one (or more) callout used when
generating auxiliary, section or detail views.
Callouts represent an operation that has been performed on a generative view (such as a section cut
for example) and consequently do not behave as geometry. As a result, you cannot isolate callouts, nor
can you apply transformation or symmetry operations to callouts.
1. Multi-select the callout to be modified.

In this example, we select both a section view callout and a detail callout.
2. Right-click these callout and select the Properties option from the contextual menu.
3. Select the Callout tab.

The preview displays both selected callouts with attributes corresponding to the generated views.
The options you select in the Graphic Properties toolbar also influence the graphical attributes you
apply to the selected callout (line color, line type, line weight, Copy Object Format icon, Pattern
Chooser option).
In this dialog box, you can set the following parameters:

● Auxiliary/Section Views:
❍ Switches for pre-defined types:
continuous lines, mixed lines, elbows and extremities only or one arrow only.
❍ Line thickness
❍ Line type
❍ Extremity thickness
❍ Length
❍ Anchor point (head or tail)
● Detail Views:
❍ Thickness
❍ Type
● Arrows on Auxiliary/Section Views and Detail Views:

❍ Arrow length
❍ Head type
❍ Head length
❍ Head angle
You can specify that the size of callout elements should not be dependent on the view scale. For this:
● After callout creation, check Size not dependent on view scale in the previous dialog box.
or
● Before callout creation, in Tools -> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Layout tab,
check the Size not dependent on view scale option. This option will apply to newly created
callouts, i.e. selecting this option will not have any impact on existing callouts.
Note that this option only applies to drawings created with versions prior to V5 R11 (i.e. versions
up to V5 R10).
4. Modify the callout graphical attributes as shown above.
5. Click OK.
Images
The Drafting workbench lets you add images to Drafting sheets as well as edit them.
Insert images: Insert raster or vector images in a drawing.

Edit images: Edit raster images using the raster editor, or view information about vector images.
Inserting Images (Raster or Vector)

This functionality allows you to insert images on every operating system. It is useful for V4 Drawings translation.
In this task, we will see how to insert raster images (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.), vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) or
SVG images (Scalable Vector Graphics) as native V5 Drafting elements. The scenario below provides an example using
a raster image, but the procedure is the same for vector images.
● Define a new sheet and a view.
● Insert a frame and title block (choose the Drawing_Titleblock_Samples1).
● Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save Target As in the
contextual menu).
1. Select Insert -> Picture.
A dialog box appears, allowing you to browse your disk.
2. Select the file "logo.tif" you have previously imported. The image is imported in your drawing.
3. Click on the image to select it. Scaling manipulators appear. Drag one of the manipulators to decrease the
picture size.
You get this:
The image is a native V5 Drafting element, it is positioned by default at the origin of the view.
The anchor point of the picture corresponds to its lower left-hand corner.
❍ In the Properties dialog box available from the image's contextual menu, on the Picture tab, check
the Lock aspect ratio option to make sure images will keep their ratio aspect.
❍ If the previous option is unchecked, use the Ctrl key to keep the picture ratio aspect.
❍ Use the Shift key to snap to the grid.
4. Drag the image to the required position.

Editing Raster Images
In this task, you will learn how to edit raster images (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.tif, etc.) inserted in a drawing.
Save the logo.tif document on your computer (to do this, right-click on "logo.tif" and choose Save Target As in the contextual menu) and insert it in
your drawing.
1. Double-click on the raster image. The Image Editor dialog box is displayed.
2. Edit the image as wanted. For more information on how to edit images, refer to Editing Images in the Album in the Infrastructure User's
Guide.
3. When you are done, click OK. The image is updated in the drawing.
Viewing information about vector images
You cannot edit vector images (*.cgm. *.gl, *.gl2) inserted in a drawing, but you can, however, view information about them. To do this, simply
double-click on a vector image in a drawing. This will display the Image information dialog box. To exit the dialog box when you are done reviewing
the image-related information, click OK.
Print
The Drafting workbench provides a simple method to print one or more sheets inserted in your document.
See the Printing Documents chapter in the Infrastructure User's Guide for detailed information about printing.
Print a sheet: Print a given sheet.

Print using a clipping operator: Print using a clipping operator with scaling support. Lets you print only a part of
a drawing.
Printing a Sheet
This task will show you how to print a given sheet. You may also print several sheets if a drawing contains several of them.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.
1. Select File -> Print from the menu bar.
The Print dialog box is displayed.
2. Choose your print options as required:
❍ The Printers area lets you choose the printer you want to use or specify whether you want to print to a file.
❍ The Layout tab lets you define the sheet orientation, position and size.
❍ The MultiDocuments tab lets you specify additional choices if the current document contains several sheets.
❍ The Print Area area lets you define whether you want to print:
■ the entire sheet: Whole Document
■ the sheet as seen on screen: Display
■ the area selected using the button: Selection. Refer to Printing using a Clipping Operator for more information.
■ the print area previously defined for the sheet: Document area. This print area is defined (and activated) in the sheet
properties. Refer to Editing Sheet Properties for more information.
■ Note that the Document area option appears only if you activated the print area in the sheet properties prior to accessing the
Print dialog box.
■ The Copies field lets you specify the number of copies to print.
■ The Tiling option lets you tile the sheet and print it on several pages.
■ The Page Setup... button lets you define the page setup.
■ The Options... button lets you define additional options.
■ The Preview... button lets you preview the document to be printed.
For detailed information, refer to the the Printing Documents chapter in the Infrastructure User's Guide. The Customizing Print
Settings Before Printing Your Documents and Printing Multi-Documents tasks should prove particularly helpful.
3. Click OK to print the sheet and close the Print dialog box.
● When printing a sheet, the current filter and layers (those used for screen display) are taken into account. For more details on layers and
filters, see the Using Layers and Layer Filters chapter in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
● Elements such as constraints, construction elements and view frames are not printed.
Printing using a Clipping Operator

This task will show you how to print using a clipping operator with scaling support.
Open the Product_Balloon.CATDrawing document.
1. Select File -> Print.
2. Choose your print options as required.
3. In the Print dialog box, choose Selection in Print Area.
This activates the selection mode button and allows you to select the area to print.
4. Click the selection mode button and drag the cursor on the drawing to define the print area.
5. Click OK to print this area.

Interoperability
The Generative Drafting workbench provides a simple method to create and modify views from a .model.
Create and modify views from a .model: Use a master model exact solid to create and modify views from a
.model.
Creating and Modifying Views from a .Model

This task will show you how to create and modify views from a .model document on the condition this model
contains Exact Solids, Skins or Faces in the master workspace.
Open pm6-7b-1e_gun_body_draw.model. This model contains an Exact Solid in the master workspace.
Tile the windows vertically to see your drawing sheet and your model at the same time.
1. Create a front view from the .model document.
2. Create projection views.
The views are generated.
● The only modifications you can perform on views generated from .model documents are dress-up
modifications.
● In certain cases, dress-up modifications applied to .model documents are not associative.
● When creating views from .model documents, you can only select a V4 Face element (*FAC) if it lies on a V4
plane. You cannot select a V4 Face element which lies on a V4 surface (even if this surface is planar).
Elements from .model documents are handled differently depending on their type and on the type of view you
are generating:
● In section cuts and section views: Exact Solid, Dittos, Face and Skin elements from .model documents are
supported in exact mode.
● In breakout views: Exact Solid and Dittos elements from .model documents are supported in exact mode.
● In projection views, quick detail views, clipping views and broken views: Exact Solid, Dittos, Face and Skin
elements from .model documents are supported in exact mode. All elements from .model documents are
supported in CGR, approximate and raster mode.
Dimensions and annotations applied to Dittos elements from .model documents are
● associative in projection views
● non-associative in section, detail and breakout views.

The Generative Drafting workbench lets you export and import different types of files.
Note that these tasks, which deal with data exchange, are actually documented in the Data Exchange Interfaces
User's Guide.
DXF/DWG: Import: Import or insert the 2D geometric data contained in a DXF or DWG file into a CATDrawing
document.
DXF/DWG: Export: Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a DXF file.
DXF/DWG: Report File: Learn more about the report file.
DXF/DWG: Trouble Shooting: Learn how to troubleshoot DXF/DWG import and export.
DXF/DWG: Best Practices: Learn best practices for DXF/DWG import and export.
DXF/DWG: FAQ: Get answers to Frequently Asked Questions about DXF/DWG import and export.
DXF/DWG: VBScript Macros: Learn about DXF/DWG import and export macros.
CGM: Insertion: Insert a CGM file into a CATDrawing document.
CGM: Export: Export the data contained in a CATDrawing document into a CGM file.
Drafting Interoperability
In this section, you will find information on working with Drafting and the PDM systems listed below.


This task shows you how to manage the integration between CATIA V5 Drafting and ENOVIA LCA. You will learn how to:
● create a CATDrawing document and save it in ENOVIA LCA
● retrieve the CATDrawing document in ENOVIA LCA
● view the documents which impact the CATDrawing in ENOVIA LCA
● open the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5
This task uses an assembly drawing (i.e. a drawing with views generated from a CATProduct document) as an example, but
the same possibilities apply to part drawings as well.
For more information about interoperability between CATIA and ENOVIA LCA, refer to the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability
User's Guide. For more information on using ENOVIA LCA, refer to ENOVIA V5 LifeCycle Applications documentation.
Have a CATIA V5 and an ENOVIA LCA sessions running.
Creating a CATDrawing document and saving it in ENOVIA LCA

1. In ENOVIA LCA Product Class View, select a product and send it to CATIA V5.
For more information, refer to Sending an ENOVIA LCA Document to CATIA V5 in the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability
User's Guide.
2. In CATIA V5, select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. The New Drawing Creation dialog box is displayed.
3. Select the views to be automatically created on your drawing, for example the Front, Top and Left icon.
4. Click OK. A progress bar appears while the views are being generated from the opened CATProduct.
The views are then displayed in the CATDrawing document.

5. Click the Save Data in ENOVIA LCA Server... icon to save the drawing in ENOVIA LCA. The Save in ENOVIA
LCA dialog box is displayed.
For more information, refer to Saving an ENOVIA LCA Document from CATIA V5 in the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability
User's Guide.
6. Click OK to validate. The drawing is vaulted in ENOVIA, as well as the parts and products from which the views were
generated. Note that the drawing is saved as a document in ENOVIA, it is not attached to a part at this moment.
Retrieving the CATDrawing document in ENOVIA LCA
1. In ENOVIA LCA, click the Search icon in the left-hand pane to perform a query in order to retrieve your
CATDrawing document.
2. Select Content Management -> Documents -> Documents. The Search panel is displayed.
3. In the Search panel, enter the name of your CATDrawing document and click OK. The search results are displayed in
the bottom pane.
4. Right-click the CATDrawing document and select Copy from the contextual menu.
5. In ENOVIA LCA Product Editor, paste the document under the PRC.
Viewing the documents which impact the CATDrawing in ENOVIA LCA

The Impact Graph is updated only if the CATDrawings have been saved in CATIA V5.
1. In ENOVIA LCA Content Management, right-click the CATDrawing document (it can be either a part drawing or an
assembly drawing) and select Send To -> Impacted By. The Impacted By Tree View is displayed.
2. Double-click the CATDrawing document (here P2) to expand the whole view of the product.
The drawing dependencies are displayed, letting you view the links between the CATDrawing document
and the CATPart and/or CATProduct documents it references. This also lets you know whether the drawing
is up-to-date or not.
In the examples below, P2 identifies the drawing, and the ENOVIA_VPMTPDependence object identifies
the drawing dependence(s).
Example 1
The color of the ENOVIA_VPMTPDependence object relates to the status of its dependences (here P1 and
Property of P1): ENOVIA_VPMTDependence is green, which means that it is synchronized with its
dependences.
The thumb relates to the status of the branch: here the thumbs are up and green, which means that P1
and Property of P1 are synchronized with the ENOVIA_VPMTPDependence object.
Since all elements are synchronized, the drawing is up-to-date.
Example 2
You can see that ENOVIA_VPMTDependence is red, which means that it is not synchronized with its
dependences.
Here, the red thumb down for P1 shows that it has been modified: it is not synchronized with the
ENOVIA_VPMTDependence object. Therefore, ENOVIA_VPMTDependence is not synchronized with P1
either: it is red.
Since not all elements are synchronized, the drawing is not up-to-date.
3. If the drawing is not up-to-date, you can update it using the following method:
a. Open the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5 (as described in Opening the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5
below).
b. Refresh it using the update icon.
c. Save it using the Save Data in ENOVIA LCA Server... icon.
d. Perform a local refresh in ENOVIA LCA using the Refresh icon.
If you now go back to the Impacted By Tree View in ENOVIA LCA, the drawing is indicated as being up-to-date.
For more information, refer to Publishing Links in ENOVIA LCA in the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability User's Guide.
Opening the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5

To be able to open only the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5, you need to send it from ENOVIA Content Management for
example.
To illustrate this task, you should use an assembly drawing (rather than a part drawing).
1. In ENOVIA LCA Product Editor, right-click the CATDrawing document and select Send To -> Content Management.
2. In Content Management, right-click the CATDrawing document and select Send To -> CATIA V5. The drawing is
displayed in CATIA V5. In the case of an assembly drawing, the drawing links are broken.
3. To solve the links, perform as follows, depending on the save mode you chose when saving the assembly in ENOVIA
LCA:
● For an exploded assembly (i.e. saved as Document not kept & Product Structure Exposed): right-click
the drawing in the specification tree and select Load PDM Context (you can also go back to ENOVIA
LCA, right-click the associated CATProduct and CATPart documents in Content Management, and
select Send To -> CATIA V5). This loads the assembly drawing context (i.e. the CATProduct and
CATPart documents used for the assembly drawing creation or for the last assembly drawing update)
in the Product Structure editor in CATIA V5. Note that the part instances which were not referenced by
the drawing when you last saved it are not loaded.
● For a "black box" or "work package" assembly (i.e. saved as Document kept in vault & Publications
Exposed): select Edit -> Links... and choose the Pointed documents tab to visualize the links
between the CATProduct and CATDrawing documents. From the list of pointed documents, select the
CATProduct and/or CATPart documents you want to open, and click the Open button. This loads the
selected documents in the Product Structure editor in CATIA V5.

The LoadPDM command will not load the technological package referenced by the drawing. The referenced technological
packages can be listed via the Edit Links command, and have to be opened from LCA sessions.
A drawing references technological packages if it contains views created by selecting FT&A views stored in a technological
package (View from 3D command).
Note that you need to load all the parts which make up a given product if you want them to be included in the drawing views
at the next update.
The drawing links are now solved. The Drafting specification tree indicates whether the drawing is up-to-date or not,
whether the drawing is a part drawing or an assembly drawing.
If the New Evolution and Replace Reference commands have been performed on a part or sub-assembly, the
drawing links will not be solved by default on the new evolution of the part. However, you can force the solving of
the links on this new evolution by going to Edit -> Links -> Replace and selecting the root product (PRC).
If a 3D element (product or part) has been modified before launching the drawing, the
update mask appears in front of the drawing elements which need an update (all, in our
example):
If no modification has been performed in 3D before launching the drawing, the various
drawing elements in the specification tree are shown as being up-to-date:

When working with Drafting in an ENOVIA LCA context, there are a few circumstances under which a
drawing cannot be correctly saved in ENOVIA LCA.
More specifically, a drawing from an exploded product (i.e. an assembly saved as Document not kept &
Product Structure Exposed) cannot be saved in the following cases:
● when the drawing contains views referencing different instances of the exploded product: indeed, all
generated views in the drawing must reference the same 3D elements.
● when the drawing contains views referencing the following DMU components: 3D box or section.
● when the drawing contains text files referencing knowledgeware attributes.
An error message is now displayed when trying to create views referencing such elements.
Note that this message is only displayed if the product from which you are trying to create the view has
already been saved in the ENOVIA LCA database.


This task shows you how to manage the integration between CATIA V5 Drafting and ENOVIA VPM. You will learn how
to:
● create a CATDrawing document and save it in ENOVIA VPM
● view the documents which impact the CATDrawing in ENOVIA VPM
● open the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5
For more information about interoperability between CATIA and ENOVIA VPM, refer to the ENOVIA-CATIA
Interoperability User's Guide. For more information on using ENOVIA VPM, refer to ENOVIA VPM documentation.
Have a CATIA V5 and an ENOVIA 3d com Navigator sessions running.
Creating a CATDrawing document and saving it in ENOVIA VPM

1. From the ENOVIA 3d com Navigator, right-click a CATPart or a CATProduct document and select CATIA_V5 -
> Load to load this document into CATIA V5.
For more information, refer to the CATIA V5 / ENOVIA VPM Interoperability via ENOVIA 3d com on Windows
chapter in the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability User's Guide.
Note that to create a subassembly drawing, the ENOVIA VPM subassembly has to be loaded into CATIA V5 from its
own bookmark in the ENOVIA 3d com Navigator web tree.
2. In CATIA V5, select Start -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting. The New Drawing Creation dialog box is
displayed.
3. Select the views to be automatically created on your drawing, for example the Front, Top and Left icon.
4. Click OK. A progress bar appears while the views are being generated from the opened CATPart or
CATProduct document.
The views are then displayed in the CATDrawing document.
5. Create an ENOVIA VPM document with the CATDrawing document, as explained in Creating an ENOVIA VPM
Document in CATIA V5 in the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability User's Guide.

Viewing the documents which impact the CATDrawing in ENOVIA

VPM
1. From the ENOVIA 3d com Navigator, right-click the CATDrawing document (it can be either a part drawing
or an assembly drawing) and select Impact As Reference. An impact graph for the drawing is launched in
the ENOVIA 3d com Navigator webspace.
2. Double-click the drawing box (here 2BB-DWG --- AC) to visualize reference-to-reference links for the
CATDrawing document.
The drawing dependencies are displayed, letting you view the links between the CATDrawing
document and the CATPart and/or CATProduct documents it references.
The impact graph also lets you know whether the drawing is up-to-date or not:
● a green thumb up means that the drawing is synchronized with the documents it
references, and therefore up-to-date.
For example, in the case of an up-to-date part drawing, you may get something like the
following impact graph:

● a red thumb down means that the drawing is not synchronized with the documents it
references, and therefore not up-to-date.
For example, in the case of a not-up-to-date part drawing, you may get something like the
following impact graph:
3. If the drawing is not up-to-date, you can update it using the following method:
a. Open the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5 (as described in Opening the CATDrawing document in
CATIA V5 below).
b. Refresh it using the update icon.
c. Save it in ENOVIA VPM using File -> Save.
If you now go back to the Impacted By Tree View in ENOVIA LCA, the drawing is indicated as being up-to-
date.
For more information, refer to Using CATIA V5 Multimodel Link Dependencies in the ENOVIA-CATIA Interoperability
User's Guide.
Opening the CATDrawing document in CATIA V5

To illustrate this task, you should use an assembly drawing (rather than a part drawing).
1. From the ENOVIA 3d com Navigator, right-click the CATDrawing document and select CATIA_V5 -> Load to
load this document into CATIA V5. The drawing is displayed in CATIA V5. In the case of an assembly
drawing, the drawing links are broken.
2. To solve the links, perform as follows, depending on the save mode you chose when saving the assembly in
ENOVIA VPM:
● For an exploded assembly: right-click the drawing in the specification tree and select Load
PDM Context (you can also go back to ENOVIA 3d com Navigator, right-click the
associated CATProduct and CATPart documents in Content Management, and select
CATIA_V5 -> Load). This loads the assembly drawing context (i.e. the CATProduct and
CATPart documents used for the assembly drawing creation or for the last assembly drawing
update) in the Product Structure editor in CATIA V5. Note that the drawing has to be placed
in the assembly and that the part instances which were not referenced by the drawing when
you last saved it are not loaded.
● For a "black box" or "work package" assembly: select Edit -> Links... and choose the
Pointed documents tab to visualize the links between the CATProduct and CATDrawing
documents. From the list of pointed documents, select the CATProduct and/or CATPart
documents you want to open, and click the Open button. This loads the selected documents
in the Product Structure editor in CATIA V5.
Note that you need to load all the parts which make up a given product if you want them to be included in the
drawing views at the next update.
The drawing links are now solved. The Drafting specification tree indicates whether the drawing is up-to-
date or not, whether the drawing is a part drawing or an assembly drawing.
If a 3D element (product or part) has been modified before launching the drawing,
the update mask appears in front of the drawing elements which need an update
(all, in our example):
If no modification has been performed in 3D before launching the drawing, the

various drawing elements in the specification tree are shown as being up-to-date:
If you perform a cut and paste on the assembly in the Enovia 3d com Navigator for which a CATDrawing already
exists, you cannot load the document again selecting Load PDM Context.

When working with Drafting in an ENOVIA VPM context, there are a few circumstances under which a
drawing cannot be correctly saved in ENOVIA VPM.
More specifically, a drawing from an exploded product (i.e. an assembly saved as Document not kept &
Product Structure Exposed) cannot be saved in the following cases:
● when the drawing contains views referencing different instances of the exploded product: indeed, all
generated views in the drawing must reference the same 3D elements.
● when the drawing contains views referencing the following DMU components: 3D box, section and
scenes.
● when the drawing contains texts with links to an attribute stored in a technological package.
An error message is now displayed when trying to create views referencing such elements.
Note that this message is only displayed if the product from which you are trying to create the view has
already been saved in the ENOVIA VPM database.
This section contains the list of the icons and menus specific to Generative Drafting workbench.
You may read these pages whenever you require more detailed information on these commands which have been
documented in other parts of the guide.
Menu Bar
Menu Bar
In this chapter we will describe the various menus, submenus and items specific to the Generative Drafting workbench.
File
For... See...
Page Setup... Defining the Drafting Sheet
Print... Printing a Sheet
Printer Setup... Printing a Sheet
Edit
For... See...
Links Editing Drawing Links
Positioning a View Independently of its Reference View

Properties Access and edit information on 2D geometry, dress-up elements, annotations

and dimensions in a single dialog box
Background Creating a Frame Title Block
Insert
For... See...
Views Creating Views
Drawing Creating Sheets
Dimensioning Creating Dimensions
Generation Generating Dimensions
Annotations Annotations
Dress Up Dress-Up Elements

New sheet Define a Drafting Sheet
New Detail Sheet Create a 2D component
New View Create views
Instantiate 2D Component Re-use a 2D component
Dimensions Create dimensions
Chained Dimensions Create chained dimension systems

Cumulated Dimensions Create cumulated dimension systems
Stacked Dimensions Create stacked dimension systems
Length/Distance Dimensions Create explicit dimensions
Angle Dimensions Create explicit dimensions
Radius Dimensions Create explicit dimensions
Diameter Dimensions Create explicit dimensions
Chamfer Dimensions Create chamfer dimensions
Thread Dimension Creating Associative Thread Dimensions
Coordinate Dimensions Create coordinate dimensions
Hole Dimension Table Creating a Hole Dimension Table
Coordinate Dimension Table Creating a Points Coordinates Table
Technological Feature Dimensions Before you Begin

Re-route Dimension Re-routing Dimensions
Create Interruption Interrupt one or more extension lines
Remove Interruption Interrupt one or more extension lines
Datum Feature Create a datum feature
Geometrical Tolerance Create a geometrical tolerance

Generate Dimensions Generate dimensions in one shot
Generate Dimensions Step by Step Generate dimensions semi-automatically
Balloon generation Generating Associative Balloons
Bill of Material Generating a Bill of Material
Text Create a free text
Text with Leader Create a text with a leader
Text Replicate Replicate a text attribute
Balloon Create a balloon

Datum Target Create a datum target
Text Template Placement Annotating Drawings Using Text Templates
Roughness Symbol Create a roughness symbol
Welding Symbol Create a welding symbol
Weld Create a geometry weld
Table Creating/Modifying a Table
Table From CSV Creating/Modifying a Table
Add Leader Adding a Leader to an Existing Annotation

Center Line Create center lines (no reference)
Center Line with Reference Create center lines (reference)
Thread Create threads (no reference)
Thread with Reference Create threads (reference)
Axis Line Create axis lines
Axis line and Center line Create axis lines and center lines
Tools
For... See...
Positioning Further down

Analyze Further down
Multi View (2.5 D) Further down
Dimension generation Further Down
Import a generative view style Before you begin
Reset All Defaults Before You Begin:

Import External Format Exporting and Importing a File
Element Positioning Modifying annotation positioning
Line up dimensions (free space)

Line-up
Line up dimensions (reference)
Align into System Aligning a Dimension System
Dimension Positioning Position dimensions

Show Geometry in All Viewpoints Showing Geometry in Views
Dimensions Analysis Analyzing Interfering Dimensions

Multiple View Projection Creating a Multiple View Projection

View Plane Definition Defining the View Plane
Filters Filtering Dimension Generation

Analysis Analyzing Generated Dimensions

This section describes the various icons of the Generative Drafting workbench. The toolbars are located on
each side of the workbench in the default set-up.
A number of toolbars available in the Generative Drafting workbench are actually part of the Interactive
Drafting workbench. These toolbars are also listed below but they are documented in the Interactive Drafting
User's Guide.
Generative Drafting Toolbar Purpose
Drawing Create sheets, views, 2D components and frame title blocks
Views Create different kinds of views

Specify the generative view style that should be used when creating
views
Dimension Generation Generate dimensions and balloons
Interactive Drafting Toolbar Purpose
Dimensioning Create all types of dimensions needed for your drawing
Annotations Add annotations to existing views by creating them
Dress-Up Add dress-up elements on the drawing
Tools Activate display and positioning tools
Tools Palette Use specific options or value fields available for a given command
Geometry Creation Create geometry

Transform existing 2D elements and add constraints to elements on
Geometry Modification
the drawing
Properties
Text Properties Modify the text properties
Graphic Properties Modify the graphic properties of all kind of features
Dimension Properties Modify the dimensions properties
Style Set the style that will be used to create a new object
Drawing
See Manipulating the Drafting Sheet
See Creating a 2D Component
See Re-using a 2D component
See Creating a 2D Component
See Add a generative Bill of Material

Views
See Creating a Front View
See Creating an Advanced Front View
See Creating an Unfolded View
See Creating Projection Views
See Creating an Auxiliary View
See Creating an Offset Section View/Offset Section Cut
See Creating an Offset Section View/Offset Section Cut
See Creating an Aligned Section View/Aligned Section Cut
See Creating an Aligned Section View/Aligned Section Cut
See Creating a Quick Detail View/Quick Detail View Profile

See Creating a Detail View/Detail View Profile
See Creating a Detail View/Detail View Profile
See Creating a Clipping View
See Creating a Clipping View
See Creating an Isometric View
See Creating a Broken View
See Creating a Breakout View
See Creating Views via the Wizard
See Creating Views via the Wizard

See Creating a View using Generative View Styles

See Dimensions Generation in One Shot
See Semi-automatic Dimension Generation
See Generating Balloons


This section describes the various icons of the Interactive Drafting and Generative Drafting
workbenches.
Current drawing
Design sheet
Detail sheet
2D component
View. Applies to interactive views only (whatever the view type is).
Front view. Applies to generative views only.
Projection view. Applies to generative views only.
Auxiliary view. Applies to generative views only.
Isometric view. Applies to generative views only.
Section view. Applies to generative views only.
Section cut. Applies to generative views only.
Detail view. Applies to generative views only.
Unfolded view. Applies to generative views only.
Masks Specific to Drafting Applications

Unreferenced drawing. The link between the drawing and the 3D part or product is broken. Does not
apply to drawings which contain only interactive views.
Unreferenced sheet. The link between the sheet and the 3D part or product is broken. Does not apply
to sheets which contain only interactive views.
Unreferenced view. The link between the view and the 3D part or product is broken. Does not apply to
interactive views.
Locked view. (Note that a locked view cannot be updated. Therefore, locked views which are not up-to-
date will not be applied the corresponding mask.)
Customizing
This section explains how to customize settings and toolbars for Drafting workbenches.
Before you start your first working session, you can customize the way you work to suit your habits.
This type of customization is stored in permanent setting files: these settings will not be lost if you end your session.
Note that some settings apply to Generative Drafting only, while others apply to Interactive Drafting only. Such cases are specified.
1. Select Tools -> Options. The Options dialog box is displayed.
2. Choose the Mechanical Design category in the left-hand box.
3. Select the Drafting sub-category. Various tabs are displayed.
❍ General lets you set general settings to be used in the Generative Drafting workbench.
❍ Layout lets you customize options that will be used when creating views or when adding sheets.
❍ View lets you customize geometry, dress-up and view generation options that will be used when generating views
(Generative Drafting workbench only).
❍ Generation lets you customize options for controlling dimension and annotation generation (Generative Drafting workbench
only).
❍ Geometry lets you customize options that will be used when creating 2D geometry, whether using autodetection (or
SmartPick) or not, or still adding constraints to this geometry.
❍ Dimension lets you customize options that will be used when creating or re-positioning dimensions.
❍ Manipulators lets you visualize options that will be used for manipulators whenever creating or modifying dimensions
(Interactive Drafting workbench only).
❍ Annotation and Dress-Up lets you customize options that will be used when creating annotations.
❍ Administration lets you customize options for the management of drawings.
4. Set options in these tabs according to your needs.
5. Click OK in the Options dialog box when done.

General
This page deals with the following categories of options in the General tab:
● Ruler
● Grid
● Rotation
● Colors
● Tree
● View Axis
● Start Workbench
Ruler
Show ruler
Select this option to display the ruler in your sheet. It means you visualize the cursor
coordinates as you are drawing.
By default, this option is not selected.
Grid
Display
Select this option to display the grid in your session. Note that this option is also available via
the Tools toolbar.
By default, this option is selected.
Snap to point
Select this option if you want geometry (as well as 2D components) to begin or end on the
various intersection points of the grid. Note that this option is also available via the Tools
toolbar.
From V5 R15 onwards, this option no longer applies to annotations.

Now, only the Snap by default (Shift toggles) setting is used to specify whether snapping should be
activated by default for annotations. For more information, refer to Annotation and Dress-up.
Allow Distortions
Select this option to apply different graduations and spacing between H and V.
Primary spacing: H & V
The Primary spacing field lets you define the spacing between the major lines of the grid.
To define your grid, enter the values of your choice in the H and/or V fields.
By default, primary spacing is set to 100 mm.
Graduations / H & V
The Graduations field lets you set the number of graduations between the major lines of the
grid, which actually consists in defining a secondary grid. To define your grid, enter the
values of your choice in the H and/or V fields.
By default, graduations are set to 10.
Rotation
Rotation Snap Angle
Specify the angle that should be used when rotating text elements (text, frame, or leader)
using snapping. In other words, this option defines the snapping value used when rotating an
element using the Select or Rotate commands.
By default, rotation snap angle is set to 15 deg.
Automatic Snapping
Select this option to use snapping automatically when rotating an element.
Colors (for pre-V5R14 drawings)
These options apply to drawings created with versions prior to V5R14. For drawings created with V5R14
onwards, sheet and detail backgrounds colors are defined in the standard file, under the node Sheet
colors of General node.
Sheet background
Choose the color that will be used for the sheet background.
By default, the color is white.
Detail background
Choose the color that will be used for the background of 2D components.
By default, the color is white.
Graduated color
If you want the sheet background and/or the detail (i.e. 2D component) background to be
graduated, select the associated box.
By default, these options are not selected.
Tree
Display parameters
Select this option to display in the specification tree the formula parameters used in the
drawing.
Display relations
Select this option to display in the specification tree the relation parameters used in the
drawing.
View axis
Display in the current view
Select this option if you want the view axis to be displayed when you activate a view.
Zoomable
Select this option if you want to be able to zoom view axes (as you can do with geometry).
Reference size
Enter the size that you want to use as a reference to display view axes size.
By default, the reference size is 30 mm.
Start Workbench
Hide new dialog box when starting workbench
Select this option if you want to hide the New Drawing dialog box (in the case of Drafting) and the New
Layout dialog box (in the case of 2D Layout for 3D Design) when you start the workbench.

Layout
This page deals with the following categories of options in the Layout tab:
● View Creation
● New Sheet
● Background View
● Section / Projection Callout
View Creation
View name
Select this option if you want the view name to be created automatically when creating views.
Scaling factor
Select this option if you want the scaling factor to be created automatically when creating views.
View frame
Select this option if you want the view frame to be created automatically when creating views.

Propagation of broken and breakout specifications
Select this option if you want broken and breakout specifications to be reproduced.
Auxiliary and section views orientation according to profile
Select this option if you want auxiliary and section views to be oriented according to the profile. In
this case, the X axis will be parallel to the profile.
Be aware that this setting is a default value, i.e. the setting used when creating the view is
stored by the view and cannot be edited via the view's properties (available via Edit >
Properties).
This setting drives the angle of the view in the sheet. So if the auxiliary/section view profile
is modified, the view rotation angle will be modified accordingly.
View axis system based on 3D axis system
Select this option if you want the axis system of the generated view to be based on the axis
system of the 3D part. This enables you to create views with the same orientation if, when
creating two views in the same projection plane by selecting two different faces, the axis systems
which are specific to these faces are different.
For example, take the following part:
With the View axis system based on 3D axis system option not checked, the view orientation
will be different depending on the element selected in the 3D when creating the view:
View orientation when a face of the View orientation when a View orientation when the absolute
rectangular pad is selected face of the elliptic pad is XY plane is selected
selected
With the View axis system based on 3D axis system option checked, the view orientation will
always be the same, no matter what element is selected in the 3D when creating the view:
View orientation when either a face of the

rectangular pad, a face of the elliptic pad, or the
absolute XY plane is selected
New sheet
Copy background view
Select this option if you want a background view to be copied into newly created sheets.
Source sheet
Specify whether you want the source sheet for the background view to be the first sheet of the
current drawing, or a sheet from another drawing by selecting the appropriate option.
By default, the option is First sheet.
Background view
Directory for frame and title block
You can specify the path to the directory containing the frame and title block macros.
By default, the path is install_root/VBScript/FrameTitleBlock.
Section/Projection Callout
Size not dependent on view scale
Select this option if you do not want the size of projection and section callout elements to be
dependent on the view scale. This option will apply to newly created callouts, i.e. selecting this
option will not have any impact on existing callouts.
Note that this option only applies to drawings created with versions prior to V5 R11 (i.e. versions
up to V5 R10).

View
This page deals with the following categories of options in the View tab:
● Geometry generation / Dress-up
● View generation
● Clipping view
● View from 3D
These options do not apply to the Interactive Drafting workbench.
These options are applied when creating new views. Once the view has been created, you can modify its
properties through the Properties dialog box: from the contextual menu of a given view, select Properties,
click the View tab and then select the desired options. For more information, refer to Editing View Properties.
Geometry generation / Dress-up

This category of options lets you specify what kind of geometry and dress-up elements you want to generate
when generating views.

Generate axis
Select this option to generate axis lines.
Generate threads
Select this option to generate threads.
Generate center lines
Select this option to generate center lines.
Generate hidden lines
Select this option to generate hidden lines.
Generate fillets
Select this option to generate fillets.
Additionally, click the Configure button to configure fillet generation. You can choose to generate
either of the types of fillets described below.
By default, Boundaries is selected.

Boundaries
Thin lines, representing the mathematical limits of the fillets.
Boundaries will not be projected if they correspond to two faces

which are continuous in curvature. They will be projected only if
they correspond to a smooth edge which is situated between two
faces whose curvature radii vary.
This mode will be used automatically to represent a connection

between two faces which are not joined by a fillet, no matter what
option you select.
Symbolic
Original edges, projected in a direction that is normal to each

corresponding surface.
Approximated Original Edges
Original edges, at the intersection of the two surfaces joined by the fillet.
Projected Original Edges
Original edges, projected on fillet surfaces in the direction of the view

projection.
This projection mode is equivalent to the CATIA V4 fillet projection

mode.
The following restrictions apply to Symbolic, Approximated Original Edges and Projected Original Edges:
● Dimensions on such fillets are not associative.
● Such fillets cannot inherit 3D colors (see below). Likewise, when using generative view styles, such fillets
cannot inherit the 3DInheritance view dress-up parameters (defined in Tools -> Standard ->
generativeparameters -> *.XML file, Drafting -> ViewDressup -> 3DInheritance).
Inherit 3D colors
Select this option if you want the colors of a part to be automatically generated onto the views.
In the case of white parts, the views generated with this option selected will be white, and will
therefore not be displayed properly.
Project 3D Wireframe
Select this option to visualize both the wireframe and the geometry on generated views.
Additionally, click the Configure button to configure the 3D wireframe projection mode. You can
choose whether projected 3D wireframe can be hidden (3D wireframe geometry will follow standard
removal of hidden lines) or is always visible (3D wireframe geometry will not follow standard removal
of hidden lines and will always be visible). Whichever option you choose, note that linear elements
will not be projected as points when they are perpendicular to the projection plane.
By default, Can be hidden is selected.
Project 3D Points
Select this option to project points from 3D (no construction element).
Additionally, click the Configure button to select the type of points visualized in the projected
drawing. In the 3D Point Projection dialog box, you can choose between keeping the symbols that are
used in the 3D or using a new symbol.
By default, the X symbol is selected.
Apply 3D specification
Select this option to specify whether, in an assembly, the properties assigned to given parts (also
called components) will be applied in the view.
The following 3D specifications may be defined for components in the Product Structure workbench:
● The component will, or will not, be cut when projected in section views (Do not cut in section
views).
● The component will, or will not, be projected in views (Do not use when projecting).
● The component will, or will not, be represented with hidden lines (Represented with hidden lines).
For more information, refer to Modifying Component Properties in the Product Structure User's Guide.
View Linetype
Click the Configure button to configure linetypes and thicknesses for specific types of views: section
view, detail view, broken view, breakout view, skin section view (in the case of wireframes and
surfaces). In the Linetype and thickness dialog box, select the line type and the thickness you want
for each type of view, from the associated fields. Click Close when you are done.
By default, linetypes and thicknesses are configured as shown above.
If you choose the zigzag linetype (linetype #8), note that this linetype is
just a graphical dress-up of the view. This means that if one line is
relimited on the breakout line, then it will be relimited on the theoretical
line as shown here, and not on the visualized zigzag line.
View generation
View generation mode
From this list, select how you want to generate views.
By default, Exact view is selected.
A short description of the various view generation modes is provided below. For a detailed description (including
the advantages and restrictions pertaining to each mode), refer to View Creation > About the View Generation
Modes.
Exact view
Generates exact views from the Design mode, i.e. views for which the geometry is available. The
exact generation mode will be the best option in most cases.
CGR
Generates views using the CGR format (CATIA Graphical Representation). CGR corresponds to a data
format containing a graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the
Visualization mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available with the Design mode).
With CGR, only the external appearance of the component is used and displayed; the geometry is not
available. The corresponding .cgr file, if it exists, is inserted from the cache system.
Approximate
Generates views in Approximate mode. Although Approximate views are not as high in precision and
quality as exact views, this generation mode dramatically reduces memory consumption.
Performances may also be improved, depending on how you fine-tune precision. Therefore, the
Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or assemblies involving large
amounts of data.
You can fine-tune the generation options according to your needs. Click the Configure button. The
Approximate mode dialog box is displayed, allowing you to set the precision (that is the level of
detail - LOD) with respect to the performances (that is generation time - Time).
The level of detail corresponds to the precision with which the application determines which edges
are hidden and which are not. As a result, decreasing this precision may lead to smaller geometry
being visible whenever it should not be, and vice-versa. The higher the precision, the lower the
performances. In any case, memory consumption will not be impacted.
Proceed as follows:
a. Specify the level of detail in the dedicated field, or move the cursor to set the precision in the
graphic area on the right.
b. Click Close when you are done.
Raster
Generates views as images. This enables you to quickly generate overall views for large products or
assemblies, regardless of drawing quality. Such views are associative to the 3D geometry and can be
updated when the part or product changes.
To optimize disk space and memory consumption, it is recommended that you do not select the
Inherit 3D colors option when generating raster views.
You can configure the raster mode options according to your needs. Click the Configure button. The
Raster Mode Options dialog box is displayed.
Proceed as follows:
a. From the Mode list, select the mode that you want to use: Dynamic Hidden Line Removal,
Shading, Shading with edges. These modes are equivalent to the 3D rendering styles. For
more information, refer to Using Rendering Styles in the Infrastructure User's Guide.
If you want the colors of a part to be used when generating Raster views using the
Shading or Shading with edges mode, remember to select the Inherit 3D Colors
option. Otherwise, the view will be generated using shades of grey.
b. Now, set the level of detail (i.e. the definition, in dpi) that will respectively be used to
visualize and to print the drawing. You can choose between three pre-defined modes (Low
quality, Normal quality and High quality) and a custom mode (Customize). If you choose to
customize the definition yourself, set the dpi for visualization and for print in the appropriate
fields.
The level of detail applies to the scale of the view. In some cases (when the view would
print with a considerable height or width), there may be too many pixels to generate
the view. In this case, the view will be displayed as a red cross-mark. If this happens,
try to reduce the scale of the view and/or the level of detail.
c. Click Close when you are done.
To further improve performance when generating Raster or CGR views, we recommend you work in
Visualization mode: to do this, in the Options dialog box, go to Infrastructure -> Product Structure ->
Cache Management tab and select Work with the cache system. (For more information, see Customizing
Cache Settings in the Infrastructure User's Guide and Visualization mode in the Product Structure User's
Guide.)
Exact preview for view generation
Make sure this check box is selected if you want an exact preview when generating views. Note that
exact previews show exactly what will be projected.
In this case, the part or product will be loaded in Design mode when previewing the view to generate,
even if you are working in Visualization mode.
Clear this check box to get a quick preview of the 3D document when generating views. Note that
quick previews do not necessarily show what will be projected, but show exactly what is visualized in
3D.
In this case, a part or product open in Visualization mode will not be loaded in Design mode for the
preview, which optimizes memory consumption.

Only generate parts larger than
To specify that you only want to generate parts which are larger than a certain size, select this option
and indicate the appropriate size by providing a value in millimeters in the appropriate field.
Enable occlusion culling
Select this option if you want to save memory when generating exact views from an assembly which
is loaded in Visualization mode (i.e. when the Work with the cache system option is active). This
will load only the parts which will be seen in the resulting view (instead of loading all of them, which
is the case by default), which optimizes memory consumption and CPU usage.
To ensure the efficiency of this option, make sure that the Exact preview for view generation
option is not selected.
In the case of an assembly which is loaded in Design mode, or in the case of a part, the Enable
occlusion culling option will help increase performance by reducing CPU usage.
Keep the following restrictions in mind when selecting the Enable occlusion culling option:
● The Project 3D points option will be disabled.

● The only option available for Project 3D wireframe is Can be hidden.
● If you choose to project 3D wireframe, you will need to make sure that your wireframe elements
have been taken into account when the CGR data was created: this is the case if you activated
the Save lineic elements in cgr option from Tools -> Options -> Infrastructure -> Product
Structure -> Cgr Management before the creation of CGR data (i.e. before you launched the
part or product in Visualization mode). If not, you need to activate the Save lineic elements in
cgr option and then re-create the CGR data. To do this:
1. Close all open parts and products and exit the application.
2. Delete your CGR data from the cache. (The cache location is specified in Tools -> Options -
> Infrastructure -> Product Structure -> Cache Management tab, Path to the local
cache field.)
3. Re-open the product in Visualization mode.
Select body in assembly

Select this option if you want to be allowed to create a view selecting one or several bodies in an assembly.
By default, the box is not checked and the following error message is displayed if you try to generate a view
from a body.
Once Select body in assembly is checked, a warning is displayed when creating the view as you are strongly
advised not to use this option.
Actually, generating a view on a body from a .CATProduct prevents many features from working properly:
● Positioning of the different parts in the assembly is not taken into account in the resulting view and parts
might be superimposed,
● Changes such as rotation or translation in the assembly are not taken into account,
● Modification of an instance properties such as visibility or colors are not taken into account,
● Overload properties is disabled as it is linked to the assembly's properties,
● Creation of balloons is not possible,
● Edit/ Links option references only two parts.
Moreover, multi-selecting a body in two different parts modifies the behavior of the Modify links and Modify
Projection Plane according to the order of selection, since the .CATPart of the first selected body will be used
as reference document and not the .CATProduct.
Clipping view
Put in no show dimension on non-visible geometry
Select this check box if you want to put automatically in no show mode the dimensions which are attached to
geometry which is not visible in clipping views.
If you do not select this check box, dimensions are displayed in clipping views using the colors defined in Tools -
> Options -> Mechanical Design -> Drafting -> Dimension tab, Analysis display mode area. For more
information, refer to Analysis display mode.
The color used depends on whether the dimension is interactive (that is, created manually) or generated
automatically:
● interactive dimensions are displayed using the color defined for dimensions on non-visible geometry (light
blue by default).
● generated dimensions are displayed using the color defined for dimensions generated from 3D constraints
(light green by default).
Dimensions are put in no show mode only if none of the geometrical elements to which the dimension is
attached are visible. If an element is visible while the other is not, the dimension is displayed using the color
defined by the analysis display mode as specified above.
View From 3D
Keep layout and dress-up of 2D extracted annotations
Select this option if you want the layout and dress-up applied to 2D extracted annotations to be preserved
when updating a view from 3D (Functional Tolerancing and Annotation workbench).
● 2D dress-up modifications are kept when updating design changes from 3D.
● Associativity of the annotations or their leader with the 3D geometry is taken into account.
● Associativity between annotations is taken into account.
Generate 2D geometry
Select this option if you want to generate 2D geometry (i.e. wireframe and 2D points) when generating a view
from 3D from a layout view (2D Layout for 3D Design workbench).

Generation
This page deals with the following categories of options in the Generation tab:
● Dimension generation
● Balloon generation
These options apply to the Generative Drafting workbench only.
Dimension generation
Generated dimensions are positioned according to the most representative views. In other words, a
dimension will appear on a view so that it does not need to be created on another view.
The dimensions are generated on the views on the condition the settings were previously switched to the
dimension generation option.
Generate dimensions when updating the sheet
Select this option to generate dimensions automatically each time you update the sheet.
Filters before generation
Select this option to display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box before generation. This
enables you to specify what type of dimensions you want to generate. Also, in assembly or
product views, this lets you indicate what parts you want to generate dimensions for.

Automatic positioning after generation
Select this option if you want the dimensions to be automatically positioned after generation.
Allow automatic transfer between views
Select this option if you want dimensions to be automatically transferred to the most
appropriate view when regenerating dimensions.
Analysis after generation
Select this option to display the Generated Dimension Analysis dialog box after generation.
Generate dimensions from parts included in assembly views
Select this option to extract 3D part constraints (on top of assembly constraints) when
generating product dimensions.
This option is particularly useful if you want to generate dimensions for all parts included in
assembly or product views, without displaying the Dimension Generation Filters dialog box
before dimension generation. Note that if you display the Dimension Generation Filters dialog
box before generating dimensions, you will need to indicate what parts you want to generate
dimensions for (whether this option is selected or not).
Delay between generations for step-by-step mode
Specify the delay between each dimension generation when generating dimensions step by
step.
Balloon generation
Creation of a balloon for each instance of a product
If you select this option, a balloon will be generated for each instance of a component:
therefore, if a component is used two times within a product, then the balloon will be generated
twice.
If you leave this box unselected, a single balloon will be generated for all instances of the same
component, when a component is used several times within a part or product.

Geometry
This page deals with the following categories of options in the Geometry tab:
● Geometry
● Constraints creation
● Constraints Display
● Colors
Geometry
Create circle and ellipse centers
Specify whether you want to create centers when creating circles or ellipses. Clear this check
box if you do not need to create circle and ellipse centers.
Allow direct manipulation
Select this check box to be able to move geometry using the mouse. When moving geometry,
you can move either the minimum number of elements, the maximum number of elements,
or still the minimum number by modifying the shape of elements, if needed.
Additionally, click the Solving mode... button to configure manipulation.

The dialog box that appears offers the following options as regards the solving mode:
Standard mode
You move as many elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.
Minimum move
You move as few elements as possible and also respect existing constraints.
Relaxation
You move elements by re-distributing them over the sketch, globally speaking. This method
solves element moving by minimizing energy cost.
Furthermore, you can choose to drag elements along with their end points by selecting Drag
elements end points included.
By default, Minimum move and Drag elements end points included are selected.
Show H and V fields in the Tools Palette
Select this check box to show the H and V fields in the Tools Palette when creating 2D
geometry or when offsetting elements. Leaving the option unselected enables you to directly
enter the value corresponding to the type of element you are creating: for example, the
length when creating a line, the radius when creating a circle or the offset value when
offsetting elements.
When a command (such as the Point creation command) does not have any parameters other
than H and V, then these two fields will remain in the Tools Palette, whether you select this
option or not.

Create end points when duplicating generated geometry
Select this check box if you want to create end points when duplicating geometrical elements
that were generated from the 3D.
Constraints creation
Create detected and feature-based constraints
Select this check box if you want the geometrical or dimensional constraints detected by the
SmartPick tool to be created.
This option is also available in the Tools toolbar through Create detected constraints .
If you leave this check box unselected, Create detected constraints will be inactive by
default. You will be able to activate it at any time.
SmartPick... (button)
As you create more and more elements, SmartPick detects multiple directions and positions,
and more and more relationships with existing elements. This may lead to confusion due to
the rapid highlighting of several different detection possibilities as you point the cursor at
different elements in rapid succession. Consequently, you can decide to filter out undesired
detections by clicking the SmartPick... button.
The SmartPick dialog box provides these options:
● Support lines and circles

● Alignment
● Parallelism, perpendicularity and tangency
● Horizontality and verticality
Clear the check boxes corresponding to the elements you do not wish to detect when
sketching.
Clearing all check boxes in the SmartPick dialog box disables SmartPick completely. This will
be particularly useful when your screen is full of elements: in this case, disabling SmartPick
lets you concentrate only on the geometry.
By default, all options are selected.
Constraints Display
Display constraints
Select this check box to visualize the logical constraints specific to the elements. Note that if
the Display constraints option is cleared, the other options in this category are not
available.
Reference size
Specify the size that will be used as a reference to display constraints symbols. Changing this
reference size will modify the size of all constraints representations.
By default, the reference size is 2 mm.
Constraints color
Choose the color that will be used to display constraints.
By default, the color for constraints is blue.
Constraints types... (button)
Click this button to define which types of constraints you will visualize as you create the
geometry.
The Constraints types dialog box provides these options:
● Horizontal
● Vertical
● Parallelism
● Perpendicularity
● Concentricity
● Coincidence
● Tangency
● Symmetry
Clear the check boxes corresponding to the types of constraints you do not want to visualize
as you create the geometry.
By default, all options are selected.
Colors
Two types of colors may be applied to sketched elements. These two types of colors correspond to
colors illustrating:
● Graphical properties
Colors that can be modified. These colors can therefore be modified using the Tools->Options
dialog box.
OR
● Constraint diagnosis
Colors that represent constraint diagnoses are colors that are imposed to elements whatever the
graphical properties previously assigned to these elements and in accordance with given diagnoses.
As a result, as soon as the diagnosis is solved, the element is assigned the color as defined in the
Tools -> Options dialog box.
Visualization of diagnosis
Select this option if you want over-constrained, inconsistent, not-changed or iso-constrained

elements to be identified using specific colors.
Then, click the Colors... button to configure these colors.
In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements:
Over-constrained elements
The dimensioning scheme is over-constrained: too many dimensions were applied to the
geometry.
Inconsistent elements
At least one dimension value needs to be changed. This is also the case when elements are
under-constrained and the system proposes defaults that do not lead to a solution.
Not-changed elements
Some geometrical elements are over-defined or not-consistent. As a result, geometry that
depend(s) on the problematic area will not be recalculated.
Iso-constrained elements
All the relevant dimensions are satisfied. The geometry is fixed and cannot be moved from its
geometrical support.
By default, colors are configured as shown above.
Other color of the elements
Click the Colors... button to configure the colors of other elements.

In the dialog box that appears, you can configure colors for the following types of elements:
Construction elements
Specifies the color used for construction elements.
A construction element is an element that is internal to, and only visualized by, the sketch.
This element is used as positioning reference. It is not used for creating solid primitives.
SmartPick
Specifies the color used for SmartPick elements and symbols.
When opening a drawing, colors are not recomputed. Colors will not be displayed until you create
another element or move the geometry.
Dimension
This page deals with the following categories of options in the Dimension tab:
● Dimension Creation
● Move
● Line-Up
● Analysis Display Mode
Dimension Creation
Dimension following the mouse (ctrl toggles)
Select this option to specify that the dimension line should be positioned according to the
cursor, following it dynamically during the creation process.
Default dimension line/geometry distance
If you position the dimension according to the cursor, you can define the value at which the
dimension is created. If you create associativity between the dimension and the geometry,
you can define the value at which the dimension will remain positioned.
By default, this option is set to 5 mm.
Constant offset between dimension line and geometry

Select this option to specify that the distance between the created dimension and the
geometry should remain the same when moving the geometry.
Associativity on 3D... (button)
If you click the button, the Dimensions associativity on 3D dialog box appears. These options
are used in a Generative Drafting context, and specify how associativity between dimensions
and the 3D part or product is handled.
When they are associative, dimensions are linked to the 3D part or product. As a result, when
you update the drawing, the dimension is automatically re-computed. When dimensions are
not associative, you need to re-create them after performing an update.
Associativity on 3D
When creating dimensions in a Generative Drafting context, specify whether and how
dimensions should be associative with the 3D part/product:
● Only create non-associative dimensions: dimensions will never be associative with

the 3D.
● Allow non-associative dimensions: dimensions are associative with the 3D whenever
possible, but dimensions that cannot be associative with the 3D are also created.
● Never create non-associative dimensions: only dimensions that can be associative
with the 3D are created.
By default, Allow non-associative dimensions is selected.
Associativity in "Approximate" mode views
Select the Allow the creation of associative dimension in approximate views option if
you want the option chosen in the Associativity on 3D section above to be applied to
dimensions in Approximate views (i.e. views generated using the Approximate view
generation mode). This option only applies to the following dimension creation commands:
Dimensions, Chained Dimensions, Cumulated Dimensions, Stacked Dimensions,
Distance/Length Dimensions, Angle Dimensions, Radius Dimensions, Diameter Dimensions,
Chamfer Dimensions, Dimension Systems. It does not apply to other dimension types, nor to
driving dimensions.
If this option is not selected, dimensions will not be associative in Approximate views (as was
the case prior to V5R15), which minimizes memory requirements.

Create driving dimensions
Select this option if you want newly created dimensions to drive the geometry.
A new field will appear in the Tools Palette during the creation process, allowing you to enter
the driving dimension value.
Detect chamfer
Select this option to activate chamfer detection: this will lets you create chamfer dimensions
in a single click.
As chamfer detection may slow performance down, you may want to deactivate this option
for large products or assemblies.

By default, create dimensions on circle's
Specify whether the dimension you will create between a circle and another element should
be on the circle center or on the circle edge.
By default, the Center option is selected.
Move
Configure snapping
Click the Configure snapping button to define how snapping should be performed. In the
dialog box that appears, specify whether the dimension should be snapped on the grid,
whether the dimension value should be located at its default position between symbols (it will
work only if the cursor is between the symbols), or both.
By default, Value between symbols is selected.

Snap by default (SHIFT toggles)
Select this option to activate snapping by default when creating or handling dimensions.
Pressing the Shift key will enable you to temporarily deactivate snapping. Note that snapping
is performed according to the options set in the Configure snapping dialog box.
With this option unselected, snapping is not active. In this case, pressing the Shift key will
enable you to temporarily activate it.
Before V5 R15, this option used to be called Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles).
Move only selected sub-part
Select this option if you want to move only a dimension sub-part (text, line, etc.).
Line-Up
You can organize dimensions into a system with a linear offset. The offset will align the dimensions to
each other as well as the smallest dimension to the reference element.
Default offset to reference
This allows you to set the offset between the smallest dimension and the reference element.
By default, the offset is 0 mm and 0 deg.
Default offset between dimensions
This allows you to set the offset between dimensions.
By default, the offset is 10 mm and 15 deg.
Align stacked dimension values
Lets you align all the values of a group of stacked dimensions on the value of the smallest
dimension of the group.
Align cumulated dimension values
Lets you align all the values of a group of cumulated dimensions on the value of the smallest
dimension of the group.
Automatically add a funnel
Whenever the value of a cumulated dimension requires a funnel to be displayed correctly,

lets you have one added automatically.
Analysis Display Mode

Activate analysis display mode
Select this option to display dimensions using different colors according to their status (not-
up-to-date, isolated, fake, etc.).
Additionally, click the Types and colors button to customize the colors that will be used. The
Types and colors of dimensions dialog box lets you assign the desired color(s) to the selected
dimension types. You will then be able to visualize the different types of dimensions using
their assigned colors.

Manipulators
● Manipulators
● Dimension Manipulators
Manipulators
These settings can be used for any type of manipulator (texts, leaders, center lines, dimensions and so forth).
Reference size
Specify the reference size that should be used for manipulators. In the case of texts, for example,
this reference size corresponds to the diameter of the rotation manipulators.
By default, the reference size is set to 2mm.
Zoomable
Check this box if you want to make manipulators zoomable.
Dimension Manipulators
These options let you define which manipulators you will visualize and therefore use when creating and/or
modifying dimensions:
Modify overrun
If you drag select one overrun manipulator, both overrun extension lines are modified. To modify
only the selected overrun extension line, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the
manipulator and enter the new value in the dialog box that appears.
By default, the Creation and Modification options are not selected.
Modify blanking
If you drag select one blanking manipulator, both blanking are modified. To modify only the selected
blanking, use the Ctrl key. You can also double-click on the manipulator and enter the new value in
the dialog box that appears.
By default, the Creation option is not selected, and the Modification option is.
Insert text before
Allow inserting a text before, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the
manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears.
Insert text after
Allows inserting a text after, without using the Properties dialog box. For this, you will click on the
manipulator and enter the new text in the dialog box that appears.
Move value
Lets you move only the dimension value.
Move dimension line
Lets you move only the dimension line by dragging it to the new location.
Move dimension line secondary part
Lets you move only the dimension line secondary part by dragging it to the new location.

Annotation and Dress-Up
● Annotation Creation
● Move
● 2D Component Creation
● Balloon Creation
● Table
Annotation Creation
In order for these options to be taken into account, the Snap by default (SHIFT toggles) box must
be selected. Note that the option selected in the Snapping Configuration for Annotations dialog box
will be taken into account. See the Move section.
These options are taken into account only when creating annotations, not when adding a reference line,
for example.
Create text along reference
Select this option if you want to create annotation texts along a reference direction. For
example, if you select a line when creating a text, the text will be oriented parallel to the line.
Text
Select this option if you want to create the extremity of text leaders normal to a reference
direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a text with leader, the leader will be
normal to the line.
Geometrical tolerance
Select this option if you want to create the extremity of geometrical tolerance leaders normal
to a reference direction. For example, if you select a line when creating a geometrical
tolerance, the leader will be normal to the line.
Move
Configure snapping
Click the Configure snapping button to define how snapping should be performed. In the
dialog box that appears, specify whether you want annotations to be snapped on the grid,
according to the leader orientation, or both. This will apply to the annotations selected in the
Annotation Creation area.
By default, Both is selected.

Snap by default (SHIFT toggles)
Select this option to activate snapping by default when creating or handling annotations.
Pressing the Shift key will enable you to temporarily deactivate snapping. Note that snapping
is performed according to the options set in the Snapping Configuration for Annotations
dialog box.
With this option unselected, snapping is not active. In this case, pressing the Shift key will
enable you to temporarily activate it.
● From V5 R15 onwards, the Snap to Point option on the General tab no longer applies to
annotations. Only this option is taken into account.
● Before V5 R15, this option used to be called Activate Snapping (SHIFT toggles). It has
been renamed for clarity reasons.
2D Component Creation
Create with a constant size
Select this option if you want all 2D component instances to have the same size when you
create them, no matter what the view scale is.
This lets you create 2D component instances whose size is independent from the view scale
so that they always look the same. You can use them as symbols, for example.
If you want to use as symbols 2D components with text, activate both the Create with a
constant size setting and the Apply Scale property for the text (in Edit -> Properties):
the size of both the 2D component and its text will then be independent from the view scale.

Prevent direct manipulation
Select this option to make it impossible to move 2D components using the mouse.
Prevent direct scaling
Select this option to make it impossible to scale 2D components using the mouse.
Balloon Creation
You can specify what kind of balloons you want to create (using the Balloon command from the
Annotation toolbar) or to generate (using the Generate Balloons command from the Generation
toolbar).
3D associativity
Select this option to indicate that you want to associate balloons with information from the
3D.
Additionally, select from the list the kind of balloons you want to create or generate: the
numbering of parts within an assembly (default option), the instance name or the part
number.
By default, Numbering is selected.
Table
Recompute table when editing cell
Select this option if you want a table to be resized while you are editing a cell. If it is not
selected, the table is resized after closing the Text Editor.
Do not split table on several sheets
This option is available only when certain licenses are installed.
With certain licenses, tables are split automatically on several sheets. Select this option if you
want to keep tables on a single sheet.

Administration
This page deals with the following categories of options in the Administration tab:
● Drawing management
● Style
● Generative view style
● Dress-up
Drawing management
Prevent File>New
Select this option to make it impossible to create drawings using the File -> New command. All
drawings will be created using the File -> New From... command instead.
Prevent switch of standard
Select this option to make it impossible to change standards, i.e. to use a standard other than the
one currently defined in the Page Setup dialog box.
Prevent update of standard
Select this option to make it impossible to update standards for the current document in the Page
Setup dialog box.
Prevent background view access
Select this option to make it impossible to access the background view.
Style
Use style values to create new objects
Select this option if you want dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette to be pre-
filled with custom style values (as defined in the Standards Editor) when creating new annotations.
In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be disabled during the creation of the
annotation.
If you leave this box unchecked, annotation dialog boxes, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette
will be pre-filled with the last entered values (except for Texts, Texts with leader, Balloons and
Datum features). In this case, Properties toolbars and the Tools Palette will be active during the
creation of the annotation.
If you select this option, you will be able to reset the current style values in dialog boxes at any
time using the Reset button unless it is disabled.

Create new sheet from (for pre-V5R14 drawings)
This option lets you specify if the properties used for creating new sheets should be those defined
in the standards or those defined in the first sheet of a drawing. These properties are the scale and
the projection method (first or third angle).
Select Style if you want the sheet to use the style defined in the standards (in Tools ->
Standards -> Drafting -> [StandardName] -> Styles -> Sheet).
Select First sheet if you want the sheet to use the properties defined in the first sheet of a
drawing. For example, you can use this option if you use an existing drawing to create a new one
(i.e. when you want the new drawing to have the same properties as the existing drawing).
This option applies only to drawings created with versions prior to V5R14.
By default, First sheet is selected.
Lock "User Default" Style
Select this option to make it compulsory to use User Defaults (i.e., user-defined values set as
default). The Styles drop-down list will be set to Only User Defaults and will be inactive so that
Original Defaults or User Defaults cannot be selected.
This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has
NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.
Prevent "Set As Default" and "Reset All Defaults"
Select this option to use the current defaults and to make it impossible to create, change and reset
user defaults (i.e. user-defined values). This disables the Set as Default and the Reset All
Defaults commands.
This option applies only to drawings created with versions up to V5 R10 whose standard has
NOT been updated or changed in V5 R11 and later.

Display Reset button in dialog boxes
Select this option to display the Reset button in dialog boxes. Deselecting this option hides the
Reset button in dialog boxes and disables the Reset functionality.
Prevent generative view style usage
This option is used for the Generative Drafting workbench only.
Select this check-box if you do not want to use generative view styles when creating or updating
views. In this case, you will not be able to select a generative view style after having selected a
view creation command, which means that the Generative View Style toolbar will not be displayed.
(In the case of advanced front views, it is the Generative view style list in the View Parameters
dialog box which will not be displayed).
Note that this option also drives view generation parameters when updating views, whether
the view was created using generative view styles or not. In this case, there are two
possibilities:
● If you created the view using generative view styles (i.e. with this check-box cleared)
and then select this check-box, then, at the next update, the view properties (available
via Edit -> Properties) will be used for all overloaded parameters (an asterisk *
appears in the Properties dialog box in front of the parameters which are considered as
being overloaded) and the view settings (available via Tools -> Options -> Mechanical
Design -> Drafting - > View tab) will be used for the others.
● If you created the view without generative view styles (i.e. with this check-box selected)
and then clear this check-box, then, at the next update, all parameters available in the
view properties (available via Edit -> Properties) will be considered as being
overloaded and will be used. To make sure that generative view styles are used in this
case, click the Reset to style values button in the Properties dialog box.
For more information, refer to the Generative View Styles chapter in the Generative Drafting User's
Guide.
Dress-up
Prevent dimensions from driving 3D constraints
Select this option to make it impossible to modify a 3D constraint via a 2D dimension that was
generated from it.

You can customize the appearance of some fields in the following properties toolbars: Styles, Graphic
Properties, Text Properties and Dimension Properties.
1. Right-click the toolbar field you want to customize. A contextual menu is displayed.
2. If necessary, scroll down this contextual menu to display the toolbar customization options.
The customization options that you can apply to the selected field are displayed.
The options available depend on the selected field. For more information on what options are available
for each field, see the table below.
3. Click the option you want. Depending on the option you selected, the corresponding dialog box
appears.
4. Enter the appropriate value in the dialog box.
● Set text width: sets the width used to display the field in the toolbar, in number of characters to
be displayed (based on 'W').
● Set list width: sets the width used to display the drop-down list, in number of characters to be
displayed (based on 'W').
● Set list height: sets the height used to display the list, in number of lines to be displayed (up and
down arrows will make it possible to scroll within the list).
● Icons display: defines whether icons should be displayed in this field, or only in the list, when the
list is collapsed.
● Precision: sets the precision used to display a numerical value in this field, in number of digits after
the separator.
The table below indicates which fields you can customize in each toolbar, along with what you can
customize for each field.
Set text Set list Set list

Icons display Set precision
width width height
Style toolbar
Style Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Text Properties toolbar
Font Name Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Font Size Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Dimension Properties toolbar
Tolerance
Yes Yes Yes Yes No
Description
Tolerance Yes Yes Yes No No
Numerical Display
Yes Yes Yes No No
Description
Precision Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Graphic Properties toolbar
Color Yes No No No No
Thickness Yes No Yes No No
Linetype Yes No Yes No No
Point type Yes No Yes No No

In the Generative Drafting workbench, administration tasks deals with the administration of generative view
styles, which specify the appearance of the geometry to be generated in views.
You can manage and customize generative view styles using the Standards Editor.
Managing and Using Generative View Styles

Administering Generative View Styles and Standards
Before You Begin Setting Generative View Style Parameters
Setting General Generative View Style Parameters
Setting Workbench-Specific Generative View Style Parameters
What You Need to Know About Generative View

Styles
This section deals with the following subjects:
● About Generative View Styles
● Managing Generative View Styles

❍ One generative view style per view
❍ Standalone drawings
❍ Administrator-controlled access and modification
❍ Administrator-controlled authorized styles
❍ A generative view style file available by default
❍ Editing the generative view style file
❍ Import of a newer version of a generative view style file
❍ To sum-up
● Using Generative View Styles

❍ Creating views using generative view styles
❍ Switching a view to another generative view style
❍ Applying the generative style of a view to another view
❍ Applying a generative view style to a view
About Generative View Styles

Generative view styles let you customize the appearance and behavior of a generated view via a set of pre-defined
parameters and options.
Administrators can create one or several generative view styles from which users can choose when creating a
generative view.
Generative view styles are defined in an XML file.
Some workbenches (such as Structure Design or Generative Shape Design) also offer the possibility of configuring
generative view styles. These styles will be specific to views generated from this workbench, and will specify the
appearance of the geometry to be generated. To know if a given workbench supports generative view styles, either
refer to its documentation or to Setting Generative View Style Parameters.
Managing Generative View Styles

One generative view style per view
When you create a view using a generative view style, you specify the XML file that will be associated with this
view. Within a drawing, you can only associate one generative view style to a given view, but you can use several
generative view style files by associating different files to different views.
Standalone drawings
The values of the parameters in the specified XML file are embedded into the CATDrawing document when a
generative view style is applied to a view. Each drawing contains an embedded copy of the generative view style(s)
it uses. The drawing is therefore standalone. This makes it possible for users, projects, or companies to exchange
CATDrawing documents without needing to send the generative view style file along.
Administrator-controlled access and modification
The administrator defines and controls the location of the generative view style files as well as the ability to modify
existing ones. For example, the administrator can define a single generative view style, and prevent users from
modifying it.
Administrator-controlled authorized styles
The administrator defines the list of authorized generative view styles, in the Drafting standards XML file.
A generative view style file available by default
By default, a pre-defined generative view style file is delivered. This file is located in
install_root/resources/standard/generativeparameters/DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml.
Administrators can customize this file to define their default generative view styles. They can also use this file as a
template for creating new generative view styles.
They can add as many generative view style files as needed. Refer to Administering Generative View Styles for
more information.
Do not delete the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file: it contains all generative view style parameters. Furthermore,
it is used as a default if a parameter happens to be missing from a custom view style file (in this case, the
corresponding parameter defined in DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml will be used instead). In case the
DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file cannot be found, then the application will use its own default parameter instead.
Editing the generative view style file
The generative view style files can be edited using an interactive editor. This editor provides an easy-to-use graphic
interface to let you customize the parameters included in the generative view style file. For information on how to
customize the parameters included in the generative view style file, refer to Setting Generative View Style
Parameters.
The interactive editor is available in Tools -> Standards. (It is the same editor with which you can customize the
Drafting standards). For more information on how to use this editor, refer to the Customizing Standards chapter in
the Infrastructure User's Guide.
Make sure you use the Standards editor available in Tools -> Standards when modifying and customizing the XML
generative view style files. Using other editors (such as text editors) may alter the consistency of the generative
view style XML files, and may make them unusable.
Import of a newer version of a generative view style file
Once a generative view style has been assigned to a view, it is embedded into the drawing. This means that if you
update the generative view style file that was used to create the view, the style of the view itself will not be
modified and will remain as it was when the view was created.
To modify the style used by the view, you need to import the newer version of the generative view style XML file
into the drawing. To do so, select Tools -> Import a generative view style. In the dialog box which is displayed,
select the generative view style to import and click OK.
Note the following points:
● The newer, imported generative view style will completely override the older version of the generative view style
in all views which use this generative view style.
● If the drawing contains views which use other generative view styles, these views will not be affected by the
import.
Importing a newer version of a given generative view style file will be useful to ensure that views created on a
previous release using the generative view styles provided by default with the application benefit from the new
styles parameters that were added in the latest release.
To sum-up
A view with a generative view style is created according to the following procedure:
1. You create View 1 using the generative view style defined in Style1.xml.
2. As a consequence, Style1.xml is embedded into the drawing.
3. Then, when a given parameter cannot be retrieved from Style1.xml, DefaultGenerativestyle.xml is
embedded into the drawing.
4. Finally, the missing parameter is retrieved from DefaultGenerativestyle.xml
If a given parameter cannot be retrieved from the default xml file, a pre-defined and non modifiable value is used
instead.
Import of a generative view file is as follows:
1. View 1 has been created using the generative view style defined in Style1.xml that was embedded into the
drawing.
2. You import External Style1.xml and the current xml file is removed.
3. As a consequence View1 refers to imported Style1.xml.

Using Generative View Styles

Creating views using generative view styles
When generating a view from the 3D, users can choose to use one of the styles defined by the administrator. Refer
to Creating Views Using Generative View Styles.
Switching a view to another generative view style
Once a view has been created using a specific generative view style, it is possible to switch this view to another
view style. Refer to Switching a View to Another Generative View Style.
Applying the generative style of a view to another view
You can apply the generative view style used to create a given view to another view. Refer to Applying the
Generative Style of a View to Another View.
Applying a generative view style to a view
You can apply a generative view style to a view which was created without one. Refer to Applying a Generative View
Style to a View After its Creation.
Administering Generative View Styles and

Standards
● Location of Generative View Style Files or Standard Files
❍ Setting the location of generative view style files
● Customizing and Defining Generative View Styles or Standards
This task documents the administration of both generative view styles (Generative Drafting workbench)
and standards (Interactive Drafting workbench), as the procedure is basically the same whether you
are administering generative view styles or standards. The examples provided in this task specifically
deal with the administration of generative view styles.
For more information on customizing and administering standards, refer to the Administration Tasks
chapter in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
Location of Generative View Style Files or Standard

Files
The location of generative view style files or standard files is defined by two environment variables
which can be set during installation or modified afterwards:
Variable name Description

CATCollectionStandard Path and name of the directory (or directories) which contains:
● the generativeparameters sub-directories (which themselves
contain the customized generative view styles). It is in these
generativeparameters sub-directories that you should
add the generative view styles customized for a
company, project or user.
● the drafting sub-directories (which themselves contain the
customized drafting standards). It is in these drafting sub-
directories that you should add the drafting standards
customized for a company, project or user.
CATDefaultCollectionStandard Path and name of the directory (or directories) which contains:
● the generativeparameters sub-directories (which themselves
contain the predefined generative view styles delivered by
Dassault Systemes).
● the drafting sub-directories (which themselves contain the
predefined drafting standards delivered by Dassault
Systemes).
The default location for this directory (set during the installation
process) is the installation directory
install_root\resources\standard.
Setting the location of generative view style files

Refer to the Administration Tasks chapter in the Interactive Drafting User's Guide for specific
information on how to set the location of standard files.
There are two possibilities:

● If you want to place all customized generative view styles in a custom directory, named
mydirectory for example, you need to proceed as follows:
1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example).
2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be named
generativeparameters.
3. Place the XML files containing your customized generative view styles in
mydirectory\generativeparameters.
● If you have not yet customized your XML generative view style files, then proceed as follows:
1. Create a directory named as you like (mydirectory, for example).
2. Create a sub-directory under this directory, which needs to be named
generativeparameters.
3. Set the CATCollectionStandard variable to mydirectory. After you have customized
the XML generative view style files, the standard editor will then save them in
mydirectory\generativeparameters.
● If the CATDefaultCollectionStandard and the CATCollectionStandard variables both contain an
identically-named generative view styles, it is always the style found in CATCollectionStandard
which will be used.
● If two directories referenced by the CATCollectionStandard and/or
CATDefaultCollectionStandard variables contain identically-named generative view style files, it is
always the style in the directory listed first which will be used.
Customizing and Defining Generative View Styles or

Standards
To edit and save generative view style files or standard files in Tools -> Standards, you must be
running the V5 session in administrator mode (-admin).
The recommended method for customizing generative view style files or standard files is the following:
1. You need to work in administrator mode. To do this, proceed as follows:
a. Set up the CATReferenceSettingPath variable.
b. Start a V5 session using the -admin option.
For more information, refer to the Managing Environments chapter in the Infrastructure
Installation Guide.
2. Set up the CATCollectionStandard environment variable as explained above.
If none of the conditions are respected, a warning message will appear to let you know that you
will neither be able to modify nor save the XML files.
3. Modify the generative view styles or the Drafting standards as appropriate.
4. Use the Save As or the OK button to store your modifications.
5. To exit, use the Cancel button.
Once the generative view style files or the standard files have been customized and saved, they can be
used in a V5 session in normal mode.
Before You Begin Setting Generative View Style

Parameters
● Structure of the Generative View Styles
● Customizing Generative View Style Parameters
Structure of the Generative View Styles

The DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file is available in the Standard Definition dialog box (via Tools ->
Standards > generativeparameters category).
This file is structured as a tree. Under the Standard -> DefaultGenerativeStyle nodes, there are
several sub-nodes:
● the Drafting node is devoted to customizing generative view styles for views generated from any 3D
workbench in general. For more information, refer to Setting General Generative View Style
Parameters.
● the other nodes are devoted to customizing generative view styles for views generated from given
workbenches. For example, the SheetMetal node is devoted to customizing generative view styles for
views generated from the Generative SheetMetal Design workbench. For more information, refer to
Setting Workbench-Specific Generative View Style Parameters and/or to the workbench's User's
Guide.
Customizing Generative View Style Parameters

In this scenario, you will learn how to customize generative view style parameters using a specific
example.
The pre-defined DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file specifies that hidden edges should be displayed in
black, using a specific linetype and thickness. You will modify these parameters so that hidden edges are
displayed in orange, for example, and using a different linetype and thickness.
Note that all generative view styles apply to views generated in exact mode.
Select Tools -> Standards to launch the Standard Definition dialog box. Choose the
generativeparameters category, and then open the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file from the drop-
down list.
1. In the editor, expand the following nodes successively: Standard -> DefaultGenerativeStyle ->
Drafting -> ViewDressup -> GeneratedGeometry -> HiddenEdges.
2. Select the Color parameter.
3. Set the color to orange, for example by choosing another color from the drop-down list in the right-
hand pane.
4. Select the Linetype parameter.
5. Set the linetype to 4, for example by choosing another linetype number from the drop-down list in
the right-hand pane.
Linetypes are defined in Tools -> Options -> General -> Display -> Linetype tab.
6. Select the Thickness parameter.
7. Set the thickness to 2, for example by choosing another thickness number from the drop-down list
in the right-hand pane.
To define a thickness, select Tools -> Standards to launch the Standard Definition dialog
box. Choose the drafting category, and then open the [StandardFile].xml file from the
drop-down list. In the editor, expand the following nodes successively: Standard ->
[StandardFile] -> Line Thicknesses.
8. Click OK to save your modifications and exit the standards editor.
9. Define a new drawing sheet.
10. Create a front view. The view is generated, taking into account the parameters you defined.
Setting General Generative View Style

Parameters
In the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file, the Drafting node is devoted to customizing generative view styles
for views generated from any 3D workbench in general. It contains the following sub-nodes:
● Generate parameters: Specify whether the elements should be projected in the view.
● ViewDressup parameters: Define the style of the various parameters which deal with the dress-up of the
view.
See also:
● Before You Begin Setting Generative View Style Parameters for more information on the structure of
generative view styles and on how to customize generative view style parameters.
● Setting Workbench-Specific Generative View Style Parameters to learn about customizing generative view
styles for views generated from given workbenches.
Generate Parameters
Generate parameters are located in the Drafting -> Generate node of the generative view style XML file
(available via Tools -> Standard -> generativeparameters category -> *.XML file).
These parameters specify whether the elements should be projected in the view. They are detailed in the
table below.
● For more information on projected elements, refer to Properties available on Generative Views in the
Editing View Properties section of the Interactive Drafting User's Guide.
● All generative view styles apply to views generated in exact mode. On top of that, some generative
view style parameters also apply when creating other view types (CGR, Approximate and Raster), as
specified in the Remark column.
Parameter Value Description Remark

Specifies whether axis
AxisLines Yes/No lines should be -
projected.
Specifies whether center
CenterLines Yes/No lines should be -
projected.
None / Boundaries / OriginalEdges / Defines the fillet
Fillets -
ProjectedOriginalEdges representation mode.
Specifies whether Also applies to CGR,
HiddenLines Yes/No hidden lines should be Approximate and Raster
projected. view types.
Specifies whether
Threads Yes/No threads should be -
projected.
Specifies whether 3D
3DPoints Yes/No points should be -
projected.
Specifies whether
Wireframe Yes/No wireframe should be -
projected.
Replaced by
Specifies whether colors 3DInheritance
Using3DColors Yes/No defined in 3D should be
parameters in styles
kept.
provided since V5R12.
Specifies whether
Drafting specifications
Also applies to CGR,
applied to assembly
Using3DSpec Yes/No Approximate and Raster
instances (cut, use,
view types.
hidden lines) should be
used.
Generative Drafting
View Dress-up parameters
Version 5 Release 16 Page 774
View dress-up parameters are located in the Drafting -> ViewDressup node of the generative view style XML file (available via Tools -> Standard ->
generativeparameters category -> *.XML file).
These parameters define the style of the various parameters which deal with the dress-up of the view.
● Dress-up parameters
❍ Operators
❍ 3DInheritance
❍ GeneratedGeometry
● How are dress-up parameters computed?

❍ Dress-up parameters computation process
❍ Inheritance versus 3D type
❍ Inheritance versus fillets and hidden lines
❍ Inheritance versus wireframe
❍ Properties versus functional role (1)
❍ Properties versus functional role (2)
All generative view styles apply to views generated in exact mode. On top of that, some generative view style parameters also apply when creating other
view types (CGR, Approximate and Raster), as specified for each concerned view dress-up element.
Dress-up Parameters
There are various kinds of dress-up parameters:
● Operators
● 3DInheritance
● GeneratedGeometry
Operators
Parameter Parameter Name Value Description

Visible yes/no Specifies whether or not the section profile should be visible.
Color color Determines the color of the section profile.
Section
Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for the section profile.
Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for the section profile.
The section profile parameter is displayed in red.

Color color Determines the color of the skin section profile.
Section -> SkinSection Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for the skin section profile.
Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for the skin section profile.
Color color Determines the color of the solid section profile.

Section -> SolidSection Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for the solid section profile.
Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for the solid section profile.
Detail Visible yes/no Specifies whether or not the detail profile should be visible.
Color color Determines the color of the detail profile.
Remark: all parameters also
Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for the detail profile.
apply to CGR, Approximate and
Raster view types.
Generative Drafting Thickness integer
Version Determines
5 Release 16 the line thickness used for the detail
Page profile.
777
Break Visible yes/no Specifies whether or not the break profile should be visible.
Color color Determines the color of the break profile.
Remark: all parameters also
Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for the break profile.
apply to CGR, Approximate and
Raster view types. Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for the break profile.
Visible yes/no Specifies whether or not the breakout profile should be visible.
Color color Determines the color of the breakout profile.
Breakout
Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for the breakout profile.
Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for the breakout profile.
3DInheritance

Color yes/no Specifies whether wireframe color should be inherited from 3D.
Wireframe Linetype yes/no Specifies whether wireframe linetype should be inherited from 3D.
Thickness yes/no Specifies whether wireframe thickness should be inherited from 3D.
Solid Color yes/no Specifies whether solid color should be inherited from 3D.
Linetype yes/no Specifies whether solid linetype should be inherited from 3D.
Remark: all parameters also apply to Raster view types. Thickness yes/no Specifies whether solid thickness should be inherited from 3D.
Color yes/no Specifies whether 3D points color should be inherited from 3D.
3D Points
Symbol yes/no Specifies whether 3D points symbol should be inherited from 3D.
GeneratedGeometry

VividEdges Color color Determines the color of vivid edges.
Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for vivid edges.
Remark: all parameters apply to CGR and Approximate view types. Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for vivid edges.
HiddenEdges Color color Determines the color of hidden edges.

Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for hidden edges.
Remark: all parameters apply to CGR and Approximate view types. Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for hidden edges.
Color color Determines the color of fillets.

Fillets Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for fillets.
Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for fillets.
Color color Determines the color of wireframe.

Wireframe Linetype integer Determines the linetype used for wireframe.
Thickness integer Determines the line thickness used for wireframe.
Determines the symbol used for 3D points.

3DPoints Symbols integer Use O to inherit from the 3D symbol,
use 1 to 8 to choose a custom symbol.
How are dress-up parameters computed?

Dress-up parameters are computed according to the following process and cases:
● Dress-up parameters computation process
● Inheritance versus 3D type
● Inheritance versus fillets and hidden lines
● Inheritance versus wireframe
● Properties versus functional role (1)
● Properties versus functional role (2)
Dress-up parameters computation process

When computed, dress-up parameters are either retrieved from the 3D graphic attributes, or depend on the type of projected element. The graph below
explains this in detail:
Inheritance versus 3D type

Inheritance versus fillets and hidden lines

Inheritance versus wireframe

Properties versus "functional" role (1)

Properties versus "functional" role (2)

Setting Workbench-Specific Generative View

Style Parameters
In the DefaultGenerativeStyle.xml file, the nodes other than the Drafting node are devoted to customizing
generative view styles for views generated from given workbenches.
● Automotive BiW Fastening parameters specify whether and how spot fasteners should be projected in the
view.
● Composites Design parameters specify how plies and cores should be projected in the view.
● Electrical Harness Flattening parameters specify how bundle segments, protective coverings, devices and
supports should be projected in the view.
● Generative Shape Design parameters specify whether and how the 3D working support should be projected
in the view.
● SheetMetal parameters specify how bends and stamps should be projected in the view.
● Equipment & Systems Parameters specify how Piping, Equipment, HVAC, Tubing, Compartment and Access,
Raceway & Conduit Design, Waveguide elements should be projected in the view.
In the case of workbench-specific nodes not listed above, refer to the corresponding User's Guide.
See also:
● Before You Begin Setting Generative View Style Parameters for more information on the structure of
generative view styles and on how to customize generative view style parameters.
● Setting General Generative View Style Parameters to learn about customizing generative view styles for
views generated from any 3D workbench in general.
Automotive BiW Fastening Generative

Parameters
Automotive BiW Fastening generative parameters are located in the Automotive BiW Fastening node
of the generative view style XML file (available via Tools -> Standard -> generativeparameters
category -> DefaultGenerative Style.xml file).
Only spot parameters are defined and accessible through Fasteners -> Spot Fasteners -> Generate.
These parameters specify whether and how spot fasteners should be projected in the view. They are
detailed in the table below.
Parameters Value Description

Specifies whether the spot fastener location must be
Extract Location yes/no
extracted or not (default value = Yes).
Specifies the maximum angle between the spot normal vector
Angular Tolerance float orientation and the direction of the view used for the spot
extraction (default value = 90).
Specifies whether you wish to visualize the 2D reverse spots
Include View Reverse Direction yes/no
(default value = No).
Composites Design Parameters

Composites Design parameters are located in the Composites Design -> Ply or Composites Design -
> Core node of the generative view style XML file (available via Tools -> Standard ->
generativeparameters category -> DefaultGenerative Style.xml file).
table below.
Ply
Determines whether the 3D contours of the plies should be extracted or
Contour yes/no
not.
Exploded Determines whether the exploded surfaces of the plies should be
yes/no
Surface extracted or not.
Determines whether the flatten shapes of the plies should be extracted
Flatten yes/no
or not.
Core
Solid yes/no Determines whether the solid should be extracted or not.
Electrical Harness Flattening Parameters

Electrical harness flattening parameters are located in the Electrical node of the Generative View Style
XML file (available via Tools -> Tools -> Standard -> generativeparameters category ->
DefaultGenerativeStyle.XML file).
Customizing these parameters affects the appearance of your drawings.
Note: Generative View Styles only work on Electrical Harness Flattening data, that is to say after
extraction from the 3D data.
● Bundle segments
● Protective coverings
● Devices
● Supports
All generative view styles apply to views generated in exact mode. On top of that, some generative view
style parameters also apply when creating other view types (CGR, Approximate and Raster), as specified
for each concerned view dress-up element.
Bundle Segments

Determines the
linetype used for
DoubleLine bundle
GraphicRepresentation GraphicRepresentation
/SingleLine segments.
Default value:
DoubleLine
Specifies
whether or not
Generation yes/no to generate an
associated text
template.
Specifies the
name of the
AutomaticGeneration > TextTemplate catalog
containing text
templates.
The catalog is
the one
identified in the
Electrical
Drawing
character Catalog box
CatalogName (Tools >
string
Options >
Equipment &
Systems >
Electrical
Harness
Flattening). If
no catalog is
specified, the
system scans all
catalogs defined
in Tools >
Options.
Specifies the
character
TextTemplateName name of the text
string
template.
Specifies
whether or not
Generation yes/no
to generate wire
annotations.
Identifies the
order in which
wire attributes
AutomaticGeneration > WireAnnotation
are generated. A
Attributes, for example,
"0" value means
InstanceName, PartNumber, Integer
that no
Diameter
annotation for
the selected
attribute is
generated.
Specifies
whether or not
to automatically
generate
AutomaticGeneration >
Generation yes/no dimensions for
TechnologicalFeatureDimension
technological
features.
Default value:
No
Protective Coverings
There are two kinds of protective covering:
● Tape
● Corrugated tube
Parameters are the same for both kinds of protective covering.

Determines the
linetype used for
DoubleLine protective
GraphicRepresentation
/SingleLine covering.
Default value:
DoubleLine
Tape or Corrugated tube Determines
whether or not
the customized
Thickness yes/no line type standard
is taken into
account.
Default value: No
Specifies whether
or not to generate
a 2D detail on
Generation yes/no
ends of protective
coverings.
Default value: No
Specifies a
coefficient that
sizes the 2D
detail according
Coefficient integer
to the layer of
protective
covering.
Default value: 1.1
2DdetailOnExtremities
Specifies the
name of the
catalog containing
2D details.
The catalog is the

one identified in
the Electrical
Drawing
Catalog box
character (Tools >
CatalogName Options >
string
Equipment &
Systems >
Electrical
Harness
Flattening). If
no catalog is
specified, the
system scans all
catalogs defined
in Tools >
Options.
Specifies whether
or not to generate
Generation yes/no
an associated text
template.
Specifies the
name of the
catalog containing
text templates.
The catalog is the

one identified in
the Electrical
Drawing
Catalog box
AutomaticGeneration > TextTemplate character (Tools >
CatalogName Options >
string
Equipment &
Systems >
Electrical
Harness
Flattening). If
no catalog is
specified, the
system scans all
catalogs defined
in Tools >
Options.
Specifies the
character
TextTemplateName name of the text
string
template.
Specifies whether
or not to
automatically
AutomaticGeneration > generate
Generation yes/no
TechnologicalFeatureDimension dimensions for
technological
features.
Default value: No
Devices
There are various kinds of device:
● Single insert connectors

● Ground studs
● Terminal strips
● Terminal blocks
● External splices
● Internal splices
● Equipment
● Back shells
Parameters are the same for each of the above devices.
Specifies whether to generate a

3Dprojection/2D 3D representation or a 2D
Type
detail detail representing the device.
Default value: 3D projection.
Specifies how to orient 2D
detail.
No (default value): 2D detail is
oriented with respect to main
2DDetailOrientation yes/no
drawing view.
Yes: 2D detail is oriented with
respect to bundle segment
(BNS) tangency.
GraphicReplacement
Specifies the name of the

catalog containing the 2D
details.
The catalog is the one identified

in the Electrical Drawing
CatalogName character string Catalog box (Tools > Options
> Equipment & Systems >
Electrical Harness
Flattening). If no catalog is
specified, the system scans all
catalogs defined in Tools >
Options.
2DDetailOrientation=No
2DDetailOrientation=Yes
Specifies whether or not to

Generation yes/no generate an associated text
template.
Specifies the name of the
catalog containing the text
templates.
The catalog is the one identified

AutomaticGeneration > in the Electrical Drawing
TextTemplate CatalogName character string Catalog box (Tools > Options
> Equipment & Systems >
Electrical Harness
Flattening). If no catalog is
specified, the system scans all
catalogs defined in Tools >
Options.
Specifies the name of the text
TextTemplateName character string
template.
Specifies whether or not to

Generation yes/no
generate wire annotations.
AutomaticGeneration > Identifies the order in which
WireAnnotation Attributes, for example, wire attributes are generated. A
InstanceName, Integer "0" value means that no
PartNumber, Diameter annotation for the selected
attribute is generated.
Supports

Specifies whether to
generate a 3D
representation (default
Type 3Dprojection/2D detail
value) or a 2D detail
representing the
support.
Specifies the name of
the catalog containing
the 2D details.
Graphic replacement The catalog is the one

identified in the
Electrical Drawing
CatalogName character string Catalog box (Tools >
Options > Equipment
& Systems >
Electrical Harness
Flattening). If no
catalog is specified, the
system scans all
catalogs defined in
Tools > Options.
Specifies whether or
not to generate an
Generation yes/no
associated text
template.
the catalog containing
the text templates.
The catalog is the one

identified in the
AutomaticGeneration > Electrical Drawing
TextTemplate Catalog box (Tools >
CatalogName character string
Options > Equipment
& Systems >
Electrical Harness
Flattening). If no
catalog is specified, the
system scans all
catalogs defined in
Tools > Options.
TextTemplateName character string
the text template.
Generative Shape Design Parameters

Generative Shape Design parameters are located in the Generative Shape Design ->
WorkOnSupport node of the generative view style XML file (available via Tools -> Standard ->
generativeparameters category -> DefaultGenerative Style.xml file).
Only work on support parameters are defined.
table below.
Parameter Value Description

Determines whether the
3D working support
Extraction yes/no
should be extracted or
not (default value = No).
Specifies the minimum
distance (in percentage of
a square) between the
grid limit and the
Grid step ratio for increasing grid limit integer geometry (default value =
10). If the distance is
lower than the defined
value, a square is added
to the grid.
Defines the color of the
Lines> Color color grid's lines (default value
= Black).
Defines the linetype of
Lines>Linetype integer the grid's lines (default
value = 1).
Defines the thickness of
Lines>Thickness integer the grid's lines (default
value = 1).
Defines the labels' type
Labels>Type Inherited from 3D labels/LWH/XYZ (default value = Inherited
from 3D labels).
Defines the position of the
Labels>Position>Horizontal None/Left/Right/Both sides horizontal labels (default
value = None).
Defines the position of the
Labels>Position>Vertical None/Top/Bottom/Both sides vertical labels (default
value = None).
Defines the labels' font
Labels>Font>Name font name (default value =
Arial).
Labels>Font>Size integer
size (default value = 10).
Labels>Font>Color color color (default value =
Black).
Specifies whether the

labels' font should be bold
Labels>Font>Bold yes/no
or not (default value =
No).
Specifies whether the
labels' font should be
Labels>Font>Italic yes/no
italic or not (default value
= No).
SheetMetal Parameters
SheetMetal parameters are located in the SheetMetal -> SheetMetalDesign -> Bend or SheetMetal -> SheetMetalDesign ->
Stamp node of the generative view style XML file (available via Tools -> Standard -> generativeparameters category ->
DefaultGenerative Style.xml file).
The parameters specify how bends and stamps should be projected in a Generative Drafting view. They are detailed in the table below.
Bend
Visible Yes/No Specifies whether axis of upward bends should be projected.
Color Color Determines the color of the axis of upward bends.
Axis>Upward
Linetype Integer Determines the linetype used for the axis of upward bends.
Thickness Integer Determines the thickness used for the axis of upward bends.
Specifies whether the axis of downward bends should be
Visible Yes/No
projected.
Color Color Determines the color of the axis of downward bends.
Axis>Downward Determines the linetype used for the axis of downward
Linetype Integer
bends.
Determines the thickness used for the axis of downward
Thickness Integer
bends.
Specifies whether the angle annotation of the bend axis
Visible Yes/No
should be projected.
Specifies the prefix used for the angle annotation of the bend
Axis>Annotations>Angle Prefix String
axis. Angle is used as default value.
Specifies whether the annotation of the internal or external
Type Internal/External
angle should be projected.
Specifies whether the radius annotation of the bend axis
Visible Yes/No
should be projected.
Axis>Annotations>Radius
Specifies the prefix used for the radius annotation of the
Prefix String
bend axis. Radius is used as default value.
Specifies whether the annotation specifying the direction of
Visible Yes/No
the bend should be projected.
Axis>Annotations>UpDownStatus
UpString String Specifies the upward direction for the axis annotation.
DownString String Specifies the downward direction for the axis annotation.
Specifies whether BTLs (Bend Tangent Lines) should be
Visible Yes/No
projected.
BTLs Color Color Determines the color of BTLs.
Linetype Integer Determines the linetype used for BTLs.
Thickness Integer Determines the thickness used for BTLs.
Stamp
Visible Yes/No Specifies whether upward stamps should be projected.

Color Color Determines the color of upward stamps.
AppropriateLines>Upward
Linetype Integer Determines the linetype used for upward stamps.
Thickness Integer Determines the thickness used for upward stamps.
Specifies whether downward stamps should be
Visible Yes/No
projected.
AppropriateLines>Downward Color Color Determines the color of downward stamps.
Linetype Integer Determines the linetype used for downward stamps.
Thickness Integer Determines the thickness used for downward stamps.
Specifies whether the annotation specifying the
Visible Yes/No
standard name for stamps should be projected.
Annotations>StandardName Specifies the prefix used for the annotation specifying
Prefix String the standard name for stamps. Standard name is used
as default value.
Equipment & Systems Parameters

This section provides information about generative view style parameters. These parameters are used in the
drawing production function, which allows you to customize and create a 2-D drawing from a 3-D document.
See the section Drawing Production in the user guide for the product you are using for more information,
including the location of the sample file.
Customizing these parameters affects the appearance of your drawings and is an administrative task. These
parameters are applicable to the following disciplines/applications:
● Piping
● Equipment
● HVAC
● Tubing
● Compartment and Access
● Raceway & Conduit Design
● Waveguide
These generative view style parameters are located in the corresponding nodes of the generative view style XML
file (available via Tools -> Standard -> generativeparameters category -> DefaultGenerative Style.xml
file).
Parameter Value Description

Text is created if this entry
An ATS name from the application
ATS_1 ......ATS_40 corresponds to an attribute on the 3-
ATS catalog.
D object.
Yes positions the text anchor point at
the edge of the box surrounding the
generated geometry. No positions
ATS_AutoPosition Yes/No
the point at the approximate center
of the geometry (center of the first
segment for multi-segment pipes).
The text is offset by the number (of
ATS_CharacterOffset An integer value
characters) entered as the value.
Yes means a center line will display
CenterLines Yes/No (available in objects with a "double"
graphic representation).
The length by which a center line will
CenterLinesExtensionLength A real value
extend beyond a pipe.
When set to Yes, a symbol is
CenterofGravitySymbol Yes/No displayed at a part's center of gravity
(for equipment only).
The RGB value of the color of the
Color From 0 to 255 for each
generated part.
If set to Yes, the intersection of

CornerBendPoint Yes/No adjacent pipe (or tube) segments will
display a point.
Yes means an endstyle symbol will
EndStyleSymbol Yes/No be displayed in the drawing for each
piping part that has an endstyle.
Yes means a symbol will display at
FabricationBreakSymbol Yes/No
the ends of each spool.
The value to which GR_1 is set
Representation names such as
GR_1 determines the type of graphic
Single/Double/Envelope/ Layout
representation output to 2-D.
LineGapping Yes/No Yes means line gapping will display.
The length of a gap in a line at a
LineGappingValue A real value point where it is crossed by another
line, in millimeters.
The value indicating the thickness of
An integer value as defined in the the line. You can define a different
LineThickness
Drafting application line thickness for each graphic
representation within an application.
An integer value as defined in the The value indicating the line type of
LineType
Drafting application the generated part.
A part larger than the entered value
A string value or no entry, from the will not be generated in the 2-D
MaxNominalSize
NominalSize table drawing. No entry means there is no
limit.
A part smaller than the entered value
A string value or no entry, from the will not be generated in the 2-D
MinNominalSize
NominalSize table drawing. No entry means there is no
limit.
Yes means the part will be generated
Visible Yes/No in the drawing. No means it will not
be generated.
Glossary
A
absolute position A sheet coordinates.
active view A view from which you create any element: another view or 2D dress-up.
The view from which section views, section cuts and detail views will be
created. This view generally corresponds to either the front view or the
isometric view.
aligned section view A section view created from a cutting profile defined from non parallel
planes. In order to include in a section certain angled elements, the cutting
plane may be bent so as to pass through those features. The plane and
feature are then imagined to be revolved into the original plane.
approximate mode One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. The
Approximate mode is particularly well-adapted to sophisticated products or
assemblies involving large amounts of data. Although Approximate views are
not as high in precision and quality as exact views, this generation mode
dramatically reduces memory consumption and performances may also be
improved.
associative detail A detail view associated with a 3D element.
view
associativity In the Drafting workbench, the ability of child view(s) to follow the behavior
of the parent view: moving, scaling.
attribute In the Drafting workbench, the graphical and/or geometrical properties
inherited from 3D element.
auxiliary view A view in a direction not necessarily vertical or horizontal. In order to show
the true shapes, it is necessary to assume a direction of sight perpendicular
to planes that are perpendicular of the curves. This auxiliary view, together
with the top view, completely describes the object.
B
background view In a sheet, the background view is dedicated to frames and title blocks.
back-clipping A back-clipping removes all the elements behind a pre-defined plane. It can
only be applied on an extracted view. A back-clipping plane is a plane used
for generating a back-clipping.
A piece of information inserted into the active view of a CATDrawing
bill of material document. For this, you can be either in the working view or in the
background view.
breakout A breakout is a partially removed section which allows visualizing a

particular element in the view. A breakout view is one not in direct
projection from the view containing the cutting profile. In other words, it is
not positioned in agreement with the standard arrangement of views. A
breakout view is often a partial section.
A view that allows shortening an elongated object, using two profiles
broken view
corresponding to the part to be broken from the view extremities.
C
callout A graphical representation of a cutting profile.
CGR mode One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. CGR (CATIA
Graphical Representation) corresponds to a data format containing a
graphical representation of the geometry only, which is available with the
Visualization mode (as opposed to the exact geometry, which is available
with the Design mode). CGR views are not as high in quality as exact views,
but they consume much less memory during the generation. This may be
useful when dealing with sophisticated products or assemblies involving
large amounts of data.
child view A view generated from a parent view.
clipped view A view modified via a clipping profile.
clipping profile A zone to be kept and visualized in a view.
cross hatching A symbolic representation in the form of a pattern used to display a cut
area.
cut area The cut surfaces on a section view or section cut.
cutting profile A set of planes used to define a section view or section cut.
D
datum feature An element defining a contacting surface on a part.
datum target An element defining a contacting surface on a part and represented by
spherical or pointed locating pins.
design tree Area of the document window reserved for viewing the design specifications
of a drawing, presented in the form of a tree structure.
detail view A view corresponding to a zoomed particular area to be visualized. This area
to be visualized is defined by a circle or a given polygon. This view is
computed using a boolean operator from the 3D
The root feature. Sheets are aggregated in the drawing. Views are
drawing
aggregated in the sheets.
dress-up A graphical attribute of a 2D element.
E
One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. Exact views
exact view are generated from the Design mode, i.e. they are views for which the
geometry is available.
F
A view that is extracted from a 3D part that is assigned 3D tolerance
FD&T view
specifications and annotations.
filter A restriction on elements to be cut in a section view or section cut, or
elements to be seen in a projection view.
first angle projection method An orthographic representation of the views comprising the arrangement,
around the principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views
of that object. With reference to the principal view, the other views are
arranged as follows: the view from above is placed underneath, the view
from below is placed above, the view from the left is placed on the right and
then the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as
convenient.
(Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)
frontal plane A plane of projection upon which the front view is projected.
front view A projection view obtained by drawing perpendiculars from all points on the
edges of the part to the plane of projection. The plane of projection upon
which the front view is projected is called the frontal plane.
G
A set of pre-defined parameters and options which let you customize the
generative view style
appearance and behavior of a generated view.
I
isometric view A 3D view that represents a part according to a given projection plane. This
view allows a perspective visualization. To produce an isometric projection
(isometric means "equal measure"), it is necessary to place the object so
that its principal edges make equal angles with the plane of projection and
are therefore foreshortened equally.
L
lock A locked view is a view in which any graphical modification of the generated
2D elements is forbidden.
M
main view The view which supports the geometry directly created in the sheet.
O
object In the Drafting workbench, there are two kinds of object: activated and
selected. The view frame of an activated object is displayed in red.
offset section view /cut A section view created from a cutting profile defined with several parallel
planes. In sectioning through irregular objects, it is often desirable to show
several features that do not lie in a straight line by offsetting or bending the
cutting plane.
overlay In a multi-model context, all passive elements are called overlayed
elements.
P
parent view A reference view from which another view is generated (for example a front
view from which a section view will be created). The view frame of the
parent view is displayed in red. Typically the front view is a parent view. See
also child view.
part A 3D entity obtained by combining different features in the Part Design
workbench.
A graphical representation used to represent a sectioned/cut part. A same
pattern representation is used for the different parts of the resulting section or
section view.
projection view A view conceived to be drawn or projected onto planes known as planes of
projection. A transparent plane or pane of glass representing a plane of
projection is located parallel to the front surfaces of the part.
Q
quick detail view A view corresponding to a zoomed particular area to be visualized. This area
to be visualized is defined by a circle or a given polygon. This view is directly
computed from the 2D projection.
R
raster mode One of the various modes that can be used to generate views. The raster
mode generates views as images.
S
section cut A view representing the intersection between the 3D geometry and the
cutting profile.
section profile See cutting profile.
section view In the Drafting workbench, a view representing the intersection between the
3D geometry and the cutting profile, and all the 3D geometry located behind
the cutting profile.
simple breakout A simple breakout removes locally a sectioned part perpendicularly to the
current view plane. You will then be able to visualize the remaining visible
inside part.
sheet A set of views. Several sheets may be created in the Drafting workbench.
standard The international conventions that are supported in the Drafting workbench:
ANSI, ISO and JIS.
T
template In the Drafting workbench, an object that is included in the document (for
example, the title block).
An orthographic representation of the views comprising the arrangement,
around the principal view of an object, of some of all of the other five views
of that object. With reference to the principal view, the other views are
third angle projection method arranged as follows: the view from above is placed above, the view from
below is placed underneath, the view from the left is placed on the left and
the view from the rear is placed on the left or on the right, as convenient.
(Ref. No. ISO 10209-2:1993)
title block A frame which contains the title block.
U
An unspec breakout operation removes locally a 3D part. It allows visualizing
unspec breakout
the inside of a 3D part. It can only be applied to an extracted view.
unfolded view A projected view that is created from a Sheet Metal part in order to include
in a section certain angled elements. As a result, the cutting plane may be
bent so as to pass through those features.
V
A square or rectangular frame that contains the geometry and dimensions of
view frame
the view.
W
wizard An assistant for views to be automatically generated once the CATDrawing
document is opened. These views can then be modified as if they had been
manually created one after the other.
Index
Symbols
.model
Numerics
2D component creation (annotation and dress-up settings)
2D components
editing instance properties
2D geometry, editing feature properties
2D/3D associativity
3D constraints
driving via dimensions
generating dimensions from
A
active view
adding leaders to annotations
administration settings
advanced search
aligned section cuts, creating
aligned section views, creating
aligning views
analysis display mode (dimension settings)

analyzing
generated dimensions
interfering dimensions
angle dimensions, creating

annotation creation (annotation and dress-up settings)
annotation settings
annotations
adding leaders
editing properties
handling leaders
modifying positioning
overview
positioning leader breakpoints
querying links
applying to another view
links
Approximate view, about
Approximate views
area fills
arrows
assembly drawings
associated text, creating
associative balloons, creating
associativity (2D/3D)
attributes
adding links to text
replicating for texts

axis lines
creating
creating with center lines
modifying
B
background view (view and sheet layout settings)
background views, managing

balloon creation (annotation and dress-up settings)
balloon generation (generation settings)

balloons
creating
creating associative balloons
generating on a view
modifying
batch, updating drawings
bill of material
blanking in dimensions, modifying
BOM
breakout views
broken views
C
callouts
editing properties
modifying geometry
modifying graphism
CATDrawing
managing documents in VPM

CATDrawing documents
creating
editing links
managing
opening
updating via the batch monitor
CATDrawing specification tree icons

center lines
creating with axis lines
creating with no reference
creating with reference

modifying
CGM
export
import
CGR view, about
CGR views
chained dimension systems, creating

chamfer
detecting
dimensions, creating
clipping view (view generation settings)
clipping view profiles, creating
clipping views, creating
colors (general settings)
colors (geometry creation settings)

command
1 Symbol
Add an Interruption
Advanced Front View
Align into System
Align Views Using Elements
Aligned Section Cut
Aligned Section View
Apply Links To
Area Fill
Arrow
Attribute link
Auxiliary View
Axis Line
Axis Line and Center Line
Balloon
Breakout View
Broken View
Center Line
Center Line with Reference
Chained Dimensions
Chamfer Dimensions
Clipping View
Clipping View Profile
Coordinate Dimension
Coordinate Dimension Table
Copy Object Format
Create Interruption(s)
Cumulated Dimensions
Datum Feature
Datum Target
Detail View
Detail View Profile
Dimension
Dimension Positioning
Exploded View
Extend to Center
Frame
Frame and Title Block
Frame Creation
Front View
Generate Balloons
Generate Dimensions
Geometrical Tolerance
Half Dimension
Hole Dimension Table
Import a generative view style
Invert Profile Direction
Isolate
Isolate Text
Isometric View
Line-Up
Locate Reference View
Locate Resulting View
Modify Links
Offset Section Cut
Offset Section View
Position and Orientation
Position Independently of Reference View
Projection View
Query Object Links
Quick Detail View
Quick Detail View Profile
Radius Center
Remove Interruption(s)
Remove One Interruption
Re-route Dimension
Restore Deleted
Restore Value Position
Roughness Symbol
Search
Set Relative Position
Show Geometry in All Viewpoints
Stacked Dimensions
Superpose
Swap to Radius
Symbol Shape
Table
Text
Text Properties
Text with Leader

Thread
Thread Dimension
Thread with Reference
Unfolded View
View From 3D
Weld
Wizard
constraints creation (geometry creation settings)
constraints display (geometry creation settings)
constraints, driving via dimensions
coordinate dimension table
coordinate dimensions, creating and modifying

copying
geometrical tolerances
graphic properties
creating
advanced front views
aligned section cuts
aligned section views
angle dimensions
area fills
arrows
associated text
associative balloons on views from products
associative thread dimensions
auxiliary views
axis and center lines
axis lines
balloons
breakout views
broken views
center lines with no reference

center lines with reference
chained dimension systems
chamfer dimensions
clipping view profiles
clipping views
coordinate dimensions
cumulated dimension systems
curvilinear length dimensions
datum features
datum targets
detail view profiles
detail views
dimensions
dimensions along a reference direction
dimensions between element and view axis
dimensions between intersection points
driving dimensions
explicit dimensions
exploded views
frame and title blocks
free text
front views
generative view styles
half dimensions
holes dimensions table
inter-technological feature dimensions
intra-technological feature dimensions
isometric views
offset section cuts
offset section views
overall curve dimensions

partial curvilinear length dimensions
points coordinates table
projection views
quick detail view profiles
quick detail views
radius curvature dimensions
roughness symbols
section cuts (planar surface)
section cuts with profile defined in 3D
section views (planar surface)
section views with profile defined in 3D
stacked dimension systems
tables
technological feature dimensions
text frames
text with a leader
threads with no reference
threads with reference
unfolded views
views
views from 3D
views from a .model
views using generative view styles
views via the wizard
welding symbols
welds
creating drawings
cumulated dimension systems, creating
curvilinear length dimensions, creating

customizing
administration settings
annotation and dress-up settings

dimension settings
general settings
generation settings
geometry settings
layout settings
manipulators settings
toolbars
view settings
customizing settings
D
datum features
creating
modifying
datum targets
creating
modifying
defining sheets
Design mode
defining
using
detail view profiles, creating
detail views, creating
detecting chamfer
dimension creation (dimension settings)
dimension generation (generation settings)
Dimension Generation toolbar
dimension manipulators (manipulators settings)
dimension settings
dimension systems
dimensions
along a reference direction
analyzing generated dimensions
analyzing interfering dimensions
angle dimensions
between element and view axis
between intersection points
chained dimension systems
chamfer dimensions
creating
cumulated dimension systems
curvilinear length dimensions
dimension extension line properties
dimension line properties
dimension text properties
dimension tolerance properties
driving 3D constraints
editing dimension value properties
editing font properties
explicit dimensions
filtering dimension generation
generate dimensions in one shot
generate dimensions semi-automatically
generating from 3D constraints
generation overview
half dimensions
holes dimensions table
lining up (free space)
lining up (reference)
lining up dimension systems
modifying blanking
modifying dimension line location
modifying dimension type
modifying overrun
modifying text before/after
modifying value text position
overall curve dimensions
overview
partial curvilinear length dimensions
positioning (view per view)
radius curvature dimensions
re-routing
searching dimension status
specifying value position
stacked dimension systems

documents
managing CATDrawing documents in VPM
Drafting interoperability
drawing management (administration settings)
Drawing toolbar
drawings
creating
editing links
from assemblies
from parts
managing
managing documents in VPM
opening
updating via the batch monitor

dress-up
overview
dress-up (administration settings)
dress-up generation (view generation settings)
dress-up settings
driving 3D constraints
driving dimensions, creating
duplicating generative geometry

DXF/DWG
export
import
E
editing
annotation leaders
dimension value properties
images
ENOVIA LCA
interoperability
managing CATDrawing documents

ENOVIA VPM
interoperability
exact view, about
exact views
explicit dimensions, creating
exploded views
export
CGM
DXF/DWG
file
extension lines, interrupting

F
file
export
import
filtering dimension generation
finding text
frame and title blocks
creating
frames
creating for text
free text
front views
creating
creating from sub-bodies/sub-products
creating with local axis system
creating with selection sets
G
general settings
generated dimensions, analyzing

generating
balloons
bill of material
dimensions
generation
overview
settings
generative view style (administration settings)
Generative view style toolbar
applying to other views
applying to views
Automotive BiW Fastening parameters
Compartment and Access parameters
Composites Design parameters
concepts
creating
creating views
Electrical parameters
Equipment parameters
Generate parameters
Generative Shape Design parameters
HVAC parameters
importing newer versions
Piping parameters
Raceway and Conduit parameters
SheetMetal parameters
structure of
switching view styles
Tubing parameters
ViewDressUp parameters
views
Waveguide parameters
copying
creating
modifying
geometry
duplicating
showing in views
geometry (geometry creation settings)
geometry generation (view generation settings)
geometry settings
geometry welds, creating

graphic properties
copying
editing
grid (general settings)
H
half dimension, creating
handling annotation leaders
holes dimensions table, creating
I
images
editing
inserting
overview
import
CGM
DXF/DWG
file
importing a generative view style
importing tables
inserting
images
views in tables
interfering dimensions, analyzing
interoperability
ENOVIA LCA
ENOVIA VPM
for Drafting
managing CATDrawing documents in ENOVIA LCA
managing CATDrawing documents in ENOVIA VPM

saving data in ENOVIA LCA
interrupting extension lines
isolating views
isometric views
L
layout settings
leaders
adding to annotations
handling
positioning breakpoints
line-up (dimension settings)
lining up dimension systems

lining up dimensions
free space
reference
links
applying to another view
editing for drawings
modifying in a view
local axis system, creating front views with
locating views
locking views
M
managing
CATDrawing documents in VPM
drawings

ENOVIA LCA
ENOVIA VPM
manipulators (manipulators settings)
manipulators settings
mode for view generation

modifying
annotation positioning
axis lines
balloons
callout geometry
callout graphism
center lines
datum features
datum targets
dimension line location
dimension text before/after
dimension type
dimensions overrun and blanking
patterns
tables
views
views from a .model

modifying views
links
move (annotation and dress-up settings)
move (dimension settings)
moving views
N
new sheet (view and sheet layout settings)
O
objects, querying links
occlusion culling
offset section cuts
opening drawings
orientation of text
orientation of views
overall curve dimensions, creating
overloading element properties
overrun in dimensions, modifying
P
part drawings
partial curvilinear length dimensions, creating

patterns
editing properties
modifying
picture
editing properties
points coordinates table
Position and Orientation toolbar

positioning
dimension value text
dimensions (view per view)
leader breakpoints
positioning views
aligning
independently of reference view
methods
relatively
superposing
printing
overview
sheets
using clipping operator
projection plane, modifying
properties
2D component instance properties
2D geometry feature properties
annotation font properties
callout properties
dimension extension line properties
dimension font properties
dimension line properties
dimension text properties
dimension tolerance properties
dimension value properties
graphic properties
pattern properties
picture properties
sheet properties
text properties
view properties
Q
querying object links
quick detail view profiles, creating
quick detail views, creating
R
radius curvature dimensions, creating
raster images, inserting
Raster view, about
raster views
relative position for views
renaming views
replacing text
re-routing dimensions
restoring deleted elements
rotation (general settings)
roughness symbols, creating
ruler (general settings)
S
scaling views
search (advanced)
creating
creating
section/projection callout (view and sheet layout settings)
selection sets, creating front views with
setting relative position for views

settings
administration
annotation and dress-up
customizing
dimension
general
generation
geometry
layout
manipulators
view
sheets
editing properties
managing background views
modify
printing
sheets, defining
showing geometry in views
specifying dimension value position
splitting tables
stacked dimension systems, creating
standards
start workbench (general settings)
style (administration settings)
sub-bodies/sub-products, creating front views from
superposing views
T
table (annotation and dress-up settings)
tables
creating
creating points coordinates table
importing
inserting views in
modifying
splitting
before you begin
inter
intra
text
adding attribute links to
associated text
creating frames
creating free text
creating text with a leader
editing properties
finding and replacing
making an existing text associative
replicating text and attribute
specifying orientation
text before/after dimension value, modifying

threads
associative thread dimensions
creating with no reference
creating with reference

toolbars
customizing
Drawing
Position and Orientation
Views
tree (general settings)

U
unfolded views, creating
updating drawings via the batch monitor

utility
UpdateBatch
V
vector images, inserting
view axis (general settings)
view creation (view and sheet layout settings)
view from 3D (view generation settings)
view generation (view generation settings)
view generation modes
view settings
views
active view
advanced front views
aligned section cuts
aligned section views
aligning
applying a view's links to another view
applying generative view styles
applying generative view styles to other views
auxiliary views
breakout views
broken views
clipping view profiles
clipping views
creating
creating and modifying from a .model
creating via the wizard
detail view profiles
detail views
dress-up
editing properties
exploded views
front views
front views from sub-bodies/sub-products
front views with local axis system
front views with selection sets
generating Approximate views
generating balloons on
generating CGR views
generating exact views
generating raster views
inserting in tables
isolating
isometric views
locating views
locking
managing background views
modifying
modifying a view's links
moving views
offset section cuts
orientation
overloading element properties
positioning
positioning independently of reference view

projection plane
projection views
quick detail view profiles
quick detail views
renaming views
restoring deleted elements
scaling views
setting relative position
showing geometry in views
superposing
switching generative view styles
unfolded views
update reporting
using generative view styles
view from 3D
Views toolbar
Visualization mode
improving performance
saving memory
W
warm start
welding symbols, creating
welds, creating
wizard for creating views

Generative Drafting

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Generative Drafting

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Generative Drafting Version 5 Release 16 Page 1

DELMIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

ENOVIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systèmes.

SMARTEAM® is a registered trademark of SmarTeam Corporation Ltd.

Raster Imaging Technology copyrighted by Snowbound Software Corporation 1993-2001

Copyright © 2005, Dassault Systèmes. All rights reserved.

This overview provides the following information:

● Generative Drafting in a Nutshell

● Before Reading this Guide

● Getting the Most Out of this Guide

● Accessing Sample Documents

● Conventions Used in this Guide

Generative Drafting in a Nutshell

Before Reading this Guide

Getting the Most Out of this Guide

Accessing Sample Documents

● Graphic conventions structuring the tasks

● Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required

● Graphic conventions used in the table of contents

Graphic Conventions Structuring the Tasks

Graphic conventions structuring the tasks are denoted as follows:

This icon... Identifies...

estimated time to accomplish a task

the start of the scenario

information regarding settings, customization, etc.

the end of a task

functionalities that are new or enhanced with this release

allows you to switch back to the full-window viewing mode

Graphic Conventions Indicating the Configuration Required

Graphic conventions indicating the configuration required are denoted as follows:

This icon... Indicates functions that are...

specific to the P1 configuration

specific to the P2 configuration

specific to the P3 configuration

Graphic Conventions Used in the Table of Contents

Graphic conventions used in the table of contents are denoted as follows:

This icon... Gives access to...

Split View Mode

User Tasks or Advanced Tasks

Frequently Asked Questions

How to Use the Mouse

● Select (menus, commands, geometry in graphics area, ...)

● Right-click (to select contextual menu)

The main tasks covered in this tutorial are the following:

All together, this tutorial should take about 20 minutes to complete.

Defining the Drawing Sheet

The New dialog box is displayed.

2. Select Drawing from the List of Types, and click OK.

The drawing sheet appears as shown here:

The File Selection dialog box appears.

2. Select the part to be opened, the GenDrafting_part.CATPart document.

Note that this sample documents is to be found in the C:\Program Files\Dassault

Creating a Front View

1. Click the drawing window to activate it.

Creating a Projection View

4. Click the Projection View icon once again.

The views result as shown here.

Creating a Section View

creating the profile.

3. Double-click to end the cutting profile creation. A preview is displayed.

4. Define the section view position using the cursor.

Creating a Detail View